Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Pdf Chapter 11 Functions Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Solutions Chapter 11 Functions

11th Computer Science Guide Functions Text Book Questions and Answers

Book Evaluation

Part I

Choose The Correct Answer

Question 1.
Which of the following header file defines the standard I/O predefined functions ?
a) stdio.h
b) math.h
c) string.h
d) ctype.h
Answer:
a) stdio.h

Question 2.
Which function is used to check whether a character is alphanumeric or not ?
a) isalpha( )
b) isdigit( )
c) isalnum( )
d) islower( )
Answer:
c) isalnum( )

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 3.
Which function begins the program execution ?
a) isalpha( )
b) isdigit( )
c) main( )
d) islower( )
Answer:
c) main( )

Question 4.
Which of the following function is with a return value and without any argument ?
a) x=display(int/ int)
b) x=display( )
c) y=display(float)
d) display(int)
Answer:
b) x=display( )

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 5.
Which is return data type of the function prototype of add (int, int); ?
a) int
b) float
c) char
d) double
Answer:
a) int

Question 6.
Which of the following is the scope operator ?
a) >
b) &
c) %
d) ::
Answer:
d) ::

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Part – II

Very Short Answers

Question 1.
Define Functions.
Answer:
A large program can typically be split into small subprograms (blocks) called functions where each sub-program can perform some specific functionality. Functions reduce the size and complexity of a program, make it easier to understand, test, and check for errors.

Question 2.
Write about strlen() function.
Answer:
The strlen() takes a null-terminated byte string source as its argument and returns its length. The length does not include the null(\0) character.
Example:
char source[ ] = “Computer Science”;
cout<<“\nGiven String is “<<source<<” its Length is “<<strlen(source);
Output
Given String is Computer Science its Length is 16

Question 3.
What are the importance of void data type?
Answer:
void type has two important purposes:

  1. To indicate the function does not return a value.
  2. To declare a generic pointer.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 4.
What is Parameter and list its types?
Answer:
Arguments or parameters are the means to pass values from the calling function to the called function.
Types:

  1. The variables used in the function definition as parameters are known as formal parameters.
  2. The constants, variables, or expressions used j in the function call are known as actual parameters.

Question 5.
Write a note on Local Scope.
Answer:

  1. A local variable is defined within a block. A block of code begins and ends with curly braces { }.
  2. The scope of a local variable is the block in which it is defined.
  3. A local variable cannot be accessed from outside the block of its declaration.
  4. A local variable is created upon entry into its block and destroyed upon exit

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Part – III

Short Answers

Question 1.
What is Built-in functions?
Answer:
The functions which are available by default are known as “Built-in” functions. Ready-to-use subprograms are called pre-defined functions or built-in functions.

Question 2.
What is the difference between isupper() and toupper() functions?
Answer:
isupper():

  • This function is used to check the given character is uppercase.
  • This function will return 1 if true otherwise 0.

toupper():

  • This function is used to convert the given character into its uppercase.
  • This function will return the upper case equivalent of the given character. If the given character itself is in upper case, the output will be the same.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 3.
Write about strcmp( ) function.
Answer:
strcmp( )
The strcmp( ) function takes two arguments: string 1 and string2. It compares the contents of string 1 and string2 lexicographically.
The strcmp() function returns a:

  • Positive value if the first differing character in string 1 is greater than the corresponding character in string2. (ASCII values are compared)
  • Negative value if the first differing character in string 1 is less than the corresponding character in string2,
  • 0 if string1 and string2 are equal.

Example:
#include <string.h>
#include <iostream>
using namespace std;
int main()
{
char string1[ ] = “Computer”;
char string2[ ] = “Science”;
int result;
result = strcmp(string1,string2);
if(result==0)
{
cout<<“String1 : “<<string1<<” and String2 : “<<string2 <<“Are Equal”;
}
else
{
cout<<“String1 :”<<string1<<” and String2 : “<<string2’ <<“ Are Not Equal”;
}
}
Output
String1 : Computer and String2 : Science Are Not Equa1

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 4.
Write short note on pow( ) function in C++.
Answer:
pow( ) function:
The pow( ) function returns base raised to the power of exponent. If any argument passed to pow( ) is long double, the return type is promoted to long double. If not, the return type is double.
The pow( ) function takes two arguments:

  • base – the base value
  • exponent – exponent of the base

#include <iostream>
#include <math.h>
using namespace std;
int main ( )
{
double base, exponent, result;
base = 5;
exponent = 4;
result = pow(base, exponent);
cout << “pow(“< double x = 25;;
result = sin(x);
cout << “\nsin(“<<x<<“)= “<<result;
return 0;
}
Output
pow(5^4) = 625
sin(25) = -0.132352

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 5.
What are the information the prototype provides to the compiler?
Answer:
The prototype above provides the following information to the compiler:

  1. The return value of the function is of type long.
  2. Fact is the name of the function.
  3. The function is called with two arguments:
    • The first argument is of int data type.
    • The second argument is of double data type, int display(int, int) // function prototype//.

The above function prototype provides details about the return data type, name of the function and a list of formal parameters or arguments.

Question 6.
What is default arguments ? Give example.
Answer:
default arguments:
In C++, one can assign default values to the formal parameters of a function prototype. The default arguments allows to omit some arguments when calling the function.

When calling a function,
For any missing arguments, complier uses the values in default arguments for the called function.
The default value is given in the form of variable initialization.

Example:
void defaultvalue(int n1=10, n2=100);
The default arguments facilitate the function call statement with partial or no arguments or complete arguments.

Example:
defaultvalue(x,y);
defaultvalue(200,150);
defaultvalue(150);
defaultvalue( );
The default values can be included in the function prototype from right to left, i.e., we cannot have a default value for an argument in between the argument list.

Example:
void defaultvalue(int n1 = 10, n2);//invalid prototype
void defaultvalue(int n1, n2 = 10);//valid prototype

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Part – IV

Explain in Detail

Question 1.
Explain the Call by value method with a suitable example.
Answer:
Call by value method:
This method copies the value of an actual parameter into the formal parameter of the function. In this case, changes made to the formal parameter within the function will have no effect on the actual parameter.

Example:
#include <iostream>
using namespace std;
void display(int x)
{
int a = x * x;
cout<<“\n\nThe Value inside display function
(a * a):”<<a;
}
int main( )
{
int a;
cout<<“\nExample : Function call by value:”;
cout<<“\n\nEnter the Value for A cin>>a;
display(a);
cout<<”\n\nThe Value inside main function “<<a;
return (0);
}
Output:
Example: Function call by value Enter the Value for A : 5
The Value inside display function (a * a) : 25
The Value inside main function 5

Question 2.
What is Recursion? Write a program to find GCD using recursion.
Answer:
A function that calls itself is known as a recursive function. And, this technique is known as recursion.

Finding GCD of any to number using Recursion:
GCD – Greatest Common Divisor or HCF (Highest Common Factor) or GCM – Greatest Common Measure)
#include <iostream>
using namespace std;
//Function to find HCF or GCD OR GCM // int gcd(int n1, int n2)
{
if (n2 != 0)
return gcd(n2, n1 % n2); //Recursive call of gcd function
else
return n1;
}
int main( )
{
int num1, num2;
cout << “Enter two positive integers: “;
cin >> num1 >> num2;
cout << “Greatest Common Divisor (GCD) of ” << num1;
cout<< ” & ” << num2 << ” is: ” << gcd(num1, num2);
return 0;
}
Output :
Enter two positive integers: 350 100
Greatest Common Divisor (GCD) of 350 & 100 is: 50

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 3.
What are the different forms of function return? Explain with example.
Answer:
Different forms of User-defined Function declarations:
Function without return value and without parameter
The following program is an example of a function with no return and no arguments passed.
The name of the function is display( ), its return data type is void and it does not have any argument.
#include <iostream>
using namespace std;
void display( )
{
cout<<“Function without parameter and return value”;
}
int main()
{
display( ); // Function calling statement//
return(O);
}
Output :
Function without parameter and return value
A Function with return value and without parameter
The name of the function is display(), its return type is int and it does not have any argument. The return statement returns a value to the calling function and transfers the program control back to the calling statement.

#include <iostream>
using namespace std;
int display( )
{
int a, b, s;
cout<<“Enter 2 numbers:
cin>>a>>b;
s=a+b;
return s;
}
int main( )
{
int m=display( );
cout<<“\nThe Sum=”<<m;
return(0);
}
OUTPUT :
Enter 2 numbers: 10 30
The Sum = 40

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 4.
Explain scope of variable with an example.
Answer:
Scope refers to the accessibility of a variable.
There are four types of scopes in C++

  1. Local Scope
  2. Function Scope
  3. File Scope
  4. Class Scope

1. Local Scope:

  • A local variable is defined within a block. A block of code begins and ends with curly braces {}.
  • The scope of a local variable is the block in which it is defined.
  • A local variable cannot be accessed from outside the block of its declaration.
  • A local variable is created upon entry into its block and destroyed upon exit;

Example:
int main( )
{
int a,b;   //Local variable
}

2. Function Scope:

  • The scope of a variable within a function is extended to the function block and all sub-blocks therein.
  • The lifetime of a function scope variable is the lifetime of the function block.

Example:
int. sum(int x, int y);  //x and y has function scope.

3. File Scope:

  • A variable declared above all blocks and functions (including main()) has the scope of a file.
  • The lifetime of a file scope variable is the lifetime of a program.
  • The file scope variable is also called a global variable.

Example:
#include
using namespace std;
int x,y; //x and y are global variable
void main()
{
……..
}

4. Class Scope:

  • Data members declared in a class has the class scope.
  • Data members declared in a class can be accessed by all member functions of the class.

Example:
Class example
{
int x,y; //x and y can be accessed by print() and void():
void print();
Void total();
};

Class Scope:
A class is a new way of creating and implementing a user-defined data type. Classes provide a method for packing together data of different types.
Data members are the data variables that represent the features or properties of a class.

class student
}
private:
int mark1, mark2, total;
};
The class student contains mark1, mark2, and total are data variables. Its scope is within the class of students only.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 5.
Write a program to accept any integer number and reverse it.
Answer:
PROGRAM:
using namespace std;
#include <iostream>
int reverse(int num)
{
int r=0,d;
while(num>0)
{
d = num%10;
r = r*10+d;
num = num/10;
}
return (r);
}
int main( )
{
intx;
cout<<“\nEnter a number”;
cin>>x;
cout<<“\nReverse of the number is “<<reverse(x);
return 0;
}
OUTPUT
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions 1

11th Computer Science Guide Functions Additional Questions and Answers

Choose The Correct Answer 1 Mark

Question 1.
………………. is the name of the function.
(a) Predefined
(b) Built-in
(c) Library
(d) All the above
Answer:
(d) All the above

Question 2.
…………….. reduce the size and complexity of a program, makes it easier to understand, test, and check for errors.
a) Arrays
b) Functions
c) Structures
d) Unions
Answer:
b) Functions

Question 3.
The strcpy() function takes two arguments of ……………….
(a) target and source
(b) upper and lower
(c) base and exponent
(d) none of these
Answer:
(a) target and source

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 4.
Functions which are available in the C++ language standard library is known as ……………… functions.
a) Built-in
b) User-defined
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Built-in

Question 5.
The pow() function takes the two arguments of ……………….
(a) target and source
(b) upper and lower
(c) base and exponent
(d) source and exponent
Answer:
(c) base and exponent

Question 6.
Why functions are needed?
a) Divide and conquer the purpose
b) Reusability of code
c) Reduce the complexity of a program
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 7.
The C++ program always has a main() function to begin the program execution.
(a) 1
(b) 2
(c) 3
(d) null
Answer:
(a) 1

Question 8.
Ready-to-use subprograms are called ………………..
a) Pre-defined functions
b) Built-in functions
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 9.
In C++ the arguments can be passed to a function in ………………. ways.
(a) 2
(b) 1
(c) 3
(d) 7
Answer:
(a) 2

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 10.
A header file can be identified by their file extension ……………..
a) .head
b) .h
c) .hf
d) None of these
Answer:
b) .h

Question 11.
…………… is a header file contains pre-defined standard input/output functions.
a) conio.h
b) istream.h
c) iostream.h
d) stdio.h
Answer:
d) stdio.h

Question 12.
stdio.h header file defines the standard I/O predefined function ……………
a) getchar()
b) putchar()
c) getsQ and puts()
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 13.
The predefined function ……………. is used to get a single character from the keyboard.
a) getchar()
b) putchar()
c) gets() and puts()
d) puts()
Answer:
a) getchar()

Question 14.
The predefined function …………… is used to display a single character.
a) getchar( )
b) putchar( )
c) gets( )
d) puts( )
Answer:
b) putchar( )

Question 15.
Function ……………… reads a string from standard input and stores it into the string pointed by the variable.
a) getchar( )
b) putchar( )
c) gets( )
d) puts( )
Answer:
c) gets( )

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 16.
Function …………….. prints the string read by gets() function in a newline.
a) getchar( )
b) putchar( )
c) gets( )
d) puts( )
Answer:
d) puts( )

Question 17.
……………. header file defines various operations on characters.
a) conio.h
b) ctype.h
c) iostream.h
d) stdio.h
Answer:
b) ctype.h

Question 18.
……………… function is used to check whether a character is alphanumeric or not.
a) isalnum( )
b) isalpha( )
c) isdigit( )
d) None of these
Answer:
a) isalnum( )

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 19.
………….. function returns a non-zero value if the given character is a digit or a letter, else it returns 0.
a) isalnum( )
b) isaipha( )
c) isdigit( )
d) None of these
Answer:
a) isalnum( )

Question 20.
The ……………… function is used to check whether the given character is an alphabet or not.
a) isalnum( )
b) isalpha( )
c) isdigit( )
d) None of these
Answer:
b) isalpha( )

Question 21.
………….. function will return 1 if the given character is an alphabet, and 0 otherwise 0.
a) isalnum( )
b) isalpha( )
c) isdigit( )
d) None of these
Answer:
b) isalpha( )

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 22.
………… function is used to check whether a given character is a digit or not.
a) isalnum( )
b) isalpha( )
c) isdigit( )
d) None of these
Answer:
c) isdigit( )

Question 23.
……………. function will return 1 if the given character is a digit, and 0 otherwise.
a) isalnum( )
b) isalpha( )
c) isdigit( )
d) None of these
Answer:
c) isdigit( )

Question 24.
………………. function is used to check whether a character is in lower case (small letter) or not.
a) islower( )
b) tolower( )
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) islower( )

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 25.
……………. functions will return a non-zero value if the given character is a lower case alphabet, and 0 otherwise.
a) islower( )
b) tolower( )
c) toupper( )
d) isupper( )
Answer:
a) islower( )

Question 26.
……………. function is used to check the given character is uppercase.
a) islower( )
b) tolower( )
c) toupper( )
d) isupper( )
Answer:
d) isupper( )

Question 27.
……………. function will return 1 if the given character is an uppercase alphabet otherwise 0.
a) islower( )
b) tolower( )
c) toupper( )
d) isupper( )
Answer:
d) isupper( )

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 28.
…………. function is used to convert the given character into its uppercase.
a) islower( )
b) tolower( )
c) toupper( )
d) isupper( )
Answer:
c) toupper( )

Question 29.
………….. function will return the upper case equivalent of the given character.
a) islower( )
b) tolower( )
c) toupper( )
d) isupper( )
Answer:
c) toupper( )

Question 30.
………………… function is used to convert the given character into its lowercase.
a) islower( )
b) tolower( )
c) toupper( )
d) isupper( )
Answer:
b) tolower( )

Question 31.
………………. function copies the character string pointed by the source to the memory location pointed by the target.
a) strcpy( )
b) strcat( )
c) strcmp( )
d) strlen( )
Answer:
a) strcpy( )

Question 32.
The …………………. function takes a null-terminated byte string source as its argument and returns its length.
a) strcpy( )
b) strcat( )
c) strcmp( )
d) strlen( )
Answer:
d) strlen( )

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 33.
The length of the string does not include the _______ character.
a) Null(\0)
b) Blank space
c) White space
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Null(\0)

Question 34.
………………. function compares the contents of string1 and string2 lexicographically.
a) strcpy( )
b) strcat( )
c) strcmp( )
d) strlen( )
Answer:
c) strcmp()

Question 35.
The Strcmp( ) function returns a ………………. value if the first differing character in string1 is greater than the corresponding character in string2.
a) Positive
b) Negative
c) Zero
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Positive

Question 36.
The Strcmp() function returns a …………….. value if the first differing character in stringl is less than the corresponding character in string2.
a) Positive
b) Negative
c) Zero
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Negative

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 37.
………………. function appends copy of the character string pointed by the source to the end of string pointed by the target.
a) strcpy( )
b) strcat( )
c) strcmp( )
d) strlen( )
Answer:
b) strcat( )

Question 38.
The …………….. function is used to convert the given string into Uppercase letters.
a) strupr( )
b) toupper( )
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) strupr( )

Question 39.
The …………….. function is used to convert the given string into Lowercase letters.
a) tolower( )
b) strlwr( )
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) strlwr( )

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 40.
The cos( ) function takes a single argument in ………………
a) Radians
b) Degree
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Radians

Question 41.
The cos( ) function returns the value in the range of ……………
a) [0, 1]
b) [-1, 1]
c) [1,-1]
d) None of these
Answer:
b) [-1, 1]

Question 42.
The cos( ) function returns the value in ……………….
a) double
b) float
c) long double
d) Either A or B or C
Answer:
d) Either A or B or C

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 43.
The sqrt( ) function takes a …………… argument.
a) single non-negative
b) single negative
c) double non-negative
d) double negative
Answer:
a) single non-negative

Question 44.
If a negative value is passed as an argument to sqrt( ) function, a …………….. occurs,
a) Data type mismatch
b) Domain error
c) Prototype mismatch
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Domain error

Question 45.
The ………….. function returns, the value in the range of [-1,1].
a) cos( )
b) sin( )
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 46.
The …………….. function returns base raised to the power of the exponent.
a) exponent( )
b) power( )
c) pow( )
d) None of these
Answer:
c) pow( )

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 47.
If any argument passed to pow() is long double, the return type is promoted to ……………..
a) long double
b) int
c) double
d) char
Answer:
a) long double

Question 48.
The pow( ) function takes ……………… argument.
a) base
b) exponent
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 49.
The …………….. function in C++ seeds the pseudo-random number generator used by the rand() function.
a) srand( )
b) sran( )
c) rands( )
d) None of these
Answer:
a) srand( )

Question 50.
The srand( ) function is defined in ……………. header file.
a)
b) <stdlib)h>
c) or<stalib)h>
d) None of these
Answer:
c) or<stalib)h>

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 51.
C++ program can contain ……………. main”() function.
a) Only one
b) No
c) More than one
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Only one

Question 52.
In C++,……………… function begins the program execution.
a) void
b) main( )
c) User-defined
d) Built-in
Answer:
b) main( )

Question 53.
………………. data type is used to indicate the function does not return a value.
a) int
b) double
c) void
d) unsigned
Answer:
c) void

Question 54.
……………… data type is used to declare a generic pointer.
a) int
b) double
c) void
d) unsigned
Answer:
c) void

Question 55.
The user-defined function should be called explicitly using its ………………
a) Name
b) Arguments to be passed
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 56.
Which of the following calling the function have a return value and with arguments?
a) display( );
b) display(x,y);
c) x = display( );
d) x = display(x,y);
Answer:
d) x = display(x,y);

Question 57.
Which of the following calling function have no return value and no argument?
a) display( );
b) display(x,y);
c) x = display();
d) x = display(x,y);
Answer:
a) display( );

Question 58.
Which of the following calling the function have no return value and with arguments?
a) display( );
b) display(x,y);
c) x = display();
d) x = display(x,y);
Answer:
b) display(x,y);

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 59.
Which of the following calling the function have a return value and no argument?
a) display();
b) display(x,y);
c) x = display();
d) x = display(x,y);
Answer:
c) x = display();

Question 60.
…………………. are the means to pass values from the calling function to the called function.
a) Arguments
b) Parameters
c) Arguments or Parameters
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Arguments or Parameters

Question 61.
The variables used in the function definition as parameters are known as ……………. parameters.
a) Formal
b) Actual
c) Ideal
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Formal

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 62.
The parameters used in the function call are known as ………………. parameters.
a) Formal
b) Actual
c) Ideal
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Actual

Question 63.
The ……………… can be used in the function call as parameters.
a) Constants
b) Variables
c) Expressions
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 64.
The …………….. arguments allow omitting some arguments when calling the function.
a) Default
b) Actual
c) Formal
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Default

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 65.
The default value is given in the form of …………………….
a) Variable declaration
b) Variable initialization
c) void
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Variable initialization

Question 66.
The default arguments facilitate the function call statement with ………………. arguments.
a) Partial
b) No
c) Complete
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 67.
The default values can be included in the function prototype from ……………….
a) Left to Right
b) Right to Left
c) Center to Left
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Right to Left

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 68.
The constant variable can be declared using the…………… keyword.
a) constant
b) Const
c) const
d) CONST
Answer:
c) const

Question 69.
The …………….. keyword makes variable value stable.
a) constant
b) Const
c) const
d) CONST
Answer:
c) const

Question 70.
The ……………… modifier enables to assign an initial value to a variable that cannot be changed later inside the body of the function,
a) void
b) Const
c) const
d) Unsinged
Answer:
c) const

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 71.
In C++, the arguments can be passed to a function in ……………. ways.
a) three
b) two
c) four
d) None of these
Answer:
b) two

Question 72.
In C++, the arguments can be passed to a function in ……………… method.
a) Call by value
b) Call by reference
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 73.
………………. method copies the value of an actual parameter into the formal parameter of the function.
a) Call by value
b) Call by reference
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Call by value

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 74.
In ……………. method, changes made to the formal parameter within the function will have no effect on the actual parameter.
a) Call by value
b) Call by reference
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Call by value

Question 75.
………… method copies the address of the actual argument into the formal parameter.
a) Call by value
b) Call by reference
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Call by reference

Question 76.
In the…………….. method, any change made in the formal parameter will be reflected back in the actual parameter.
a) Call by value
b) Call by reference
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Call by reference

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 77.
The definition of the functions is stored in …………….
a) Array
b) Call by reference
c) Structures
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Call by reference

Question 78.
………….. functions can be used to reduce the overheads like STACKS for small function definition.
a) Inline
b) Built-in
c) User-defined
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Inline

Question 79.
……………. reduces the speed of program execution.
a) Array
b) Stacks
c) Structures
d) Unions
Answer:
b) Stacks

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 80.
A(n) ………….. function looks like a normal function in the source file but inserts the function’s code directly into the calling program.
a) inline
b) Built-in
c) User-defined
d) None of these
Answer:
a) inline

Question 81.
To make a function inline, one has to insert the keyword …………….. in the function header.
a) Inline
b) Insert
c) INLINE
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Inline

Question 82.
……………. functions execute faster but require more memory space.
a) User-defined
b) Built-in
c) Inline
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Inline

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 83.
The inline function reduces the complexity of using …………………
a) Array
b) Stacks
c) Structures
d) Unions
Answer:
b) Stacks

Question 84.
Returning from the function is done by using the ……………… statement.
a) return
b) goto
c) break
d) continue
Answer:
a) return

Question 85.
The …………….. statement stops execution and returns to the calling function.
a) return
b) goto
c) break
d) continue
Answer:
a) return

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 86.
Identify the true statement from the following.
a) A return may or may not have a value associated with it.
b) If the return has a value associated with it, that value becomes the return value for the calling statement.
c) The return statement is used to return from a function.
d) AN the above
Answer:
d) AN the above

Question 87.
The functions that return no value are declared as ……………..
a) Null
b) void
c) Empty
d) None of these
Answer:
b) void

Question 88.
The data type of a function is treated as …………….. if no data type is explicitly mentioned.
a) Null
b) void
c) Empty
d) int
Answer:
d) int

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 89.
What is the return type of the following function prototype? add (int, int);
a) Null
b) void
c) Empty
d) int
Answer:
d) int

Question 90.
What is the return type of the following function prototype? double add (int, int);
a) float
b) void
c) double
d) int
Answer:
c) double

Question 91.
What is the return type of the following function prototype?
char *display();
a) float
b) string
c) double
d) char
Answer:
b) string

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 92.
A function that calls itself is known as ………….. function.
a) recursive
b) nested
c) invariant
d) variant
Answer:
a) recursive

Question 93.
A function that calls itself using …………. technique.
a) recursive
b) variant
c) invariant
d) recursion
Answer:
d) recursion

Question 94.
………………. is mandatory when a function is defined after the main() function.
a) Function prototype
b) Function parameters
c) Return statement
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Function prototype

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 95.
Scope refers to the accessibility of a ……………..
a) Function
b) Class
c) Variable
d) Constant
Answer:
c) Variable

Question 96.
There are ………… types of scopes in C++.
a) five
b) two
c) three
d) four
Answer:
d) four

Question 97.
…………….. is a type of variable scope.
a) Local
b) Function / File
d) Class
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 98.
A …………… is a region or life of the variable and broadly speaking there are three places, where variables can be declared.
a) Scope
b) Access specifier
c) Location
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Scope

Question 99.
Variables inside a block are called …………… variables.
a) Local
b) Function
c) Class
d) File
Answer:
a) Local

Question 100.
Variables inside a function are called ………….. variables.
a) Local
b) Function
c) Class
d) File
Answer:
b) Function

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 101.
Variables outside of ail functions are called ………….. variables.
a) Local
b) Function
c) Class
d) Global
Answer:
d) Global

Question 102.
Variables inside a class are called ……………
a) Class variable
b) Data members
c) Member functions
d) Either A or B
Answer:
d) Either A or B

Question 103.
The scope of formal parameters is …………… scope.
a) Local
b) Function
c) Class
d) File
Answer:
b) Function

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 104.
A variable declared above all blocks and functions (including main ()) has the …………… scope.
a) Local
b) Function
c) Class
d) File
Answer:
d) File

Question 105.
The lifetime of a ………….. scope variable is the lifetime of a program.
a) Local
b) Function
c) Class
d) File
Answer:
d) File

Question 106.
The file scope variable is also called as ………….. variable.
a) Global
b) General
c) Void
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Global

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 107.
…………… provides a method for packing together data of different types.
a) Enumeration
b) Array
c) Class
d) All the above
Answer:
c) Class

Question 108.
……………… represent the features or properties of a class.
a) Member function
b) Data member
c) Global variable
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Data member

Question 109.
…………….. is a scope resolution operator.
a) ? :
b) #
c) : :
d) &&
Answer:
c) : :

Question 110.
The …………… operator reveals the hidden scope of a variable.
a) ? :
b) &&
c) : :
d) #
Answer:
c) : :

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Very Short Answers (2 Marks)

Question 1.
Write about reusability.
Answer:

  1. Few lines of code may be repeatedly used in different contexts. Duplication of the same code can be eliminated by using functions which improve the maintenance and reduce program size.
  2. Some functions can be called multiple times with different inputs.

Question 2.
Why functions are needed?
Answer:
To reduce the size and complexity of the program functions are used.

Question 3.
What are constant arguments and write their syntax?
Answer:
The constant variable can be declared using the const keyword. The const keyword makes variable, value stable. The constant variable should be initialized while declaring. The const modifier enables the assignment of an initial value to a variable that cannot be changed later inside the body of the function.
Syntax: (const )

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 4.
Write a note on the reusability of the code.
Answer:
Reusability:

  • Few lines of code may be repeatedly used in different contexts. Duplication of the same code can be eliminated by using functions which improve the maintenance and reduce program size.
  • Some functions can be called multiple times with different inputs.

Question 5.
What is function scope?
Answer:
Function Scope:

  1. The scope of variables declared within a function is extended to the function block and all sub-blocks therein.
  2. The lifetime of a function scope variable is the lifetime of the function block. The scope of.

Question 6.
What is the header file?
Answer:
C++ provides a rich collection of functions ready to be used for various tasks. The tasks to be performed by each of these are already written, debugged, and compiled, their definitions alone are grouped and stored in files called header files

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 7.
What is a built-in function?
Answer:
The ready-to-use subprograms are called pre-defined functions or built-in functions.

Question 8.
What is a user-defined function?
Answer:
C++ provides the facility to create new functions for specific tasks as per user requirements. The name of the task and data required is decided by the user and hence they are known as User-defined functions.

Question 9.
How a header file is identified?
Answer:
A header file can be identified by their file extension .h.
Example:
stdio.h

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 10.
Write note on stdio.h header file.
Answer:
This header file defines the standard I/O predefined functions getchar(), putchar(), gets(), puts() and etc.

Question 11.
What is the purpose of getchar() and putchar() functions?
Answer:
The predefined function getchar() is used to get a single character from the keyboard and putchar() function is used to display it.

Question 12.
What is the purpose of gets() and puts() functions?
Answer:
Function gets( ) reads a string including balance spaces from standard input and stores it into the string pointed by the variable. Function puts() prints the string read by gets() function in a newline.

Question 13.
Write note on isalpha( ) function.
Answer:
The isalpha( ) function is used to check whether the given character is an alphabet or not.
Syntax:
int isalpha(char c);
This function will return 1 if the given character is an alphabet, and 0 otherwise 0. The following statement assigns 0 to the variable n, since the given character is not an alphabet.
int n = isalphaC3′);
The statement is given below displays 1, since the given character is an alphabet.
cout << isalpha(‘a’); .

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 14.
Write the use of isdigit() function.
Answer:
This function is used to check whether a given character is a digit or not. This function will return 1 if the given character is a digit, and 0 otherwise.
Syntax:
int isdigit(char c);
When the following code is executed, the value of the variable n will be 1, since the given character is a digit.
char ch = ‘3’;
n = isdigit (ch);

Question 15.
How to copy a string into another string?
Answer:
The srcpy() function copies the character string pointed by the source to the memory location pointed by the target. The strcpy() function takes two arguments: target and source. The null terminating character (\0) is also copied.
Example:
char source[ ] = “Computer Science”;
char target[20]=”target”;
strcpy(target,source);

Question 16.
What is the purpose of strupr( ) and strlwr( ) functions?
Answer:

  • The strupr( ) function is used to convert the given string into Uppercase letters.
  • The strlwr( ) function is used to convert the given string into Lowercase letters.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 17.
What is the use of return statement in a function?
Answer:
Returning from the function is done by using the return statement.
The return statement stops execution and returns to the calling function. When a return statement is executed, the function is terminated immediately at that point.

Question 18.
Write note on scope resolution operator.
Answer:
The scope operator reveals the hidden scope ‘ of a variable. The scope resolution operator (::) is used for the following purposes.

To access a Global variable when there is a Local variable with same name. An example using Scope Resolution Operator.
PROGRAM :
#include <iostream>
using namespace std;
int x=45; // Global Variable x
int main()
{
int x = 10; // Local Variable x
cout << “\nValue of global x is ” << ::x;
cout << “\nValue of local x is ” << x;
return 0;
}
Output :
Value of global x is 45
Value of local x is 10

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Short Answers (3 Marks)

Question 1.
What is divide and conquer?
Answer:
Divide and Conquer:

  1. Complicated programs can be divided into manageable sub-programs called functions.
  2. A programmer can focus on developing, debugging, and testing individual functions.
  3. Many programmers can work on different functions simultaneously.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 2.
Write about islower( ) function.
Answer:
islower( )
This function is used to check whether a character is in lower case (small letter) or not.
This function will return a non-zero value, if the given character is a lower case alphabet, and 0 otherwise.
Syntax:
int islower(char c);

After executing the following statements, the value of the variable n will be 1 since the given character is in lower case
char ch = ‘n’;
int n = islower(ch);

The statement given below will assign 0 to the variable n, since the given character is an uppercase alphabet.
int n = islower(‘P’);

Question 3.
What is digit()? Give example.
Answer:
This function is used to check whether a given character is a digit or not. This function will return 1 if the given character is a digit, and 0 otherwise.

Example:
using namespace std;
#include
#include int main( )
{

char ch;
cout << “\n Enter a Character:”; cin >> ch;
cout << “\n The Return Value of isdigit(ch) is << isdigit(ch);

}
Output – 1
Enter a Character: 3
The Return Value of isdigit(ch) is: 1

Output – 2
Enter a Character: A
The Return Value of isdigit(ch) is: 0

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 4.
Explain the method of comparing two strings.
Answer:
strcmp( ) function compares the contents of string 1 and string2 lexicographically. The strcmp() function takes two arguments: stringl and string2.

The strcmp( ) function returns a:

  • Positive value if the first differing character in stringl is greater than the corresponding character in string2. (ASCII values are compared)
  • Negative value if the first differing character in stringl is less than the corresponding character in string2.
  • 0 if stringl and string2 are equal.

Example:
#include <string.h>
#inciude <iostream>
using namespace std;
int main()
{
char string1[ ] = “Computer”;
char string2[ ] = “Science”;
int result;
result = strcmp(string1,string2);
if(result==0)
{
cout<<“String1: “<<string1<<“and String2 : “<<string2 <<“Are Equal”;
}
else
{
cout<<“String1 :”<<string1<<” and String2 : “c<<string2<<” Are Not Equal”;
}
}
Output
String1 : Computer and String2 : Science Are Not Equal

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 5.
What is a return statement with an example?
Answer:
The return statement stops execution and returns to the calling function. When a return statement is executed, the function is terminated immediately at that point. The return statement is used to return from a function. It is categorized as a jump statement because it terminates the execution of the function and transfers the control to the called statement.

Example:
return(a + b); return(a);
return; // to terminate the function

Question 6.
Write note on sin() and cos() functions.
Answer:
cos() function
The cos() function takes a single argument in radians. The cosQ function returns the value in the range of [-1, 1], The returned value is either in double, float, or long double.
Example:
#include <iostream>
#include <math.h>
using namespace std;
int main()
{
double x = 0.5, result;
result = cos(x);
cout << “COS(“<<x<<“)= “<<result;
}
Output
COS(0.5)= 0.877583
sin( ) function:
The sin() function takes a single argument in radians. The sin( ) function returns the value in the range of [-1, 1]. The returned value is either in double, float, or long double.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 7.
Write about sqrt( ) and pow( ) functions.
Answer:
sqrt( ) function:
The sqrt( ) function returns the square root of the given value of the argument. The sqrt( ) function takes a single non-negative argument. If a negative value is passed as an argument to sqrt( ) function, a domain error occurs.
Example:
#include <iostream>
#include <math.h>
using namespace std;
int main()
{
double x = 625, result;
result = sqrt(x);
cout << “sqrt(“<<x<<“) = “<<result;
return 0;
}
Output
sqrt(625) = 25
pow( ) function:
The pow( ) function returns base raised to the power of exponent. If any argument passed to pow() is long double, the return type is promoted to long double. If not, the return type is double.
The pow() function takes two arguments:
base – the base value
exponent – exponent of the base Example:
#include <iostream>
#include <math.h>
using namespace std;
int main ( )
{
double base, exponent, result;
base = 5;
exponent = 4;
result = pow(base, exponent);
cout << “pow(“< << “) = ” << result;
double x = 25;;
result = sin(x);
cout << “\nsin(“<<x<<“)= “<<result;
return 0;
}
Output
pow(5 ^ 4) = 625 sin(25)= -0.132352

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 8.
How will you generate a random numbers?
Answer:
The srand( ) function in C++ seeds the pseudo random number generator used by the rand( ) function. The seed for rand( ) function is 1 by default. It means that if no srand( ) is called before rand(), the rand() function behaves as if it was seeded with srand(1).
The srand( ) function takes an unsigned integer as its parameter which is used as seed by the rand() function. It is defined inor <stdlib,h>header file.
Example:
#include <iostream>
#include <cstdlib.h>
using namespace std;
int main()
{
int random = rand(); /* No srand() calls before rand(), so seed = 1 */
cout << “\nSeed = 1, Random number = ” << random;
srand(10);
/* Seed = 10 */
random = rand( );
cout << “\n\nSeed = 10, Random number=” << random;
return 0;
}
Output
Seed = 1, Random number = 41
Seed =10, Random number =71

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 9.
Write note on function prototype.
Answer:
Function Prototype:
C++ program can contain any number of functions. But, it must always have only one main( ) function to begin the program execution. We can write the definitions of functions in any order as we wish.

We can define the main( ) function first and all other functions after that or we can define all the needed functions prior to main( ). Like a variable declaration, a function must be declared before it is used in the program.
The declaration statement may be given outside the main( ) function.

Example:
long fact (int, double);
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions 2

Question 10.
Explain Formal Parameters and Actual Parameters or Arguments.
Answer:
Formal Parameters and Actual Parameters or Arguments:
Arguments or parameters are the means to pass values from the calling function to the called function.

  • The variables used in the function definition as parameters are known as formal parameters.
  • The constants, variables or expressions used in the function call are known as actual parameters.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions 3

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Explain in Detail (5 Marks)

Question 1.
Explain about generating random numbers with a suitable program.
Answer:
The srand() function in C++ seeds the pseudo-random number generator used by the rand() function. The seed for rand() function is 1 by default. It means that if no srand() is called before rand(), the rand() function behaves as if it was seeded with srand( 1). The srand() function takes an unsigned integer as its parameter which is used as seed by the rand() function. It is defined inor header file.
#include
#include using namespace std; int main()
{

int random = rand(); /* No srand() calls before rand(), so seed = 1*/
cout << “\nSeed = 1, Random number =” << random;
srand(10);
/* Seed= 10 */
random = rand();
cout << “\n\n Seed =10, Random number =” << random;
return 0;

}
Output:
Seed = 1, Random number = 41
Seed =10, Random number 71

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 2.
How will access function? Explain in detail.
Answer:
Accessing a function:
The user-defined function should be called explicitly using its name and the required arguments to be passed. The compiler refers to the function prototype to check whether the function has been called correctly.

If the argument type does not match exactly with the data type defined in the prototype, the compiler will perform type conversion, if possible. If type conversion is impossible, the compiler generates an error message.
Example :

1.display( )calling the function without a return value and without any argument.
2.display (x, y)calling the function without a return value and with arguments.
3.x = display()calling the function with a return value and without any argument.
4.x = display (x, y)calling the function with a return value and with arguments.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 3.
Explain constant argument in detail.
Answer:
Constant Arguments:
The constant variable can be declared using const keyword. The const keyword makes variable value stable. The constant variable should be initialized while declaring. The const modifier enables to assign an initial value to a variable that cannot be changed later inside the body of the function.
Syntax:
<returntype> <functionname> (const <datatype variable=value>)

Example:
int minimum(const int a=10);
float area(const float pi=3.14, int r=5);

PROGRAM
#include <iostream>
using namespace std; ,
double area(const double r,const double pi=3.14)
{
return(pi*r*r);
}
int main ( )
{
double rad,res;
cout<<‘AnEnter Radius :”;
cin>>rad;
res=area(rad);
cout << “\nThe Area of Circle =”<<res;
return 0;
}
OUTPUT:
Enter Radius: 5
The Area of Circle =78.5
If the variable value “r” is changed as r=25;
inside the body of the function “area” then compiler will throw an error as “assignment of
read-only parameter ‘r’ “.
double area (const double r, const double pi= 3.14)
{
r=25;
return(pi*r*r);
}

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 4.
Explain about address method.
Answer:
This method copies the address of the actual argument into the formal parameter. Since the address of the argument is passed, any change made in the formal parameter will be reflected back in the actual parameter.
#include
using namespace std;
void display(int & x) //passing address of a//
{

x = x*x;
cout << “\n\n The Value inside display function (n1 x n1) :”<< x ;

}
int main()
{
intn 1;
cout << “\n Enter the Value for N1 cin >> n1;
cout << “\n The Value of N1 is inside main function Before passing:” << n1;
display(n1);
cout << “\n The Value of N1 is inside main function After passing (n1 x n1):”<< n1; retum(O);
}

Output:
Enter the Value for N1: 45
The Value of N1 is inside the main function Before passing: 45
The Value inside display function (n1 x n1) : 2025
The Value ofNl is inside the main function After passing (n1 x n1): 2025

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 5.
Explain inline function in detial.
Answer:
Inline function:
An inline function looks like normal function in the source file but inserts the function’s code directly into the calling program. To make a function inline, one has to insert the keyword inline in the function header.

This reduces the speed of program execution. Inline functions can be used to reduce the overheads like STACKS for small function definition.
Syntax:
inline return type function name (data type parametername1,… datatype parameternameN)
Advantages of inline functions:

  • Inline functions execute faster but requires more memory space.
  • Reduce the complexity of using STACKS.

PROGRAM
#include <iostream>
using namespace std;
inline float simpleinterest (float pi, float nl, float r1)
{
float si1=(p1*n1*r1)/100;
return(si1);
}
int main ( )
{
float si,p,n,r;
cout<<“\nEnter the Principle Amount Rs. :”;
cin> >p;
cout<<“\nEnter the Number of Years:”;
cin>>n;
cout<<“\nEnter the Rate of Interest :”;
cin>>r;
si=simpleinterest(p,n,r);
cout << “\nThe Simple Interest = Rs,”<<si;
return 0;
}
Output:
Enter the Principle Amount Rs. :60000
Enter the Number of Years :10
Enter the Rate of Interest :5
The Simple Interest = Rs.30000
Though the above program is written in the normal function definition format during compilation the function code (p1*n1*r1)/100 will be directly inserted in the calling statement i.e. si=simpleinterest(p,n,r);
This makes the calling statement to change as si= (p1*n1*r1)/100;

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Hands-On Practice

Write C++ program to solve the following problems:
Question 1.
Program that reads two strings and appends the first string to the second. For example, If the first string Is entered as Tamil and the second string is Nadu, the program should print Tamilnadu. Use string library header.
Answer:
PROGRAM :
#include <string.h>
#include <iostream>
using namespace std;
int main()
{
char firststr[50],secondstr[50];
cout<<“\nEnter First String “; cin> >firststr;
cout<<“\nEnter Second String”; cin>>secondstr;
strcat(firststr,secondstr); //concatenation process
cout << ”\nConcatenated string is : ” <<firststr;
return 0;
}
Output:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions 4

Question 2.
Program that reads a string and converts it to uppercase. Include required header files.
Answer:
PROGRAM :
#include <string.h>
#include <iostream>
using namespace std;
int main()
{
char str[50];
cout<<“\nEnter a String
cin>>str;
cout << “\nGvien string is : “<<str; strupr(str);
cout << “\nGvien string in Uppercase is :”<<str;
return 0;
}
Output :
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions 5

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 3.
Program that checks whether a given character is an alphabet or not. If It is an alphabet, whether It Is lowercase character or uppercase- character? Include required header files.
Answer:
PROGRAM :
#include <string.h>
#include <iostream>
using namespace std;
int main( )
{
char ch;
cout<<“\nEnter a Character”;
cin>>ch;
if(isalpha(ch))
if(islower(ch))
cout << “\nGiven Character is an Alphabet and in Lowercase”;
else
cout << “\nGiven Character is an Alphabet and in Uppercase “;
else
cout << “\nGiven Character in not an Alphabet”;
return 0;
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions 6

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 4.
Program that checks whether the given character is alphanumeric or a digit Add appropriate header file
Answer:
PROGRAM :
#include <string.h>
#include <iostream>
using namespace std;
int main()
{
char ch;
cout<<“\nEnter a Character”;
cin>>ch;
if(isalnum(ch))
if(isdigit(ch))
cout << “\nGiven Character is an Alphanumeric and digit”;
else
cout << “\nGiven Character is an Alphanumeric but not digit”;
else
cout << “\nGiven Character in not an Alphanumeric or digit”;
return 0;
}
Output:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions 7

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 5.
Write a function called zero_small ( ) that has two integer arguments being passed by reference and sets smaller of the two numbers to 0. Write the main program to access this function.
Answer:
PROGRAM
using namespace std;
#include <iostream>
void zero_small(int &a, int &b)
{
if (a<b)
a= 0;
else
b=0;
}
int main( )
{
int num1,num2;
cout<<“\nEnter two numbers :”; cin>>num1>>num2;
cout<<“\nNumber before set small value as 0 through function : num1=” <<num1<<” num2=”<<num2;
zero_small(num1,num2);
cout<<“\nNumber after set small value as 0 through function : num1=” <<num1<<” num2=”<<num2;
}
Output :
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions 8
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions 9

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 6.
Write definition for a function sumseries ( ) in C++ with two arguments/ parameters – double x and int n. The function should return a value of type double and it should perform sum of the following series:
x-x2 /3! + x3 / 5! – x4 / 7! + x5 / 9! upto n terms.
Answer:
PROGRAM :
using namespace std;
#indude
double sumseries(double x, int n)
{
double sum=0,t;
int f=1,sign=1;
t=x;
inti=1‘,j=1;
while(i<=n)
{
sum = sum + sign * t/f;
j=j + 2;
i++;
f = f*j*(j-1);
t = t * x;
sign = -sign;
}
return(sum);
}
int main()
{
int i,x,n,f=1,sign=1;
cout<<“\nEnter X value …”;
cin>>x;
cout<<“\nEnter N value …”;
cin>>n;
cout<<“\nSUM OF THE SERIES = “<<sumseries(x,n);
return 0;
}
Output :
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions 10

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions

Question 7.
Program that Invokes a function calc ( ) which intakes two integers and an arithmetic operator and prints the corresponding result.
Answer:
PROGRAM :
using namespace std;
#include
void calc(int numl,int num2,char op)
{
int result;
switch(op)
{
case’+’:
result = num1 + num2;
cout<<“\nAdded value “<<result;
break;
case’-‘:
result = num1 – num2;
cout<<“\nSubtracted value “<< result;
break;
case’*’:
result = num1 * num2;
cout<<“\Multiplied value”<<result;
break;
case ‘/’:
result = num1 / num2;
cout<<“\nDivided value “<<result;
break;
default:cout<<“\nPROCESS COMPLETED”;
}
}
int main()
{
float n1,n2;
char op;
cout<<“\nl. Enter two numbers”; cin>>n1>>n2;
cout<<“\nEnter an Operaotr + or – or * Or / :”; cin>>op;
calc(nl,n2,op);
}
Output :
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions 11
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 11 Functions 12

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Pdf Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Solutions Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

11th Computer Science Guide Composition and Decomposition Text Book Questions and Answers

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Part I

Choose the correct answer.

Question 1.
Suppose u, v = 10, 5 before the assignment. What are the values of u and v after the . sequence of assignments?
1, u := v
2. v := u
a) u, v = 5, 5
b) u, v = 5, 10
c) u, v = 10, 5
d) u, v = 10, 10
Answer:
a) u, v = 5, 5

Question 2.
Which of the following properties is true after the assignment (at line 3)?
1. — i + j = 0
2. i, j : = i + 1, j – 1
3. –?
a) i + j >0
b) i + j < 0
c) i + j = 0
d) i = j
Answer:
b) i + j < 0

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 3.
If Cl is false and C2 is true, the compound statement,
1. if C1
2. S1
3. else
4. if C2
5. S2
6. else
7. S3
executes
a) S1
b) S2
c) S3
d) none
Answer:
b) S2

Question 4.
If C is false just before the loop, the control flows through. –
1. S1
2. while C
3. S2
4. S3
a) S1 ; S3
b) S1 ; S2 ; S3
c) S1 ; S2 ; S2 ; S3
d) S1; S2 ; S2 ; S2 ; S3
Answer:
a) S1 ; S3

Question 5.
If C is true, S1 is executed in both the flowcharts, but S2 is executed in
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition 1
a) (1) only
b) (2) only
c) both (1) and (2)
d) neither (1) nor (2)
Answer:
a) (1) only

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 6.
How many times the loop is iterated? i := 0
while i ≠ 5
i : = i + 1
a) 4
b) 5
c) 6
d) 0
Answer:
b) 5

Part II

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Distinguish between a condition and a statement.
Answer:

ConditionStatement
It is a phrase that describes a test of the state.It is a phrase that commands the computer to do an action.

Question 2.
Draw a flowchart for a conditional statement.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition 2

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 3.
Both conditional statements and iterative statements have a condition and a statement. How do they differ?
Answer:
Conditional Statement:

  • Statements are executed only once when the condition is true.
  • If condition statement.

Iterative Statement:

  • An iterative statement repeatedly evaluates a condition and executes a statement until it becomes false.
  • While condition statement.

Question 4.
What is the difference between an algorithm and a program?
Answer:

ALGORITHMPROGRAM
It is a step-by-step procedure to solve a problem.It is a set of instructions to solve a problem by the computer.
No need to follow the grammar of a languageFollow strictly the grammar of a programming language.

Question 5.
Why is a function an abstraction?
Answer:
Once a function is defined, it can be used over and over and over again. Reusability of a single function several times is known as an abstraction.

Question 6.
How do we define a statement?
Answer:
In a refinement, starting at a high level, each statement is repeatedly expanded into more detailed statements in the subsequent levels.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Part III

Explain in brief

Question 1.
For the given two flowcharts write the pseudo-code.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition 3
Answer:
if condition is True
Execute Statement S1
else
Execute Statement S2
endif
PSEUDO CODE FOR SECOND FLOWCHART
if the condition is True
Execute Statement S1
Execute Statement S2
else
Execute Statement S2
endif.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 2.
If C is false in line 2, trace the control flow in this algorithm.
1. S1
2. — C is false
3. if C
4. S2
5. else
6. S3
7. S4
Answer:
The control flow for the given algorithm is as follows:
S1
S3
S4
The condition is false so it executes S3. In this case S2 skipped.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 3.
What is case analysis?
Answer:
The case Analysis statement generalizes the problem into multiple cases. Case Analysis splits the problem into an exhaustive set of disjoint cases.

Question 4.
Draw a flowchart for -3 case analysis using alternative statements.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition 4

Where C1, C2 and C3 are conditions
S1, S2, S3 and S4 are statements.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 5.
Define a function to double a number in two different ways: (1) n + n,(2)2 x n.
Answer:
1. Double (n)
– – inputs: n is a real number or an integer, n > 0
– – Outputs: y is a real number or an integer such that y = n + n

2. Double (n)
– – inputs: n is a real number or an integer, n > 0
– – Outputs: y is a real number or an integer such that y = 2 x n

Part IV

Explain in detail

Question 1.
Exchange the contents: Given two glasses marked A and B. Glass A is full of apple drink and glass B is full of grape drink. Write the specification for exchanging the contents of glasses A and B, and write a sequence of assignments to satisfy the specification.
Answer:
The sequence of assignments to satisfy the specification:
exchange(A, B)
–inputs : A, B are real and > 0
–outputs: A, B are real and > 0
State representation
T = A
A: = B
B: = T

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 2.
Circulate the contents: Write the specification and construct an algorithm to circulate the contents of the variables A, B and C as shown below: The arrows indicate that B gets the value of A, C gets the value of B and A gets the value of C.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition 5
Specification :
Circulated,B,C)
– – inputs: A,B,C all are real numbers
– – outputs: A,B,C, all are real numbers
T: = C
C: = B
B: = A
A: = T

Algorithm :
i) circulated,B,C)
ii) – – A,B,C
iii) T = C
iv) C = B
v) B = A
vi) A: = T

Question 3.
Decanting problem. You are given three bottles of capacities 5, 8, and 3 litres. The 8L bottle is filled with oil, while the other two are empty. Divide the oil in an 8L bottle into two equal quantities. Represent the state of the process by appropriate variables. What are the initial and final states of the process? Model the decanting of oil from one bottle to another by assignment. Write a sequence of assignments to achieve the final state.
Answer:
To divide the oil equally in the oil bottle, the following 7 steps are needed:

  • Pour 5L of oil into the second bottle. (3,5,0)
  • Pour 3L from the second bottle to the third. (3,2,3)
  • Pour 3L from the third to the first. (6,2,0)
  • Pour all 2L from the second to the third bottle (6,0,2)
  • Pour 5L from the first to the second bottle. (1.5.2)
  • Pour 1 L from the second to the third bottle. (1.4.3)
  • Finally, pour now all 3L from the third bottle to the first (4,4,0)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Assignment statement as follows:

  • E,F,T = 8,0,0
  • E,F,T = 3,5,0
  • E,F,T = 3,2,3
  • E,F,T = 6,2,0
  • E,F,T = 6,0,2
  • E,F,T = 1,5,2
  • E,F,T = 1,4,3
  • E,F,T = 4,4,0

Question 4.
Trace the step-by-step execution of the algorithm for factorial(4).
factorial(n)
— inputs i rs is an integer, n > 0
— outputs : f ‘=s n!
f, i := 1,1
while i ≤ n
f,i = 11= f x i, i+1
Answer:
Tracing steps:
factorial(5)
i) f = 1, i = 1
ii) f = 1 x 1, i = 2
iii) f = 1 x 2, i = 3
iv) f = 2 x 3, i = 4
v) f = 6 x 4, i = 5
vi) f = 24 x 5, i = 6
vii) condition 6 < 5 becomes false then display output f value as 24.

11th Computer Science Guide Composition and Decomposition Additional Questions and Answers

Part I

Choose the correct answer:

Question 1.
Which one of the following is odd?
(a) Python
(b) C++
(c) C
(d) Ctrl + S
Answer:
(d) Ctrl + S

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 2.
_________ is a notation for representing algorithms.
a) programming language
b) pseudo code
c) flow chart
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 3.
There are important control flow statements.
(a) four
(b) three
(c) two
(d) five
Answer:
(b) three

Question 4.
_________ is a notation similar to programming languages.
a) programming language
b) pseudo code
c) flow chart
d) none of these
Answer:
b) pseudo code

Question 5.
A ………………. is contained in a rectangular box with a single outgoing arrow, which points to the box to be executed next.
(a) statement
(b) composition
(c) notation
(d) condition
Answer:
(a) statement

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 6.
_________ is a diagrammatic notation for representing algorithms.
a) programming language
b) pseudo code
c) flow chart
d) none of these
Answer:
c) flow chart

Question 7.
The algorithm can be specified as ……………….
(a) monochromatize (a, b, c)
(b) a = b = 0
(c) C = A + B + C
(d) none
Answer:
(a) monochromatize (a, b, c)

Question 8.
An algorithm expressed in a_________ is called a program.
a) programming language
b) pseudo code
c) flow chart
d) none of these
Answer:
a) programming language

Question 9.
Which one of the following is the elementary problem-solving technique?
(a) Specification
(b) Abstraction
(c) Composition
(d) decomposition
Answer:
(d) decomposition

Question 10.
_________ is formal.
a) programming language
b) pseudo code
c) flow chart
d) none of these
Answer:
a) programming language

Question 11.
How many different notations are there for representing algorithms?
(a) 2
(b) 3
(c) 4
(d) 5
Answer:
(b) 3

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 12.
_________ do not allow the informal style of natural languages such as English or Tamil.
a) programs
b) pseudo code
c) flow charts
d) none of these
Answer:
a) programs

Question 13.
Which one of the following algorithmic notations is used for communication among people?
(a) Flow chart
(b) Pseudo code
(c) PL
(d) Interpreter
Answer:
(b) Pseudo code

Question 14.
_________ notation is not formal nor exact.
a) programs
b) pseudo code
c) flow charts
d) none of these
Answer:
b) pseudo code

Question 15.
The algorithmic notation similar to a Programming language is ……………….
(a) Flow chart
(b) Pseudo code
(c) C ++
(d) C
Answer:
(b) Pseudo code

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 16.
In _________, there is no need to follow the rules of the grammar of a programming language.
a) programs
b) pseudo code
c) flow charts
d) none of these
Answer:
b) pseudo code

Question 17.
Which one is used for converting programs into computer-executable instructions?
(a) Converter
(b) Apps
(c) Translator
(d) exe files
Answer:
(c) Translator

Question 18.
_________ show the control flow of algorithms using diagrams in a visual manner.
a) programs
b) pseudo code
c) flow charts
d) none of these
Answer:
c) flow charts

Question 19.
The notation which is not formal nor exact is ……………….
(a) Flow chart
(b) Pseudocode
(c) Compiler
(d) Translator
Answer:
(b) Pseudocode

Question 20.
In flowcharts, _________ boxes represent conditions.
a) arrows
b) diamond shaped
c) rectangular shaped
d) none of these
Answer:
b) diamond shaped

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 21.
Find the pair which is wrongly matched.
(a) Rectangular boxes – Statements
(b) Diamond boxes – Output
(c) Arrow – Control flow
(d) Parallelogram – Input
Answer:
(b) Diamond boxes – Output

Question 22.
A condition is contained in a diamond-shaped box with _________ outgoing arrows.
a) two
b) three
c) one
d) many
Answer:
a) two

Question 23.
The inputs and outputs are drawn using ……………….. boxes.
(a) rectangular
(b) diamond
(c) Parallelogram
(d) Oval
Answer:
(c) Parallelogram

Question 24.
In flow chart, _________ marked Start and the End are used to indicate the start and the end of an execution:
a) special box (oval)
b) diamond shaped
c) rectangular shaped
d) parallelogram
Answer:
a) special box (oval)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 25.
The flow of control is represented in the flowchart by ………………..
(a) arrow
(b) dot
(c) box
(d) plus
Answer:
(a) arrow

Question 26.
A_________ is a phrase that commands the computer to do an action.
a) statement
b) sentence
c) walkthrough
d) none of these
Answer:
a) statement

Question 27.
A condition is contained in a diamond-shaped box with ……………….. outgoing arrows.
(a) 2
(b) 3
(c) 4
(d) 5
Answer:
(a) 2

Question 28.
Statements composed of other statements are known as_________ statements.
a) compound
b) bock
c) nested
c) none of these
Answer:
a) compound

Question 29.
_________ statement are compound statements.
a) input
b) output
c) comment
d) control flow
Answer:
d) control flow

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 30.
How many outgoing arrows are needed for rectangular boxes in the flow chart?
(a) 0
(b) 1
(c) 2
(d) 3
Answer:
(b) 1

Question 31.
___________ is a control flow statements.
a) Sequential
b) Alternative
c) Iterative
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 32.
Which one of the following is not a control flow statement?
(a) Sequential
(b) Assignment
(c) Iterative
(d) Alternative
Answer:
(b) Assignment

Question 33.
Case analysis splits the problem into an exhaustive set of __________ cases.
a) disjoint
b) similar
c) recursive
d) none of these
Answer:
a) disjoint

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 34.
Which one of the following statements are executed one after the other as written in the algorithm?
(a) Sequential
(b) Iterative
(c) Conditional
(d) Decisive
Answer:
(a) Sequential

Question 35.
An__________ executes the same action repeatedly, subject to a condition.
a) iterative process
b) condition
c) sequential
d) None of these
Answer:
a) iterative process

Question 36.
Case analysis statement generalizes the statement into ……………….. cases.
(a) 2
(b) 3
(c) 5
(d) multiple
Answer:
(d) multiple

Question 37.
Testing the loop condition and executing the , loop body once is called.
a) iteration
b) condition
c) sequential
d) none of these
Answer:
a) iteration

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 38.
Which one of the following processes executes the same action repeatedly?
(a) Conditional
(b) Alternative
(c) Iterative
(d) None of these
Answer:
(c) Iterative

Question 39.
__________ breaking and combining the solutions of the smaller problems to solve the original problem.
a) Composition
b) Decomposition
c) Eliminating
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Decomposition

Question 40.
Testing the loop condition and executing the loop body once is called ………………..
(a) alternative
(b) conditional
(c) Iteration
(d) Decomposition
Answer:
(c) Iteration

Question 41.
A(n)__________ is like a sub-algorithm.
a) function
b) array
c) structure
d) None of these
Answer:
a) function

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 42.
A __________ can be used as a black box in solving other problems.
a) function
b) array
c) structure
d) None of these
Answer:
a) function

Question 43.
Identify the correct statement from the following.
a) There is no need for the users to know how the function is implemented in order to use it.
b) An algorithm used to implement a function may maintain its own variables.
c) users of the function need only to know what the function does, and not how it is done by the function.
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 44.
Conditional statement is executed only if the condition is true. Otherwise, __________ .
a) terminates the algorithm
b) repeat the procedure
c) skip the loop
d) nothing is done
Answer:
d) nothing is done

Part II

Short Answers

Question 1.
What is programming language?
Answer:
A programming language is a notation for expressing algorithms to be executed by computers.

Question 2.
What is a Pseudocode?
Answer:
Pseudocode is a mix of programming languages like constructs and plain English. Algorithms expressed in Pseudocode are not intended to be executed by computers but for human readers to understand.

Question 3.
What is flowchart?
Answer:
A flowchart is a diagrammatic notation for representing algorithms. They give a visual intuition of the flow of control, when the algorithm is executed.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 4.
What is a control flow statement? Classify it.
Answer:
Control flow statements are compound statements. They are used to alter the control flow of the process depending on the state of the process. They are classified as:

  1. Sequential
  2. Alternative
  3. Iterative

Question 5.
What are the constraints of a programming language?
Answer:

  • Programming language is formal.
  • Programs must obey the grammar of the programming language exactly. Even punctuation symbols must be exact.
  • They do not allow the informal style of natural languages such as English or Tamil.

Question 6.
When a condition statement will be executed?
Answer:
It will be executed only when the condition statement is true.

Question 7.
What is the advantage of a flowchart?
Answer:
They show the control flow of algorithms using diagrams in a visual manner.

Question 8.
What is a statement?
Answer:
A statement is a phrase that commands the computer to do an action.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 9.
What do you mean by compound statement?
Answer:
Statements may be composed of other statements, leading to a hierarchical structure of algorithms. Statements composed of other statements are known as compound statements.

Question 10.
What are the control flow statements?
Answer:
There are three important control flow statements:

  • Sequential
  • Alternative
  • Iterative

Question 11.
What happen when a control flow statement is executed?
Answer:
When a control flow statement is executed, the state of the process is tested, and depending on the result, a statement is selected for execution.

Question 12.
Write the specification for finding minimum of two numbers.
Answer:
The specification of algorithm minimum is minimum (a, b)
– – inputs: a , b
– – outputs: result = a ↓ b.

Part III

Explain in brief

Question 1.
How many notations are there for representing algorithms? Explain.
Answer:
There are mainly three different notations for representing algorithms.

  • A programming language is a notation for expressing algorithms to be executed by computers.
  • Pseudocode is a notation similar to programming languages. Algorithms expressed in pseudo-code are not intended to be executed by computers, but for communication among people.
  • A flowchart is a diagrammatic notation for representing algorithms. They give a visual intuition of the flow of control, when the algorithm is executed.

Question 2.
What are the disadvantages of a flowchart?
Answer:
Flowcharts also have the following disadvantages:

  • Flowcharts are less compact than the representation of algorithms in a programming language or pseudo code.
  • They obscure the basic hierarchical structure of the algorithms.
  • Alternative statements and loops are disciplined control flow structures.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 3.
Write a note on refinement.
Answer:
After decomposing a problem into smaller subproblems, the next step is either to refine the subproblem or to abstract the subproblem.
1. Each subproblem can be expanded into more detailed steps. Each step can be further expanded to still finer steps, and so on. This is known as refinement.

2. We can also abstract the subproblem. We specify each subproblem by its input property and the input-output relation. While solving the main problem, we only need to know the specification of the subproblems. We do not need to know how the subproblems are solved.

Question 4.
Write an algorithm that compares numbers and produces the result as
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition 6
We can split the state into an exhaustive set of 3 disjoint cases: a < b, a = b, and a> b. Then we can define compare() using a case analysis. The algorithm is as given below.

  1. compare(a, b)
  2. case a < b
  3. result := -1
  4. case a = b
  5. result := 0
  6. else – – a > b
  7. result: = 1

Question 5.
Construct specification and write an iterative algorithm to compute the quotient and remainder after dividing an integer A by another integer B.
Answer:
Specification: divide (A, B)
— inputs: A is an integer and B ≠ 0
— outputs : q and r such that A = q x B
+ r and 0 ≤ r < B

Algorithm:
divide (A, B)
— inputs: A is an integer and B * 0
— outputs : q and r such that
A = q X B + r and
— 0 < r < B
q := 0, A
while r ≥ B
q, r := q + 1, r – B

Question 6.
Explain Decomposition.
Answer:
It involves breaking down a problem into smaller and more manageable problems, and combining the solutions of the smaller problems to solve the original problem. Often, problems have structure.
We can exploit the structure of the problem and break it into smaller problems. Then, the smaller problems can be further broken until they become sufficiently small to be solved by other simpler means.
Their solutions are then combined together to construct a solution to the original problem.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 7.
Construct an iterative algorithm to compute the quotient and remainder after dividing an integer A by another integer B.
Answer:
divide (A, B)
– – inputs: A is an integer and B ≠ 0
– – Outputs: q and r such that A = q x B + r and 0 < r < B
q : = 0, A
While r ≥ B
q, r : = q + 1, r – B

Question 8.
Draw a flow chart for Eat breakfast.
Answer:
Flowchart for Eat breakfast
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition 7

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Part IV

Explain in detail

Question 1.
What is flowchart? Explain the various boxes (symbols) used in flowchart.
Answer:
A flowchart is a diagrammatic notation for representing algorithms. They show the control flow of algorithms using diagrams in a visual manner.

In flowcharts, rectangular boxes represent simple statements, diamond-shaped boxes
represent conditions, and arrows describe how the control flows during the execution of the algorithm. A flowchart is a collection of boxes containing statements and conditions which are connected by arrows showing the order in which the boxes are to be executed,

i) A statement is contained in a rectangular box with a single outgoing arrow, which points to the box to be executed next.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition 8

ii) A condition is contained in a diamond-shaped box with two outgoing arrows, labeled true and false. The true arrow points to the box to be executed next if the condition is true, and the false arrow points to the box to be executed next if the condition is false.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition 9

iii) Parallelogram boxes represent inputs given and outputs produced.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition 10

iv) Special boxes marked Start and the End is used to indicate the start and the end of execution.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition 11

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 2.
Draw a flowchart to compute the quotient and remainder after dividing an integer A by another integer B.
Answer:
Flowchart for integer division
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition 12

Question 3.
Explain sequential statement with suitable example.
Answer:
A sequential statement is composed of a sequence of statements. The statements in the sequence are executed one after another, in the same order as they are written in the algorithm, and the control flow is said to be sequential. Let S1 and S2 be statements. A sequential statement composed of S1 and S2 is written as
S1
S2
In order to execute the sequential statement, first, do S1 and then do S2.

The sequential statement given above can be represented in a flowchart as shown in in the following Figure. The arrow from S1 to S2 indicates that S1 is executed, and after that, S2 is executed.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition 13

Let the input property be P, and the input-output relation be Q, for a problem. If statement S solves the problem, it is written as
i) –P
ii) S
iii) — Q

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 4.
Explain alternative statement with an example. A condition is a phrase that describes a test of the state. If C is a condition and both SI and S2 are statements, then

if C
S1
else
S2

is a statement, called an alternative statement, that describes the following action:
i) Test whether C is true Or false.
ii) If C is true, then do SI; otherwise do S2.

In pseudo-code, the two alternatives S1 and S2 are indicated by indenting them from the keywords if and else, respectively. Alternative control flow is depicted in the following flowchart.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition 14

Condition C has two outgoing arrows, labeled true and false. The true arrow points to the SI box. The false arrow points to the S2 box. Arrows out of S1 and S2 point to the same box, the box after the alternative statement.

Question 5.
Explain conditional statement with suitable example.
Answer:
Sometimes we need to execute a statement only if a condition is true and do nothing if the condition is false. This is equivalent to the alternative statement in which the else-clause is empty. This variant of alternative statement is called a conditional statement. If C is a condition and S is a statement, then
if C
S
is a statement, called a conditional statement, that describes the following action:

  • Test whether C is true or false.
  • If C is true then do S; otherwise do nothing.

The conditional control flow is depicted in the following flowchart.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition 15

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 6.
Write a note on case analysis.
Answer:
An alternative statement analyses the problem into two cases. The case analysis statement generalizes it to multiple cases. Case analysis splits the problem into an exhaustive set of disjoint cases. For each case, the problem is solved independently. If C1, C2, and C3 are conditions, and S1, S2, S3, and S4 are statements, a 4 – case analysis statement has the form.

  1. case C1
  2. S1
  3. case C2
  4. S2
  5. case C3
  6. S3
  7. else
  8. S4

The conditions C1, C2, and C3 are evaluated in turn. For the first condition that evaluates to true, the corresponding statement is executed, and the case analysis statement ends. If none of the conditions evaluates to true, then the default case S4 is executed.

  1. The cases are exhaustive: at least one of the cases is true. If all conditions are false, the default case is true.
  2. The cases are disjoint: only one of the cases is true. Though it is possible for more than one condition to be true, the case analysis always executes only one case, the first one that is true.
  3. f the three conditions are disjoint, then the four cases are (1) C1, (2) C2, (3) C3, (4) (not C1), and (not C2) and (not C3).

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 7.
Explain iterative statement with suitable example.
Answer:
An iterative process executes the same action repeatedly, subject to a condition C.
If C is a condition and S is a statement, then
while C
S
is a statement, called an iterative statement, that describes the following action:

  • Test whether C is true or false.
  • If C is true, then do S and go back to step 1; otherwise do nothing.

The iterative statement is commonly known as a loop. These two steps, testing C and executing S, are repeated until C becomes false. When C becomes false, the loop ends, and the control flows to the statement next to the iterative statement.

The condition C and the statement S are called the loop condition and the loop body, respectively. Testing the loop condition and executing the loop body once is called an iteration, not C is known as the termination condition.
Iterative control flow is depicted in the following flowchart
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition 16

Condition C has two outgoing arrows, true and false. The true arrow points to S box. If C is true, S box is executed and control flows back to C box. The false arrow points to the box after the iterative statement (dotted box). If C is false, the loop ends and the control flows to the next box after the loop.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Pdf Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Solutions Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

11th Computer Science Guide Specification and Abstraction Text Book Questions and Answers

Part I

Choose the best answer

Question 1.
Which of the following activities is algorithmic in nature?
a) Assemble a bicycle
b) Describe a bicycle
c) Label the parts of a bicycle
d) Explain how a bicycle works
Answer:
a) Assemble a bicycle

Question 2.
Which of the following activities is not algorithmic in nature?
a) Multiply two numbers
b) Draw a kolam
c) Walk in the park
d) Braid the hair
Answer:
d) Braid the hair

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 3.
Omitting details inessential to the task and representing only the essential features of the task is known as
a) specification
b) abstraction
c) composition
d) decomposition
Answer:
b) abstraction

Question 4.
Stating the input property and the as :-output relation a problem is known
a) specification
b) statement
c) algorithm
d) definition
Answer:
a) specification

Question 5.
Ensuring the input-output relation is
a) the responsibility of the algorithm and the right of the user
b) the responsibility of the user and the right of the algorithm
c) the responsibility of the algorithm but not the right of the user
d) the responsibility of both the user and the algorithm
Answer:
d) the responsibility of both the user and the algorithm

Question 6.
If i = 5 before the assignment i := i-1 after the assignment? the value of i is
a) 5
b) 4
c) 3
d) 2
Answer:
b) 4

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 7.
If 0 < i before the assignment S := i-1 after the assignment, we cars conclude that
a) 0 < i
b) 0 < i c) i = 0 d) 0 >i
Answer:
b) 0 < i

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Part II

Short Answers

Question 1.
Define an algorithm
Answer:
An algorithm is a step-by-step sequence of statements intended to solve a problem. An algorithm starts execution with the input data, executes the statements, and finishes execution with the output data.

Question 2.
Distinguish between an algorithm and a process.
Answer:
An algorithm is a sequence of instructions to accomplish a task or solve a problem.
An instruction describes an action. When the instructions are executed, a process evolves which accomplishes the intended task or solves the given problem.
We can compare an algorithm to a recipe, and the resulting process to cooking.

Question 3.
Initially, farmer, goat, grass, wolf = L, L, L, L, and the farmer crosses the river with a goat. Model the action with an assignment statement.
Answer:
The sequence of assignments for goat, grass, and wolf problem.

1. farmer, goat, grass, wolf = L, L, L, L
2. farmer, goat = R, R
3. farmer, goat, grass, wolf = R, R, L, L
4. farmer = L
5. farmer, goat, grass, wolf = L, R, L, L
6. farmer, grass = R, R
7. farmer, goat, grass, wolf = R, R, R, L
8. farmer, goat = L, L
9. farmer, goat, grass, wolf = L, L, R, L
10. farmer, wolf = R, R
11. farmer, goat, grass, wolf = R, L, R, R
12. farmer = L
13. farmer, goat, grass, wolf = L, L, R, R
14. farmer, goat =R, R
15. farmer, goat, grass, wolf = R, R, R, R

Question 4.
Specify a function to find the minimum of two numbers.
Answer:

  1. – – minimum (a,b)
  2. – – inputs: a, b are real numbers.
  3. – – output: result: = minimum (a,b)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 5.
If √2 = 1.414, and the square_root() function returns -1.414, does it violate the following specification?
— square_root (x)
— inputs: x is a real number, x ≥ 0
— outputs: y is d real number such that y2 = x
Answer:
— square_root (x)
— inputs: x is a real number, x > 0
— outputs: y is d real number such that y2 = x
Yes. It violates the specification. For a positive input (x > 0), the output square-root value should also be positive.

Part III

Explain in brief.

Question 1.
When do you say that a problem is algorithmic in nature?
Answer:
A Problem is algorithmic in nature when its solution involves the construction of an algorithm. Also when the

  1. Input data and output data of the problem are specified.
  2. The relation between the input data and the output data is specified.

Question 2.
What is the format of the specification of an algorithm?
Answer:
An algorithm is specified by the properties of the given input and the relation between the input and the desired output. In simple words, the specification of an algorithm is the desired input-output relation.

Let P be the required property of the inputs and Q the property of the desired outputs. Then the algorithm S is specified as;

  • algorithm_name (inputs)
  • – inputs: P
  • – outputs: Q

This specification means that if the algorithm starts with inputs satisfying P, then it will finish with the outputs satisfying Q.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 3.
What is abstraction?
Answer:
Abstraction:
It is the facility to define objects. It also involves the removal of unnecessary attributes and defining only essential attributes. For example, when we represent the state of a process we select only the variables essential to the problem and ignore inessential details.

Question 4.
How is the state represented in algorithms?
Answer:
Computational processes in the real-world have stated. As a process evolves, the state changes.
The state of a process can be represented by a set of variables in an algorithm. The state at any point of execution is simply the values of the variables at that point. As the values of the variables are changed, the state changes.

Example:
State: A traffic signal may be in one of the three states: green, amber, or red. The state is changed to allow a smooth flow of traffic. The state may be represented by a single variable signal which can have one of the three values: green, amber, or red.

Question 5.
What is the form and meaning of the assignment statement?
Answer:
Variables are named boxes to store values. The assignment statement is used to store a value in a variable. It is written with the variable on the left side of the assignment operator and a value on the right side.
variable := value

When this assignment is executed, the value on the right side is stored in the variable on the left side. The assignment
m := 2 stores value 2 in variable m.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction 1
If the variable already has a value stored in it, the assignment changes its value to the value on the right side. The old value of the variable is lost.
The right side of an assignment can be an expression.
variable := expression
In this case, the expression is evaluated and the value of the expression is stored in the variable.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 6.
What is the difference between assignment operator and equality operator?
Answer:

Assignment operatorEquality operator
It assign right-hand side of the assignment operator value(constant / variable/ expression) to the left-hand side variable.It compares both operands and returns True if it is equal otherwise False. It is a relational operator.

Part IV

Explain in detail

Question 1.
Write the specification of an algorithm hypotenuse whose inputs are the lengths of the two shorter sides of a right-angled triangle, and the output is the length of the third side.
Answer:
hypotenuse(sl, s2).
— inputs: si and s2 both are real numbers
— outputs: I is a real number such that
l2 = s12+ S22.

Question 2.
Suppose you want to solve the quadratic equation ax2 + bx + c = 0 by an algorithm.
quadratic_solve (a, b, c)
— inputs : ?
— outputs: ?
You intend to use the formula and you are prepared to handle only real number roots. Write a suitable specification.
\(x=\frac{-b \pm \sqrt{b^{2}-4 a c}}{2 a}\)
Solution;
quadratic_solve (a, b, c).
– inputs : a,b,c all are real numbers, a ≠ 0.
– outputs: x is a real number.
\(x=\frac{-b \pm \sqrt{b^{2}-4 a c}}{2 a}\)
such that b2 – 4ac > 0.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 3.
Exchange the contents: Given two glasses marked A and B Glass A is full of apple drink and glass B is full of grape drink. For exchanging the contents of glasses A and B, represent the state by suitable variables, and write the specification of the algorithm.
Answer:
The specification of the algorithm:
exchange (A, B)
–inputs: A,B are real and >0
–outputs: A,B are real and >0
State representation
TEMP:=A
A:=B
B := TEMP

11th Computer Science Guide Specification and Abstraction Additional Questions and Answers

Part I

Choose the best answer

Question 1.
Which one of the following is an example of a process?
(a) Braid the hair
(b) Adding three numbers
(c) Cooking a dish
(d) Walk in the Road
Answer:
(c) Cooking a dish

Question 2.
An instruction describes an __________
a) action
b) input
c) output
d) flow
Answer:
a) action

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 3.
How many basic building blocks construct an algorithm?
(a) 3
(b) 4
(c) 5
(d) 8
Answer:
(b) 4

Question 4.
Instructions of a computer are also known as _________
a) statements
b) structures
c) procedures
d) None of these
Answer:
a) statements

Question 5.
……………….. how many control flow statement is there to alter the control flow depending on the state?
(a) 5
(b) 6
(c) 3
(d) 8
Answer:
(c) 3

Question 6.
__________ is a step in solving a mathematical problem suggested by G Polya.
a) Understand the problem and Devise a plan
b) Carry out the plan
c) Review your work
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 7.
……………….. statement is used to store a value in a variable.
(a) Assignment
(b) Sequential control flow
(c) Alternative control flow
(d) Iterative
Answer:
(a) Assignment

Question 8.
__________takes input data, process the data, and produce output data.
a) Function
b) Algorithm
c) Procedure
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Algorithm

Question 9.
Each part of the algorithm is known as ………………..
(a) input
(b) function
(c) variable
(d) program
Answer:
(b) function

Question 10.
When we do operations on data, we need to store the results in________
a) Function
b) Algorithm
c) Constant
d) Variable
Answer:
d) Variable

Question 11.
If i: = 3 before the assignment, i: = i + 1 after the assignment ………………..
(a) 3
(b) 4
(c) 5
(d) 0
Answer:
(b) 4

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 12.
In algorithm, the statement to be executed next may depend on the __________
a) algorithm step
b) state of the process
c) user direction
d) None of these
Answer:
b) state of the process

Question 13.
If i: = 10 before the assignment, then i: = i % 2 after the assignment
(a) 10
(b) 5
(c) 0
(d) 1
Answer:
(c) 0

Question 14.
There are control flow statements to alter the control flow depending on the state.
a) two
b) five
c) four
d) three
Answer:
d) three

Question 15.
Initially the values of P and C are 4 and 5 respectively
– – P, C : = 4, 5
P : = C
C : = P. Then find P and C
(a) 4 and 4
(b) 5 and 4
(c) 5 and 5
(d) 4 and 5
Answer:
(c) 5 and 5

Question 16.
__________ control flow, a condition of the state is tested, and if the condition is true, one statement is executed; if the condition is false, n alternative statement is executed.
a) alternative
b) iterative
c) random
d) sequential
Answer:
a) alternative

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 17.
How many Algorithmic designing techniques are there?
(a) 2
(b) 3
(c) 4
(d) 5
Answer:
(c) 4

Question 18.
A ___________ takes an input and produces an output, satisfying a desired input-output relation.
a) function
b) union
c) structures
d) None of these
Answer:
a) function

Question 19.
which one of the following is the equality operator?
(a) =
(b) = =
(c) + +
(d) – –
Answer:
(b) = =

Question 20.
___________ is the basic principle and technique for designing algorithm.
a) Specification
b) Abstraction
c) Composition and Decomposition
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 21.
Which one of the following statements are not executed on the computers?
(a) Comment line
(b) Header file
(c) cin
(d) cout
Answer:
(a) Comment line

Question 22.
Ignoring or hiding unnecessary details and modeling an entity only by its essential properties is known as __________
a) data hiding
b) abstraction
c) data analysis
d) None of these
Answer:
b) abstraction

Question 23.
The values of the variables when the algorithm finishes is ………………..
(a) final stage
(b) final state
(c) last stage
(d) last state
Answer:
(b) final state

Question 24.
An algorithm is composed of__________
statement.
a) assignment
b) control flow
c) both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) both A and B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 25.
Which one of the following is not a building block of the algorithm?
(a) data
(b) state
(c) variables
(d) functions
Answer:
(b) state

Question 26.
To solve a problem, we must state the problem__________
a) clearly and precisely
b) with ambiguity
c) with data hiding
d) None of these
Answer:
a) clearly and precisely

Question 27.
Reasoning:
I. We can store a value in a variable using the assignment operator.
II. We can change the value in a variable using the assignment operator.
III. Assignment operator is = =
(a) I and III are true
(b) I and II are true
(c) II and III are true
(d) I, II, III is true
Answer:
(b) I and II are true

Question 28.
Specification of an algorithm is the desired __________relation.
a) input-process
b) process-output
c) input-output
d) None of these
Answer:
c) input-output

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 29.
In which one of the control flow statements, if the condition is false, then the alternative statement will be executed ………………..
(a) Sequential
(b) iterative
(c) selection
(d) alternative
Answer:
(d) alternative

Question 30.
The values of the variables when the algorithm starts are known as the __________state.
a) initial
b) final
c) intermediate
d) None of these
Answer:
a) initial

Question 31.
If the statement is executed one after the other, then it is a control flow.
(a) Sequential
(b) iterative
(c) selection
(d) alternative
Answer:
(a) Sequential

Question 32.
We can write the specification in a standard __________part format.
a) three
b) four
c) two
d) many
Answer:
a) three

Question 33.
Which one of the following is not a technique for designing algorithms?
(a) specifications
(b) abstraction
(c) encapsulation
(d) composition
Answer:
(c) encapsulation

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 34.
__________defines the rights and responsibilities of the designer and the user.
a) Specification
b) Abstraction
c) Composition and Decomposition
d) All the above
Answer:
a) Specification

Question 35.
How many parts are there in the specification is ………………..
(a) 2
(b) 3
(c) 4
(d) 5
Answer:
(b) 3

Question 36.
In algorithms, the state of a computation is abstracted by a set of __________
a) expressions
b) variables
c) functions
d) None of these
Answer:
b) variables

Question 37.
Identify the statement which is not true?
(a) An instruction describes an object
(b) the specification is one of the algorithm design techniques
(c) An algorithm is a step by step sequence of instructions
Answer:
(a) An instruction describes an object

Question 38.
_________ is a basic and important abstraction.
a) process
b) state
c) addition
d) None of these
Answer:
d) None of these

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 39.
Sequential, Alternative, and Iterative comes under the classification of ……………….. :
(a) Building blocks of the algorithm
(b) control flow statements
(c) Algorithm design techniques
(d) Abstraction
Answer:
(b) control flow statements

Part II

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Define State.
Answer:
The state of a process can be represented by a set of variables in an algorithm. The State at any point of execution is simply the values of the variables at that point.

Question 2.
What is the statement?
Answer:
Instructions of a computer are also known as statements.

Question 3.
Define variable.
Answer:
The data stored in a variable is also known as the value of the variable. We can store a value in a variable or change the value of a variable, using an assignment statement.

Question 4.
What are the building blocks of algorithms?
Answer:
The building blocks of algorithms are;

  • Data.
  • Variables.
  • Control flow.
  • Functions.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 5.
Define control flow.
Answer:
The order in which the statements are executed may differ from the order in which they are written in the algorithm. This order of execution of statements is known as the control flow.

Question 6.
What is a function?
Answer:
The parts of an algorithm are known as functions. A function is like a sub-algorithm. It takes an input, and produces an output, satisfying the desired input, output relation.

Question 7.
How will you specify the algorithm?
Answer:
The algorithm S is specified as;

  • algorithm_name (inputs)
  • inputs: P
  • outputs: Q

This specification means that if the algorithm starts with inputs satisfying P, then it will finish with the outputs satisfying Q.

Question 8.
Define abstraction.
Answer:
Abstraction is the process of ignoring or hiding irrelevant details and modeling a problem only by its essential features.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 9.
What purpose abstraction is used?
Answer:
Abstraction is the most effective mental tool used for managing complexity. If we do not abstract a problem adequately, we may deal with unnecessary details and complicate the solution.

Part III

Explain in brief

Question 1.
Define Alternative control flow statement.
Answer:
In alternative control flow, a condition of the state is tested, and if the condition is true, one statement is executed; if the condition is false, an alternative statement is executed.

Question 2.
Justify goat, grass, and wolf problem is algorithmic.
Answer:
goat, grass, and wolf problem:
A farmer wishes to take a goat, a grass bundle, and a wolf across a river. However, his boat can take only one of them at a time. So several trips are necessary across the river.

Moreover, the goat should not be left alone with the grass (otherwise, the goat would eat the grass), and the wolf should not be left alone with the goat (otherwise, the wolf would eat the goat).

How can the farmer achieve the task? Initially, we assume that all the four are at the same side of the river, and finally, all the four must be on the opposite side. The farmer must be in the boat when crossing the river.
A solution consists of a sequence of instructions indicating who or what should cross. Therefore, this is an algorithmic problem.

Question 3.
Write the Iterative control flow statement.
Answer:
In iterative control flow, a condition of the state is tested, and if the condition is true, a statement is executed. The two steps of testing the condition and executing the statement are repeated until the condition becomes false.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 4.
Explain variable.
Answer:
Variables are named boxes for storing data. When we do operations on data, we need to store the results in variables. The data stored in a variable is also known as the value of the variable.
We can store a value in a variable or change the value of a variable, using an assignment statement.

Question 5.
Write the following
(i) initial state
(ii) final state
Answer:
The values of the variables when the algorithm starts are known as the initial state, and the values of the variables when the algorithm finishes are known as the final state.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 6.
When functions are needed?
Answer:
Algorithms can become very complex. The variables of an algorithm and dependencies among the variables may be too many. Then, it is difficult to build algorithms correctly.
In such situations, we break an algorithm into parts, construct each part separately, and then integrate the parts to the complete algorithm. The parts of an algorithm are known as functions.

Question 7.
Give an example for a function?
Answer:
Suppose we want to calculate the surface area of a cylinder of radius r and height h.
A = 2 πr² + 2πrh
We can identify two functions, one for calculating the area of a circle and the other for the circumference of the circle.
If we abstract the two functions as circle_area(r) and circle_circumference(r), then,
cylinder_area (r, h) can be solved as:
cylinder_area (r, h) = 2 X circle_area (r) + circle_circumference (r) X h.

Question 8.
What are the basic principles and techniques for designing algorithms?
Answer:
The basic principles and techniques for designing algorithms are:

  • Specification.
  • Abstraction.
  • Composition.
  • Decomposition.

Question 9.
Write the specification format and explain.
Answer:
Specification format:
We can write the specification in a standard three-part format:

  • The name of the algorithm and the inputs.
  • Input: the property of the inputs.
  • Output: the desired input-output relation.

The first part is the name of the algorithm and the inputs. The second part is the property of the inputs. It is written as a comment which starts with – inputs: The third part is the desired input-output relation.
It is written as a comment which starts with — outputs: The input and output can be written using English and mathematical notation.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 10.
Write the specification of an algorithm for computing the square root of a number.
Answer:

  • Let us name the algorithm square_root.
    it takes the number as the input. Let us name the input n. n should not be negative.
  • It produces the square root of n as the output. Let us name the output y. Then n should be the square of y.

Now the specification of the algorithm is
a) square_root (n).
b) inputs: n is a real number, n > 0.
c) outputs: y is a real number such that y 2= n.

Question 11.
Give an example for abstraction.
Answer:

  • A road map is designed for drivers. They do not usually worry about hills so most hills are ignored on a road map.
  • A walker’s map is not interested in whether a road is a one-way street, so such details are ignored.

Part IV

Explain in detail

Question 1.
Explain the three control flow statement.
Answer:
There are three important control flow statements to alter the control flow depending on the state.

  1. In sequential control flow, a sequence of statements is executed one after another in the same order as they are written.
  2. In alternative control flow, a condition of the state is tested, and if the condition is true, one statement is executed; if the condition is false, an alternative statement is executed.
  3. In iterative control flow, a condition of the state is tested, and if the condition is true, a statement is executed. The two steps of testing the condition and executing the statement are repeated until the condition becomes false.

Question 2.
What are the uses of the Operating System?
Answer:
The basic principles and techniques for designing algorithms are;

  • Specification.
  • Abstraction.
  • Composition.
  • Decomposition.

Specification: The first step in problem-solving is to state the problem precisely. A problem is specified in terms of the input given and the output desired. The specification must also state the properties of the given input, and the relation between the input and the output.

Abstraction: A problem can involve a lot of details. Several of these details are unnecessary for solving the problem. Only a few details are essential. Ignoring or hiding unnecessary details and modeling an entity only by its essential properties is known as abstraction. For example, when we represent the state of a process, we select only the variables essential to the problem and ignore inessential details.

Composition: An algorithm is composed of assignment and control flow statements. A control flow statement tests a condition of the state and, depending on the value of the condition, decides the next statement to be executed.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Decomposition: We divide the main algorithm into functions. We construct each function independently of the main algorithm and other functions. Finally, we construct the main algorithm using the functions.

Question 3.
Explain the specification format.
Answer:
Specification format: We can write the specification in a standard three-part format:

  1. The name of the algorithm and the inputs
  2. Input: the property of the inputs
  3. Output: the desired input-output relation

The first part is the name of the algorithm and the inputs. The second part is the property of the inputs. It is written as a comment which starts with – inputs: The third part is the desired input-output relation. It is written as a comment which starts with outputs: The input and output can be written using English and mathematical notation.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 4.
Explain the state with a suitable example.
Answer:
State:
The state is a basic and important abstraction. Computational processes have stated. A computational process starts with an initial state. As actions are performed, its state changes. It ends with a final state.

The state of a process is abstracted by a set of variables in the algorithm. The state at any point of execution is simply the values of the variables at that point.

Example:
Chocolate Bars: A rectangular chocolate bar is divided into squares by horizontal and vertical grooves. We wish-to break the bar into individual squares.
To start with, we have the whole of the bar as a single piece. A cut is made by choosing a piece and breaking it along one of its grooves. Thus a cut divides a piece into two pieces. How many cuts are needed to break the bar into its individual squares? In this example, we will abstract the essential variables of the problem.

Essential variables:
The number of pieces and the number of cuts are the essential variables of the problem. We will represent them by two variables, p and c, respectively. Thus, the state of the process is abstracted by two variables p and c.

Irrelevant details:
The problem could be cutting a chocolate bar into individual pieces or cutting a sheet of postage stamps into individual stamps. It is irrelevant. The problem is simply cutting a grid of squares into individual squares.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction 2

The sequence of cuts that have been made and the shapes and sizes of the resulting pieces are irrelevant too. From p and c, we cannot reconstruct the sizes of the individual pieces. But, that is irrelevant to solving the problem.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Pdf Chapter 10 Oscillations Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Solutions Chapter 10 Oscillations

11th Physics Guide Oscillations Book Back Questions and Answers

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations

I. Multiple choice questions:

Question 1.
In a simple harmonic oscillation, the acceptation against displacement for one complete oscillation will be: (Model NSEP 2000 – 01)
(a) an ellipse
(b) a circle
(c) a parabola
(d) a straight line
Answer:
(d) a straight line

Hint:
The sketch between cause (magnitude of acceleration) and effect (magnitude of displacement) is a straight line.

Question 2.
A particle executing SHM crosses points A and B with the same velocity. Having taken 3 s in passing from A to B, it returns to B after another 3 s. The time period is:
(a) 15 s
(b) 6 s
(c) 12 s
(d) 9 s
Answer:
(c) 12 s

Hint:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 1
The time period is the time taken by a particle to return to B.

Question 3.
The length of a second’s pendulum on the surface of the Earth is 0.9 m. The length of the same pendulum on the surface of planet X such that the acceleration of the planet X is n times greater than the Earth is:
(a) 0.9 n
(b) \(\frac { 0.9 }{ n }\)m
(c) 0.9 n²m
(d) \(\frac{0.9}{n^{2}}\)
Answer:
(a) 0.9 n

Hint:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 2

Question 4.
A simple pendulum is suspended from the roof of a school bus which moves in a horizontal direction with an acceleration a, then the time period is:
(a) T ∝ \(\frac{1}{g^{2}+a^{2}}\)
(b) T ∝ \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{g^{2}+a^{2}}}\)
(c) T ∝ \(\sqrt{g^{2}+a^{2}}\)
(d) T ∝ (g² + a²)
Answer:
(b) T ∝ \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{g^{2}+a^{2}}}\)

Hint: T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{l}{g}}\)
When a bus is moving
g’ = \(\sqrt{g^{2}+a^{2}}\)
∴ T ∝ \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{g^{2}+a^{2}}}\)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations

Question 5.
Two bodies A and B whose masses are in the rati0 1:2 are suspended from two separate massless springs of force constants kA and kB respectively. If the two bodies oscillate vertically such that their maximum velocities are in the ratio 1:2, the ratio of the amplitude A to that of B is:
(a) \(\sqrt{\frac{k_{\mathrm{B}}}{2 k_{\mathrm{A}}}}\)
(b) \(\sqrt{\frac{k_{\mathrm{B}}}{8 k_{\mathrm{A}}}}\)
(c) \(\sqrt{\frac{2k_{\mathrm{B}}}{ k_{\mathrm{A}}}}\)
(d) \(\sqrt{\frac{8k_{\mathrm{B}}}{ k_{\mathrm{A}}}}\)
Answer:
(b) \(\sqrt{\frac{k_{\mathrm{B}}}{8 k_{\mathrm{A}}}}\)

Hint: vA : vB
Amplitude of A : Amplitude of B = \(\sqrt{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{B}}}: \sqrt{8 \mathrm{~K}_{\mathrm{A}}}\)

Question 6.
A spring is connected to a mass m Suspended from it and its time period for vertical oscillation is T. The spring is now cut into two equal halves and the same mass is suspended from one of the halves. The period of vertical oscillation is:
(a) T’ = \(\sqrt{2}\)T
(b) T’ = \(\frac{\mathrm{T}}{\sqrt{2}}\)
(c) T’ = \(\sqrt{2T}\)
(d) T’ = \(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{T}}{2}}\)
Answer:
(b) T’ = \(\frac{\mathrm{T}}{\sqrt{2}}\)

Hint:
T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{m}}{k}}\)
When the spring is cut into two equal halves, then the force constant of each part is 2k.
When the mass is suspended from one of the halves.
Time period T’ = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{m}}{2k}}\)
= \(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{T}}{2}}\)

Question 7.
The time period for small vertical oscillations of block of mass m when the masses of the pulleys are negligible and spring constant k1 and k2 is:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 3
(a) T = 4π\(\sqrt{m\left(\frac{1}{k_{1}}+\frac{1}{k_{2}}\right)}\)
(b) T = 2π\(\sqrt{m\left(\frac{1}{k_{1}}+\frac{1}{k_{2}}\right)}\)
(c) T = 4π\(\sqrt{m\left(k_{1}+k_{2}\right)}\)
(d) T = 2π\(\sqrt{m\left(k_{1}+k_{2}\right)}\)
Answer:
(a) T = 4π\(\sqrt{m\left(\frac{1}{k_{1}}+\frac{1}{k_{2}}\right)}\)

Hint:
T = 2π\(\frac { m }{ k }\)
The given arrangement is similar to the combination of springs in series.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 4

Question 8.
A simple pendulum has a time period T1. When its point of suspension is moved vertically upwards according as y = kt², where y is vertical distance covered and k = 1 ms-2, its time period becomes T2. Then, \(\frac{\mathrm{T}_{1}^{2}}{\mathrm{~T}_{2}^{2}}\) is (g = 10 ms-2
(a) \(\frac { 5 }{ 6 }\)
(b) \(\frac { 11 }{ 10 }\)
(c) \(\frac { 6 }{ 5 }\)
(d) \(\frac { 5 }{ 4 }\)
Answer:
(c) \(\frac { 6 }{ 5 }\)

Hint:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 5

Question 9.
An ideal spring of spring constant k, is suspended from the ceiling of a room and a block of mass m is fastened to its lower end. If the block is released when the spring is un-stretched, then the maximum extension in the spring is:
(a) 4\(\frac { mg }{ k }\)
(b) \(\frac { mg }{ k }\)
(c) 2\(\frac { mg }{ k }\)
(d) \(\frac { mg }{ 2k }\)
Answer:
(c) 2\(\frac { mg }{ k }\)

Hint:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 6

Question 10.
A pendulum is hung in a very high building oscillates to and fro motion freely like a simple harmonic oscillator. If the acceleration of the bob is 16 ms-2 at a distance of 4 m from the mean position, then the time period is: (NEET 2018 model)
(a) 2s
(b) 1s
(c) 2 πs
(d) πs
Answer:
(d) πs

Hint:
a = 16 m/s²; y = 4
a = – \(\frac { g }{ l }\)x = – ω²x
16 = \(\left|1-\omega^{2} \times 4\right|\)
∴ ω² = \(\frac { 16 }{ 4 }\) = 4
ω = 2
Time period T = \(\frac { 2π }{ ω }\) = πs

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations

Question 11.
A hollow sphere is filled with water. It is hung by a long thread. As the water flows out of a hole at the bottom, the period of oscillation will:
(a) first increase and then decrease
(b) first decrease and then increase
(c) increase continuously
(d) decrease continuously
Answer:
(a) first increase and then decrease

Hint:
As the water flows out of the sphere, the time period first increases and then decreases. Initially, when the sphere is completely filled with water its centre of gravity (C.G) lies at its centre. As water flows out, the C.G begins to shift below the centre of the sphere.

The effective length of the pendulum increases and hence time period increases. When the sphere becomes more than half empty, its C.G begins to rise up. The effective length of the pendulum decreases and T decreases.

Question 12.
The damping force on an oscillator is directly proportional to the velocity. The units of the constant of proportionality are: (AIPMT 2012)
(a) kg m s-1
(b) kg m s-2
(c) kg s-1
(d) kg s
Answer:
(c) kg s-1

Hint:
Fd ∝ v
Fd = – bv
Fd = kv
∴ k = \(\frac{\mathrm{F}_{d}}{\nu}\)
Units of k = \(\frac{\mathrm{kgms}^{-2}}{\mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}}\)
= kg-1
Units of proportionality constant = kgs-1

Question 13.
When a damped harmonic oscillator completes 100 oscillations, its amplitude is reduced to\(\frac { 1 }{ 3 }\) of its initial value. What will be its amplitude when it completes 200 oscillations?
(a) \(\frac { 1 }{ 5 }\)
(b) \(\frac { 2 }{ 3 }\)
(c) \(\frac { 1 }{ 6 }\)
(d) \(\frac { 1 }{ 9 }\)
Answer:
(b) \(\frac { 2 }{ 3 }\)

Hint:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 7

Question 14.
Which of the following differential equations represents a damped harmonic oscillator?
(a) \(\frac{d^{2} y}{d t^{2}}\) + y = 0
(b) \(\frac{d^{2} y}{d t^{2}}\) + γ \(\frac { dy }{ dt }\) + y = 0
(c) \(\frac{d^{2} y}{d t^{2}}\) + k²y = 0
(d) \(\frac { dy }{ dt }\) + y = 0
Answer:
(b) \(\frac{d^{2} y}{d t^{2}}\) + γ \(\frac { dy }{ dt }\) + y = 0

Hint:
For a damped oscillator F ∝ v
Total restoring force F = – ky – bv
b – damping constant; y – displacement
If F = – ky – by
then m\(\frac{d^{2} y}{d t^{2}}\) = – ky – b\(\frac { dy }{ dt }\)
m\(\frac{d^{2} y}{d t^{2}}\) + ky + b\(\frac { dy }{ dt }\) = 0
÷ m we get
\(\frac{d^{2} y}{d t^{2}}\) + \(\frac { b }{ m }\)\(\frac { dy }{ dt }\) + \(\frac { k }{ m }\)y = 0
If k = m and \(\frac { b }{ m }\) = r
then the equation becomes
\(\frac{d^{2} y}{d t^{2}}\) + r\(\frac { dy }{ dt }\) + y = 0

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations

Question 15.
If the inertial mass and gravitational mass of the simple pendulum of length l are not equal, then the time period of the simple pendulum is:
(a) T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{m_{i} l}{m_{g} g}}\)
(b) T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{m_{g} l}{m_{i} g}}\)
(c) T = 2π\(\frac{m_{g}}{m_{i}} \sqrt{\frac{l}{g}}\)
(d) T = 2π\(\frac{m_{i}}{m_{g}} \sqrt{\frac{l}{g}}\)
Answer:
(a) T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{m_{i} l}{m_{g} g}}\)

Hint:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 8

II. Short Answers Questions:

Question 1.
What is meant by periodic and non-periodic motion? Give any two examples, for each motion.
Answer:
Periodic motion: Any motion which repeats itself in a fixed time interval is known as periodic motion. Examples: Hands in a pendulum clock, the swing of a cradle.
Non-Periodic motion: Any motion which does not repeat itself after a regular interval of time is known as non-periodic motion. Example: Occurrence of Earthquake, the eruption of a volcano.

Question 2.
What is meant by the force constant of a spring?
Answer:
Force constant is defined as force per unit length.

Question 3.
Define the time period of simple harmonic motion.
Answer:
The time period is defined as the time taken by a particle to complete one oscillation. It is usually denoted by T.

Question 4.
Define frequency of simple harmonic motion.
Answer:
The number of oscillations produced by the particle per second is called frequency. It is denoted by f. SI unit for frequency is s-1 or hertz (Hz).
Mathematically, frequency is related to time period by f = \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{T}}\)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations

Question 5.
What is an epoch?
Answer:
Initial phases of a particle is an epoch. At time t = 0 s (initial time), the phase φ = (φ0 is called epoch (initial phase) where φ0 is called the angle of epoch.

Question 6.
Write short notes on two springs connected in series.
Answer:
Let us consider two springs whose spring constant are k1 and k2 and which are connected to a mass m as shown in Figure.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 9
Let F be the applied force towards right as shown in Figure. The net displacement of the mass point is
x = x1 + x2
From Hooke’s law, the net force,
F = – ks(x1 + x2)
The effective spring constant can be calculated as
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 11
When n springs connected in series, the effective spring constant in series is
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 12
If all spring constants are identical
i.e., k1 = k2 = … = kn = k then
\(\frac{1}{k_{s}}\) = \(\frac { n }{ k }\) ⇒ ks = \(\frac { k }{ n }\)
This means that the effective spring constant reduces by the factor n. So, for springs in series connection, the effective spring constant is lesser than the individual spring constants.

Question 7.
Write short notes on two springs connected in parallel.
Answer:
Let us consider only two springs of spring constants k1 and k2 attached to a mass m as shown in Figure.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 13
Net force for the displacement of mass m is F = – kpx … (1)
Where kp is called effective spring constant. Let the first spring be elongated by a displacement x due to force F1 and the second spring be elongated by the same displacement x due to force F2, then the net force
F = – k1x – k2x … (2)
Equating equations (2) and (1), we get
kp = k1 + k2 … (3)
Generalizing, for n springs connected in parallel,
kp = \(\sum_{i=1}^{n} k_{i}\) … (4)
If all spring constants are identical i.e., k1 = k2 = … = kn = k then
kp = nk … (5)
It is implied that the effective spring constant increases by a factor n. So, for the springs in parallel connection, the effective spring constant is greater than the individual spring constant.

Question 8.
Write down the time period of simple pendulum.
Answer:
T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{l}{g}}\) in second.
where l – length of the pendulum.
g – acceleration due to gravity.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations

Question 9.
State the laws of simple pendulum.
Answer:
Laws of simple pendulum: The time period of a simple pendulum.

Depends on the following laws:
(i) Law of length: For a given value of acceleration due to gravity, the time period of a simple pendulum is directly proportional to the square root of length of the pendulum.
T ∝ \(\sqrt{l}\) … (1)

(ii) Law of acceleration: For a fixed length, the time period of a simple pendulum is inversely proportional to the square root of acceleration due to gravity.
T ∝ \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{g}}\) … (2)

Question 10.
Write down the equation of time period for linear harmonic oscillator.
Answer:
Time period T = \(\frac { 1 }{ f }\) = 2π \(\sqrt{\frac{m}{k}}\)s
where m is the mass, k is the spring constant.

Question 11.
What is meant by free oscillation?
Answer:
The oscillations in which the amplitude decreases gradually with the passage of time are called damped Oscillations.
Example:

  1. The oscillations of a pendulum or pendulum oscillating inside an oil-filled container.
  2. Electromagnetic oscillations in a tank circuit.
  3. Oscillations in a dead beat and ballistic galvanometers.

Question 12.
Explain damped oscillation. Give an example.
Answer:
If an oscillator oscillates in a resistive medium, then its amplitude goes on decreasing. The motion of the oscillator is called damped oscillation.
Example:

  • The oscillations of a pendulum (including air friction) or pendulum oscillating inside an oil-filled container.
  • Electromagnetic oscillations in a tank circuit.

Question 13.
Define forced oscillation. Give an example.
Answer:
The body executing vibration initially vibrates with its natural frequency and due to the presence of external periodic force, the body later vibrates with the frequency of the applied periodic force. Such vibrations are known as forced vibrations.
Example: Soundboards of stringed instruments.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations

Question 14.
What is meant by maintained oscillation? Give an example.
Answer:
To avoid damping in an oscillation, energy is supplied from an external source, the amplitude of the oscillation can be made constant. Such vibrations are known as maintained vibrations.

Example:
The vibration of a tuning fork getting energy from a battery or from an external power supply.

Question 15.
Explain resonance. Give an example.
Answer:
The frequency of external periodic force (or driving force) matches with the natural frequency of the vibrating body (driven). As a result, the oscillating body begins to vibrate such that its amplitude increases at each step and ultimately it has a large amplitude. Such a phenomenon is known as resonance and the corresponding vibrations are known as resonance vibrations. Example: The breaking of glass due to sound

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations

III. Long Answers Questions:

Question 1.
What is meant by simple harmonic oscillation? Give examples and explain why every simple harmonic motion is a periodic motion whereas the converse need not be true.
Answer:
Simple harmonic motion is a special type of oscillatory motion in which the acceleration or force on the particle is directly proportional to its displacement from a fixed point and is always directed towards that fixed point.

Example: Oscillation of a pendulum. SHM is a special type of periodic motion, where restoring force is proportional to the displacement and acts in the direction opposite to displacement.

Question 2.
Describe Simple Harmonic Motion as a projection of uniform circular motion.
Answer:
(i) Let us consider a particle of mass m moving with uniform speed v along the circumference of a circle whose radius is r in an anti-clockwise direction (as shown in Figure).

(ii) It is assumed that the origin of the coordinate System coincides with the center 0 of the circle.

(iii) If co is the angular velocity of the particle and 0 the angular displacement of the particle at any instant of time t, then θ = ωt. By projecting the uniform circular motion on its diameter a simple harmonic motion is obtained.

(iv) This means that we can associate a map (or a relationship) between uniform circular (or revolution) motion to vibratory motion.

(v) Conversely, any vibratory motion or revolution can be mapped to uniform circular motion. The position of a particle moving is projected on to its vertical diameter or on to a line parallel to vertical diameter.

(vi) Similarly, we can do it for horizontal axis or a line parallel to the horizontal axis.

Example: Let us consider a spring-mass system (or oscillation of pendulum) as shown in Figure. When the spring moves up and down (or pendulum moves to and fro), the motion of the mass or bob is mapped to points on the circular motion.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 14
Thus, if a particle undergoes uniform circular motion then the projection of the particle on the diameter of the circle (or on a line parallel to the diameter) traces straight line motion that is simple harmonic in nature. The circle is known as the reference circle of the simple harmonic motion.

Question 3.
What is meant by angular harmonic oscillation? Compute the time period of angular harmonic oscillation.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 15
If a body is allowed to rotate freely about a given axis then the oscillation is known as the angular oscillation. The point at which the resultant torque acting on the body is taken to be zero. It is called mean position. If the body is displaced from the mean position, then the resultant torque acts such that it is proportional to the angular displacement. This torque has a tendency to bring the body towards the mean position.

Time period : Let \(\overline{θ}\) be the angular displacement of the body and the resultant torque \(\vec { τ }\) acting on the body is,
\(\vec { τ }\) ∝ \(\vec {θ}\) … (1)
\(\vec { τ }\) = – k\(\vec {θ}\) … (2)
K is the restoring torsion constant, that is torque per unit angular displacement. If I is the moment of inertia of the body and \(\vec { τ }\) ∝ \(\vec {α}\) is the angular acceleration then
\(\vec { τ }\) = I \(\vec{α}\) = k \(\vec {θ}\)
But \(\vec{α}\) = \(\frac{d^{2} \vec{\theta}}{d t^{2}}\) and therefore
\(\frac{d^{2} \vec{\theta}}{d t^{2}}\) = – \(\frac { k }{ I }\)\(\vec {θ}\) … (3)
This differential equation resembles simple harmonic differential equation.
By comparing equation (3) with simple harmonic motion given we get,
a = \(\frac{d^{2} y}{d t^{2}}\) = – ω²y, we have
ω = \(\sqrt{\frac{k}{I}}\) rads-1 … (4)
The frequency of the angular harmonic motion is given equation ω = 2πf is
f = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2π }\) \(\sqrt{\frac{k}{I}}\)Hz … (5)
The time period is given equation is
T = \(\frac { 1 }{ f }\); T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{I}{k}}\) second
In angular simple harmonic motion, the displacement of the particle is measured in terms of angular displacement \(\vec {θ}\).

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations

Question 4.
Write down the difference between simple harmonic motion angular simple harmonic motion.
Answer:
Comparison of simple harmonic motion and angular simple harmonic motion.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 16

Question 5.
Discuss the simple pendulum in detail.
Answer:
Construction:
A pendulum is a mechanical system which exhibits periodic motion. It has a bob with mass m suspended by a massless and inextensible string. The other end is fixed on a stand as shown in Figure (a). At equilibrium, the pendulum does not oscillate and is suspended vertically downward.

Such a position is known as mean position or equilibrium position. When a pendulum is displaced through a small displacement from its equilibrium position and released, the bob of the pendulum executes to and fro motion.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 17
Calculation of time period: Let l be the length of the pendulum which is taken as the distance between the point of suspension and the centre of gravity of the bob. Two forces act on the bob of the pendulum at any displaced position, as shown in Figure (d),

  • The gravitational force acting on the body (F = mg) acts vertically downwards.
  • The tension in the string T acts along the string to the point of suspension.

Resolving the gravitational force into its components:

  • Normal component: It is along the string but in opposition to the direction of tension, Fas = mg cosθ.
  • Tangential component: It is perpendicular to the string i.e., along the tangential direction of arc of the swing, Fps = mg sinθ.

Hence, the normal component of the force is, along the string,
T – Was = m\(\frac{v^{2}}{l}\)
Here v is speed of bob
T – mg cosθ = m\(\frac{v^{2}}{l}\) … (1)
From the Figure, it is observed that the tangential component Wps of the gravitational force always points towards the equilibrium position. This direction always points opposite to the direction of displacement of the bob from the mean position. Hence, in this case, the tangential force is the restoring force. Applying Newton’s second law along tangential direction, we have
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 18
Where, s is the position of bob that is measured along the arc. Expressing arc length in terms of angular displacement i.e.,
s = lθ … (3)
Then its acceleration,
\(\frac{d^{2} \theta}{d t^{2}}\) = \(\frac{d^{2} \theta}{d t^{2}}\) … (4)
Substituting equation (4) in equation (2), we get,
l\(\frac{d^{2} \theta}{d t^{2}}\) = – g sin θ
\(\frac{d^{2} \theta}{d t^{2}}\) = – \(\frac { g }{ l }\) sin θ … (5)
Because of the presence of sinθ in the above differential equation, it is a nonlinear differential equation. It is assumed that “the small oscillation approximation”, sin θ ≈ θ, the above differential equation becomes linear differential equation.
\(\frac{d^{2} \theta}{d t^{2}}\) = – \(\frac { g }{ l }\) θ
It is known as oscillatory differential equation. Hence, the angular frequency of this oscillator (natural frequency of this system) is
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 19

Question 6.
Explain the horizontal oscillations of a spring.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 20
Let us consider a system containing a block of mass m fastened to a massless spring with stiffness constant or force constant or spring constant k placed on a smooth horizontal surface (frictionless surface) as shown in Figure. Let x0 be the equilibrium position or mean position of mass m when it is left undisturbed.

When the mass is displaced through a small displacement x towards right from its equilibrium position and then released, it will oscillate back and forth about its mean position x0. Let F be the restoring force (due to stretching of the spring) that is proportional to the amount of displacement of block: For one-dimensional motion, we get
F ∝ x
F = – kx
where negative sign implies that the restoring force will always act opposite to the direction of the displacement. This equation is called Hooke’s law. It is noticed that, the restoring force is linear with the displacement (i.e., the exponent of force and displacement are unity). This is not always true. If we apply a very large stretching force, then the amplitude of oscillations becomes very large.
m\(\frac{d^{2} x}{d t^{2}}\) = – kx
\(\frac{d^{2} x}{d t^{2}}\) = – \(\frac { k }{ m }\)x … (1)
Comparing the equation (1) with simple harmonic motion equation a = \(\frac{d^{2} y}{d t^{2}}\) = – ω²y, we get
ω² = \(\frac { k }{ m }\)
which means the angular frequency or natural frequency of the oscillator is
ω = \(\sqrt{\frac{k}{m}}\)rad s-1 … (2)
The frequency of the oscillation is
f = \(\frac { ω }{ 2π }\) = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2π }\)\(\frac { k }{ m }\) Hertz … (3)
and the time period of the oscillation is
T = \(\frac { 1 }{ f }\) = 2π[/latex]\(\frac { m }{ k }\) seconds … (4)

Question 7.
Describe the vertical oscillations of a spring.
Answer:
Consider a massless spring with stiffness constant or force constant k attached to a ceiling as shown in Figure. Let the length of the spring before loading mass m be L. If the block of mass m is attached to the other end of the spring, then the spring elongates by a length l. Let F1 be the restoring force due to the stretching of spring. Due to mass m, the gravitational force acts vertically downward. A free-body diagram is drawn for this system as shown in Figure. When the system is under equilibrium,
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 21
F1 + mg = 0 … (1)
But the spring elongates by small displacement l,
∴ F1 ∝ l ⇒ F1 = – kl … (2)
Substituting equation (2) in equation (1), we get
– kl + mg = 0
mg = kl
(or) \(\frac { m }{ k }\) = \(\frac { 1 }{ g }\) … (3)
Suppose a very small external force is applied on the mass such that the mass further displaces downward by a displacement y, then it will oscillate up and down. Now, the restoring force due to this stretching of spring (total extension of spring is y + l) is
F2 (y + 1)
F2 = – k(y + 1) = – ky – kl … (4)
Since, the mass moves up and down with acceleration , by drawing the free body diagram for this case, we get
-ky – kl + mg = m\(\frac{d^{2} y}{d t^{2}}\) … (5)
The net force acting on the mass due to this stretching is
F = F2 + mg
F = – ky – kl + mg … (6)
The gravitational force opposes the restoring force. Substituting equation (3) in equation (6), we get
F = – ky – kl + kl = ky
Time period:
Applying Newton’s law, we get
m\(\frac{d^{2} y}{d t^{2}}\) = – ky
\(\frac{d^{2} y}{d t^{2}}\) = – \(\frac { k }{ m }\)y … (7)
The above equation is in the form of simple harmonic differential equation. Hence the time period is
T = 2π \(\sqrt{\frac{m}{k}}\)second … (8)
The time period can be rewritten using equation (3) as
T = 2π \(\sqrt{\frac{m}{k}}\) = 2π \(\sqrt{\frac{l}{g}}\)second.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations

Question 8.
Write short notes on the oscillations of the liquid column in U-tube.
Answer:
Let us consider a U-shaped glass tube which consists of two open arms with uniform cross¬sectional area A. Let us pour a non-viscous uniform incompressible liquid of density p in the U-shaped tube to a height h as shown in the Figure. If the liquid and tube are not disturbed then the liquid surface will be in equilibrium position O.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 22
It means the pressure as measured at any point on the liquid is the same and also at the surface on the arm (edge of the tube on either side), that balances the atmospheric pressure. Hence, the level of liquid in each arm will be the same. By blowing air one can provide sufficient force in one arm, and the liquid gets disturbed from equilibrium position O, It is meant, that pressure at blown arm is higher than the other arm.

A difference in pressure is created that will cause the liquid to oscillate for a very short duration of time about the mean or equilibrium position. Finally, it comes to rest.
Time period of the oscillation is
T= 2π \(\sqrt{\frac{l}{2g}}\)second

Question 9.
Discuss in detail the energy in simple harmonic motion.
Answer:
(i) Expression for Potential Energy:For the simple harmonic motion, the force and the displacement are related by Hooke’s law
\(\vec { F }\) = – k\(\vec { r }\)
F = – kx … (1)
the work done by the conservative force field is independent of path.
Calculation potential energy:
F = \(\frac { dU }{ dx }\) … (2)
Comparing (1) and (2), we get
\(\frac { dU }{ dx }\) = – kx
dU = – kx dx
This work done by the force F during a small displacement dx stores as potential energy
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 23
From equation,
ω = \(\sqrt{\frac{k}{m}}\) rad s-1
By substituting the value of force constant k = mω² in equation (3), we get
U(x) = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)mω²x² … (4)
where ω is the natural frequency of the oscillating system. For the particle executing simple harmonic motion from the equation,
y = A sin ωt
we get,
x = A sin ωt
U(t) = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)mω²x² … (5)
This variation of U is shown below.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 24

(ii) Expression for Kinetic Energy:
Kinetic energy
KE = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)mvx² = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)m(\(\frac { dx }{ dt }\))² … (6)
Since the particle executes simple harmonic motion, from equation y = A sin ωt
x = A sin ωt
∴ velocity is
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 25

(iii) Expression for Total Energy: Total energy is the sum of kinetic energy and potential energy.
E = KE + U … (11)
E = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)mω²(A² – x²) + \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)mω²x² … (12)
Hence, cancelling x² term,
E = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)mω²x² = r constant … (13)
Alternatively, from equation (5) and equation (10), we get the total energy as
E = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)mω²x² sin²ωt + \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)mω²A²cos²ωt
= \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)mω²A² (sin²ωt + cos²ωt)
From trigonometry identity,
(sin² ωt + cos² ωt) = 1
E = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)mω²A² = constant
which gives the law of conservation of total energy.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 26

Question 10.
Explain in detail the four different types of oscillations.
Answer:
(i) Free oscillations: When the oscillator oscillates with a frequency that is equal to the natural frequency of the oscillator. Such an oscillation or vibration is known as free oscillation or free vibration.

Example:

  • Oscillation of a simple pendulum,
  • Vibration in a stretched string.

(ii) Damped oscillation: If an oscillator oscillates in a resistive medium, then its amplitude goes on decreasing. The energy of the oscillator is used to do work against the resistive medium. The motion of the oscillator is said to be a damped oscillation.

Example:

  • The oscillations of a pendulum (including air friction) or pendulum oscillating inside an oil filled container.
  • Electromagnetic oscillations in a tank circuit.

(iii) Forced oscillations: In this type of vibration, the body executing vibration initially vibrates with its natural frequency. Because of the presence of external periodic force, the body later vibrates with the frequency of the applied periodic force. Such vibrations are known as forced vibrations.

Example:
Soundboards of stringed instruments.

(iv) Maintained oscillations: The amplitude of the oscillation can be made constant. By supplying energy from an external source. Such oscillations are known as maintained oscillations.

Example:
The vibration of a tuning fork getting energy from a battery or from external power supply.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations

IV. Numerical Problems:

Question 1.
Consider the Earth as a homogeneous sphere of radius R and a straight hole is bored in it through its centre. Show that a particle dropped into the hole will execute a simple harmonic motion such that its time Period is T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{R}}{g}}\)
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 27
(Here, negative has no meaning. It can be neglected)
Comparing equation (1) & (2) we get,
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 28
Time period, T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{R}}{g}}\)
Hence proved.

Question 2.
Calculate the time period of the oscillation of a particle of mass m moving in the potential defined as
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 29
In the problem consider oscillation of particle into 2 cases via x < 0 (consider it as SHM where the time period is considered as t1) and another one as x > 0 (consider it as a motion under gravity, where time period is t2)

Note:
We want to find the total time period, which will be T = t1 + t2.
According to the conservation of energy
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 30
In case: 2 (Motion under gravity)
t2 = \(\frac { 2v }{ g }\) substituting equation (2) here we get,
t2 = \(\frac { 2 }{ g }\)\(\sqrt{\frac{2 E}{m}}\)
⇒ 2\(\sqrt{\frac{2 \mathrm{E}}{m g^{2}}}\) … (4)
Adding equation (3) & (4)
Time period of oscillation,
T = t1 + t2
= π\(\sqrt{\frac{m}{k}}\) + 2\(\sqrt{\frac{2 \mathrm{E}}{m g^{2}}}\)

Question 3.
Consider a simple pendulum of length l = 0.9 m which is properly placed on a trolley rolling down on a inclined plane which is at θ = 45° with the horizontal. Assuming that the inclined plane is frictionless, calculate the time period of oscillation of the simple pendulum.
Answer:
The effective value of acceleration due to gravity (g) will be equal to the component of g normal to the inclined plane which is
g’ = g cos α
T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{l}{g^{\prime}}}\) = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{l}{g \cos \theta}}\)
Length of the pendulum l = 0.9m
Angle of inclination θ = 45°
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 31

Question 4.
A piece of wood of mass m is floating erect in a liquid whose density is ρ. If it is slightly pressed down and released, then executes simple harmonic motion. Show that its time period of oscillation is T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{m}{\mathrm{Ag} \rho}}\)
Answer:
When a wood is pressed and released,
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 32

Question 5.
Consider two simple harmonic motion along x and y-axis having same frequencies but different amplitudes as x = A sin (ωt + φ) (along x axis) and y = B sin ωt (along y axis). Then show that \(\frac{x^{2}}{\mathrm{~A}^{2}}+\frac{y^{2}}{\mathrm{~B}^{2}}-\frac{2 x y}{\mathrm{AB}}\) cosφ = sin²φ and also discuss the special cases when
(i) φ = 0
(ii) φ = π
(iii) φ = \(\frac { π }{ 2 }\)
(iv) φ = \(\frac { π }{ 2 }\) and A = B
(v) φ = \(\frac { π }{ 4 }\)
Note: when a particle is subjected to two simple harmonic motions at right angle to each other the particle may move along different paths. Such paths are called Lissajous figures.
Given:
x = A sin(ωt-φ) … (1)
y = B sin ωt … (2)
In equation (1) use,
sin (A – B) – sin A cos B + cos A sin B
(1) ⇒ x – A sin ωt. cos (φ) + A cos ωt. sinφ
x – A sin cat. cos φ = A cos cot sin φ
squaring on both sides we get,
(x – A sin cot. cos φ)² = A² cos²cot sin²φ … (3)
In equation (3) sin at can be re-written as, \(\frac { y }{ B }\) [from equation (2)]. Also, use
cos²cot = 1 – sin²ωt in equation (3)
∴ (3) becomes
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 34
Hence proved.

Special cases:
(i) φ = 0 in equation (5) we get,
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 35
The above equation resembles equation of a straight line passing through origin with positive slope.

(ii) φ = π in equation (5)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 36
The above equation is an equation of a straight line passing through origin with a negative slope.

(iii) φ = \(\frac { π }{ 2 }\) in equation (5)
The above equation of an ellipse whose centre is origin.

(iv) φ = \(\frac { π }{ B }\) and A = B in equation (5)
\(\frac{x^{2}}{\mathrm{~A}^{2}}+\frac{y^{2}}{\mathrm{~A}^{2}}\) = 1
⇒ x² + y² = A²
The above equation of a circle whose centre is origin.

(v) φ = \(\frac { π }{ 4 }\), cos \(\frac { π }{ 4 }\) = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\) sin\(\frac { π }{ 4 }\) = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\) equation (5) we get,
\(\frac{x^{2}}{\mathrm{~A}^{2}}+\frac{y^{2}}{\mathrm{~A}^{2}}\) – \(\frac{(\sqrt{2}) x y}{A B}\) = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)
The above equation is an equation of tilted ellipse.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations

Question 6.
Show that for a particle executing simple harmonic motion,
(a) the average value of kinetic energy is equal to the average value of potential energy,
(b) average potential energy = average kinetic energy = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) (total energy)
Hint: average kinetic energy = < kinetic energy > = \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{~T}} \int_{0}^{\mathrm{T}}(\text { Potential energy }) d t\) and average potential energy = < potential energy > = \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{~T}} \int_{0}^{\mathrm{T}}(\text { Potential energy }) d t\)
Answer:
(a) Suppose a particle of mass m executes SHM of time period T. The displacement of the particle at any instant t is given by
y = A sin ωr … (1)
Velocity v = \(\frac { dy }{ dt }\) = \(\frac { d }{ dt }\)(sin ωt) = Aω cos ωt = ωA cosωt
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 37
Average potential energy over a period of oscillation is,
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 38

(b) Total energy
T.E = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) ω²y² + \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)mω²(A² – y²)
But y = A sinωt
T.E = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)mω²A² ωt + \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)mω²A² cos²ωt
= \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)mω²A²(sin²ωt + cos²ωt)
From trignometry identity
sin² ωt + cos² ωt = 1
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 39

Question 7.
Compute the time period for the following system if the block of mass m is slightly displaced vertically down from its equilibrium position and then released. Assume that the pulley is light and smooth, strings and springs are light.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 40
Case (a):
When mass is slightly displaced vertically down: Now pulley is fixed rigidly here. When the mass is displaced by y and the spring will also be stretched by y.
Hence F = ky
Time period T = \(\sqrt{\frac{m}{k}}\)

case (b):
When the system is released: WTien mass is displaced by y, pulley is also displaced by 4y,
∴ F = 4 Icy
∴ T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{m}{4k}}\)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Pdf Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Solutions Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

11th Computer Science Guide Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) Text Book Questions and Answers

Part I

Choose the correct answer.

Question 1.
From the options given below, choose the operations managed by the operating system.
a) Memory
b) Processor
c) I/O devices
d) all of the above
Answer:
d) all of the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 2.
Which is the default folder for many Windows Applications to save your file?
a) My Document
b) My Pictures
c) Documents and Settings
d) My Computer
Answer:
a) My Document

Question 3.
Under which of the following OS, the option Shift + Delete – permanently delete a file or folder?
a) Windows 7
b) Windows 8
c) Windows 10
d) None of the OS
Answer:
a) Windows 7

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 4.
What is the meaning of “Hibernate” in Windows XP/Windows 7?
a) Restart the Computer in safe mode
b) Restart the Computer in hibernate mode
c) Shutdown the Computer terminating a!! the running applications
d) Shutdown the Computer without closing the running applications
Answer:
d) Shutdown the Computer without closing the running applications

Question 5.
Which of the following OS is not based on Linux?
a) Ubuntu
b) Redhat
c) CentOs
d) BSD
Answer:
d) BSD

Question 6.
Which of the following in Ubuntu OS is used to view the options for the devices installed?
a) Settings
b) Files
c) Dash
d) VBox_GAs_5.2.2
Answer:
b) Files

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 7.
Identify the default email client in Ubuntu.
a) Thunderbird
b) Firefox
c) Internet Explorer
d) Chrome
Answer:
a) Thunderbird

Question 8.
Which is the default application for spreadsheets in Ubuntu? This is available in the software launcher.
a) LibreOffice Writer
b) LibreOffice Calc
c) LibreOffice Impress
d) LibreOffice Spreadsheet
Answer:
b) LibreOffice Calc

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 9.
Which is the default browser for Ubuntu?
a) Firefox
b) Internet Explorer
c) Chrome
d) Thunderbird
Answer:
a) Firefox

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 10.
Where will you select the option to log out, suspend, restart, or shut down from the desktop of Ubuntu OS?
a) Session Indicator
b) Launcher
c) Files
d) Search
Answer:
a) Session Indicator

Part – II

Short Answers

Question 1.
Differentiate cut and copy options.
Answer:

COPYCUT
Copy text will leave the source as it is and place a copy in the destination.Move text will shift the source to the destination i.e., the text will change its position.
After the copy, the text available in both source and destination locations.After the move, the text available in the destination location alone.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 2.
What is the use of a file extension?
Answer:
File Extension is the second part of the file name. It succeeds the decimal point in the file name. It is used to identify the type of file and it is normally upto 3 to 4 characters long.
Example: exe, html.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 3.
Differentiate Files and Folders.
Answer:

FilesFolders
The files store data of any kind.The folders store files and other sub-folders.
Information stored in the computer only in the form of file.The folders often referred to as directories, are used to organize files on your computer.

Question 4.
Differentiate Save and Save As option.
Answer:

SaveSave As
The save command automatically saves the file using the same name, format and location, as when it was last saved or opened from. Save command opens a dialog box only first time saved.The save as command opens a dialog box every time in which the user can change the name of the file, the format, as well as the location of where the file is saved if needed.

Question 5.
What is open source?
Answer:
Open source refers to a program or software in which the source code is available in the web to all public, without any cost.

Question 6.
What are the advantages of open source?
Answer:
The reasons individuals or organizations choose open source software are:

  1. lower cost
  2. security
  3. no vendor ‘lock-in’
  4. better quality

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 7.
Mention the different server distributions in Linux OS.
Answer:
The server distribution in Linux OS:

  1. Ubuntu Linux
  2. Linux Mint
  3. Arch Linux
  4. Deepin
  5. Fedora
  6. Debian
  7. Centos

Question 8.
How will you log off from Ubuntu OS?
Answer:
When you have finished working on your computer, you can choose to Log Out through the Session Indicator on the far right side of the top panel.

Part – III

Explain in brief

Question 1.
Analyse: Why the drives are segregated?
Answer:

  1. It saves space and increases system performance.
  2. Sharing and protection.
  3. Segment and segregate the data to defend it from cyber-attacks.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 2.
If you are working on multiple files at a time, sometimes the system may hang. What is the reason behind it. How can you reduce it?
Answer:
Too Many Applications Running :
Each application open on the system takes some internal and hardware resources to keep it running. If multiple apps and programs are running, your PC may run low on resources as memory is used by a number of applications.

Device Driver Issues:
Outdated or damaged drivers can also be the reason behind frequent computer freezes. If video drivers being installed on your system are not updated, the computer might hang up while you attempt to play a video or game on the system.

Operating System Issues:
To ensure the smooth functioning of the machine, make sure that all updates are installed. To be able to keep the system updated, it is vital that you use a legal copy of the operating system.

Excess Heating Up:
If the temperature of your system processor is higher than usual, the chances are that the computer may freeze.

Hardware Misconfigyratioo:
One major reason behind the computer freeze issue is hardware misconfiguration, This may have occurred due to misconfigured hardware component that you recently added to the computer. Alternatively, the hardware component you added recently may be incompatible with the computer.

Question 3.
Are drives such as hard drive and floppy drives represented with drive letters? If so why, if not why?
Answer:
Yes, hard drives and floppy drives are represented with drive letters.
A: drive is used for floppy disk of 3.5 inches and storage capacity of 1.44 MB.
B: drive is for floppy of size 5.25 inches and of storage capacity of 1.2 MB
So, we can say like
A: First Floppy Drive
B: Second Floppy Drive
C: D : E: …………….. Z: Hard Disk Drives, CD/DVD

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 4.
Write the specific use of Cortana.
Answer:
Cortana is your personal digital assistant on Windows 10 to help you find virtually anything on your device, track your packages and flights, inform you about weather and traffic information, manage your calendar and create reminders, and it can even tell you jokes.

Question 5.
List out the major differences between Windows and Ubuntu OS.
Answer:

WindowsUbuntu
Windows NT’ is the kernel used in WindowsLinux is the kernel used in Ubuntu
Needs to pay for WindowsIt is completely free and available as open-source
It support executable files (.exe), Virus threatening existsIt does not support executable files (.exe) so, mostly it is virus-free OS
Desktop OS does not support serverDesktop OS can also work as a server
It does not support multiple desktop environmentsIt supports multiple desktop environments
Installation is very simpleInstallation is quite complex process
Separately install MS Office in WindowsOS comes with many useful software like Office
It does not have own software managerIt has its own software manager
Software installation does that by simple installation package and instructions.It normally installs the software and tools by terminal
User friendlyIt is not user friendly

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 6.
Are there any difficulties you face while using Ubuntu? If so, mention it with reasons.
Answer:

  1. Ubuntu has less hardware support for commercial/industrial/medical/ logistical therefore it’s less voted for use in big-time backends.
  2. Ubuntu doesn’t support middlewares such as C panel, cloud Linux and a plethora of other infrastructure or monitoring tools.
  3. Hard to install graphic drivers especially for old hardware. It is not possible to play modern games, because of poor graphics quality.
  4. The user switching from windows will not like the user experience on Ubuntu and will have difficulty in operating the OS.
  5. Ubuntu is not capable of playing MP3 files by default.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 7.
Differentiate Thunderbird and Firefox in Ubuntu OS.
Answer:

  • Firefox is a browser is access the internet.
  • Thunderbird is an email client. We can install it on our computer and view our emails.
  • Both Firefox and Thunderbird are Mozilla products.

Question 8.
Differentiate Save, Save As, and Save a Copy in Ubuntu OS.
Answer:
Save: This will save the document without asking for a new name or location. It will overwrite the original.

Save As: This will prompt you to save the document using a dialog box. You will have the ability to change the file name and/or location.

Save A Copy: This will prompt you to save a ‘copy’ using the same dialog box as ‘save as’. You will have the ability to change the file name and/or location. If you choose the same file name and location it will overwrite the original.

If you changed the name or location of the document you will be working on the original document, not the copy. This means that if you make additional changes and then hit save the original will be overwritten with the new changes, but the copy you saved earlier will be left at the state of the Save A Copy.

Part IV

Explain in detail

Question 1.
Explain the versions of the Windows Operating System.
Answer:
Versions of Windows Operating System
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 1
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 2
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 3
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 4
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 5
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 6

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 2.
Draw and compare the scan equivalence in Windows and Ubuntu.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 7
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 8

Question 3.
Complete the following matrix.

Navigational methodLocated onIdeally suited for
Start buttonTaskbar
DesktopExploring your disk drives and using system tools
Windows

Explorer

Seeing hierarchy of ail computer contents and resources in one window.
Quick Launch

Answer:

Navigational methodLocated onIdeally suited for
Start buttonTaskbarTo open the applications
My ComputerDesktopExploring your disk drives and using system tools
Windows ExplorerStart ButtonSeeing hierarchy of all computer contents and resources in one window.
Quick LaunchTaskbarTo quickly launch programs that we place in it

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 4.
Observe the figure and mark all the window elements. Identify the version of the Windows OS.
Answer:
The element of a windows
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 9 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 10
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 11

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 5.
Write the procedure to create, rename, delete and save a file in Ubuntu OS. Compare it with Windows OS.
Answer:
The procedure to create, rename, delete and save a file in Ubuntu OS

Creating Files:

  • We can create the files with the same procedure by clicking the Files icon,
  • The following Figure shows the method of creating a File by right-clicking on the Desktop,

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 12

A new File can also be created by using File menu.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 13

Deleting a File: A file created by us can be moved to trash by using right-click or by using the menu.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 14

Deleting a File: Deleting a File by using the Edit menu.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 15

Rename a file:

  • Select the file.
  • Right dick on the selected file and select Rename.
  • Type the new filename and then, press Enter

The procedure to create, rename, delete and save a file in Windows OS

To create a file:

  • Open the application using the Start button or through Icon or using the Run command.
  • Enter the content.
  • Save the file using Ctrl + S.

Renaming Files:
Using the FILE Menu

  • Select the File you wish to Rename.
  • Click File → Rename.
  • Type in the new name.
  • To finalize the renaming operation, press Enter.

To delete a file:
Select the file or folder you wish to delete.

  • Right-click the file or folder, select the Delete option from the pop-up menu, or Click
    File → Delete or press the Delete key from the keyboard.
  • The file will be deleted and moved to the Recycle bin.

To save a file:
Select the Save option from File Menu OR press Ctrl + S and then enter the file name and press OK.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

11th Computer Science Guide Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) Additional Questions and Answers

Part I & Part II

Part – I

Choose the correct answer:

Question 1.
………………. is an Open source Operating System for desktop and server.
(a) Windows series
(b) Android
(c) iOS
(d) Linux
Answer:
(d) Linux

Question 2.
__________enables the hardware to communicate and operate with other software.
a) Loader
b) Compiler
c) Interpreter
d) Operating System
Answer:
d) Operating System

Question 3.
If you want to select multiple files or folders, use ……………….
(a) Ctrl + shift
(b) Ctrl + click
(c) shift + click
(d) Ctrl + shift + click
Answer:
(b) Ctrl + click

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 4.
__________controls the overall execution of the computer.
a) Loader
b) Compiler
c) Interpreter
d) Operating System
Answer:
d) Operating System

Question 5.
………………. is one of the popular Open Source versions of the UNIX Operating System.
(a) Windows 7
(b) Windows 8
(c) Linux
(d) Android
Answer:
(c) Linux

Question 6.
The most popular Operating System for desktop and laptop computers.
a) Windows Series
b) Android
c) iOS
d) Linux
Answer:
a) Windows Series

Question 7.
………………. icon is the equivalent of Recycle bin of windows OS. All the deleted Files and Folders are moved here.
(a) Trash
(b) Files
(c) Online shopping
(d) Libre Office Impress
Answer:
(a) Trash

Question 8.
The most popular Operating System for Apple phones, iPad, and iPods.
a) Windows Series
b) Android
c) iOS
d) Linux
Answer:
c) iOS

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 9.
………………. manages network connections, allowing you to connect to a wired or wireless network.
(a) Toolbar
(b) Title bar
(c) Session indicator
(d) Network indicator
Answer:
(d) Network indicator

Question 10.
Multiple applications can execute simultaneously in Windows, and this is known as __________
a) Multitasking
b) Multiuser
c) Parallel processing
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Multitasking

Question 11.
Clock is available in ……………….
(a) system tray
(b) Files
(c) start
(d) My documents
Answer:
(a) system tray

Question 12.
Windows Operating System uses __________as input device.
a) Keyboard
b) Mouse
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 13.
The menu bar is present below the ……………….
(a) Taskbar
(b) Scroll bar
(c) Title bar
(d) Function bar
Answer:
(c) Title bar

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 14.
__________ is used to enter alphabets, numerals and special characters.
a) Keyboard
b) Mouse
c) Scanner
d) Optical Character Reader
Answer:
a) Keyboard

Question 15.
………………. has the task for frequently used applications?
(a) Quick Launch Tool bar
(b) Settings
(c) My pc
(d) This pc
Answer:
(a) Quick Launch Toolbar

Question 16.
__________program is an application program.
a) Word processing
b) Games and Spreadsheets
c) Calculator
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 17.
SSD stands for ……………….
(a) Solid State Devices
(b) Simple Stage Driver
(c) Single State Drivers
(d) Synchronized State Devices
Answer:
(a) Solid State Devices

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 18.
__________is a file management activity.
a) Creating and Modifying file
b) Saving a file
c) Deleting a file
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 19.
What is the name given to the document window to enter or type the text?
(a) Workspace
(b) Work Area
(c) Typing Area
(d) Space
Answer:
(a) Workspace

Question 20.
Windows 1.x introduced in the year __________
a) 1992
b) 1987
c) 1985
d) 1982
Answer:
c) 1985

Question 21.
The disk drives mounted in the system can be seen by clicking ……………….
(a) Disk drive Icon
(b) Drive Icon
(c) Device Driver Icon
(d) My Computer Icon
Answer:
(d) My Computer Icon

Question 22.
Windows 3.x introduced in the year __________
a) 1992
b) 1987
c) 1985
d) 1982
Answer:
a) 1992

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 23.
Windows 10 was developed in the year ……………….
(a) 2009
(b) 2012
(c) 2015
(d) 2018
Answer:
(c) 2015

Question 24.
Windows 98 introduced in the year __________
a) 1992
b) 1988
c) 1998
d) 1995
Answer:
c) 1998

Question 25.
The Rulers are used to set ……………….
(a) Orientations
(b) Header
(c) Footer
(d) Margins
Answer:
(d) Margins

Question 26.
Windows-XP introduced in the year __________
a) 2002
b) 2000
c) 1990
d) 2001
Answer:
d) 2001

Question 27.
Which functional key is used to bring the focus on, the first menu of the menu bar?
(a) F5
(b) F10
(c) F11
(d) F7
Answer:
(b) F10

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 28.
Windows-7 introduced in the year __________
a) 2002
b) 2007
c) 2009
d) 2010
Answer:
c) 2009

Question 29.
Which one of the following is used to open the search results dialog box?
(a) search
(b) See more results
(c) search more results
(d) searching web
Answer:
(b) See more results

Question 30.
Windows-10 introduced in the year __________
a) 2012
b) 2015
c) 2009
d) 2010
Answer:
b) 2015

Question 31.
The keyboard shortcut to save a file is ……………….
(a) alt + s
(b) Ctrl + s
(c) Ctrl + alt + s
(d) winkey + s
Answer:
(b) Ctrl + s

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 32.
In which version Start button window introduced.
a) Windows-XP
c) Windows 2.x
b) Windows 3.x
d) Windows 95
Answer:
d) Windows 95

Question 33.
Applications or files or folders are opened using related shortcut icons by ……………….
(a) Click and drag
(b) double click
(c) click
(d) drag and drop
Answer:
(b) double click

Question 34.
In which Windows version plug and play was introduced.
a) Windows-XP
b) Windows 98
c) Windows-Vista
d) Windows 95
Answer:
b) Windows 98

Question 35.
Which option is used to save the file?
(a) Ctrl + s
(b) Save
(c) File + save
(d) All the above
Answer:
(d) All the above

Question 36.
Which Windows version was designed to act as servers in the network.
a) Windows-XP
b) Windows 98
c) Windows-Vista
d) Windows-NT
Answer:
d) Windows-NT

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 37.
ubuntu supports an office suite called ……………….
(a) Open Office
(b) Star Office
(c) Libre Office
(d) MS – Office
Answer:
(c) Libre Office

Question 38.
__________versions of Windows 2000 were released.
a) 6
b) 5
c) 4
d) 3
Answer:
c) 4

Question 39.
Which one of the following is a server distribution of Linux?
(a) Deepin
(b) Firefox
(c) MS.word
(d) Files
Answer:
(a) Deepin

Question 40.
Which version of Windows 2000 released for both a Web server and an office server.
a) Professional
b) Data Centre Server
c) Advanced Server
d) Server
Answer:
d) Server

Question 41.
Which option is used to delete all files in the Recycle bin?
(a) Remove the Recycle bin
(b) Empty the Recycle bin
(c) Clear the Recycle bin
(d) Clean the Recycle bin
Answer:
(b) Empty the Recycle bin

Question 42.
Which version of Windows 2000 released for high-traffic computer networks.
a) Professional
b) Data Centre Server
c) Advanced Server
d) Server
Answer:
b) Data Centre Server

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 43.
Which version of Windows introduced as a stable version.
a) Windows-XP
b) Windows Me
c) Windows-Vista
d) Windows-NT
Answer:
a) Windows-XP

Question 44.
In which version of Windows booting time was improved.
a) Windows-7
b) Windows Me
c) Windows-Vista
d) Windows-NT
Answer:
a) Windows-7

Question 45.
__________feature is introduced in Windows-7.
a) Aero peek
b) Pinning programms to the taskbar
c) Handwriting recognition
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 46.
What is used to interact with windows by clicking icons?
(a) Mouse
(b) Keyboard
(c) Monitor
(d) Printer
Answer:
(a) Mouse

Question 47.
Which version of Windows served as a common platform for mobile and computer.
a) Windows-7
b) Windows – 8
c) Windows-Vista
d) Windows-NT
Answer:
b) Windows – 8

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 48.
Windows-8 takes better advantage of_________
a) multi-core processing
b) solid-state drives
c) touch screens
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 49.
The start button was added again in the version of Windows.
a) Windows-7
b) Windows-8
c) Windows-Vista
d) Windows-10
Answer:
d) Windows-10

Question 50.
Hardware settings are used in which option?
(a) Monitor
(b) Display
(c) Theme
(d) My Computer
Answer:
(b) Display

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 51.
Cortana voice activated personal assistance introduced in _________version of Windows.
a) Windows-7
b) Windows-8
c) Windows-Vista
d) Windows-10
Answer:
d) Windows-10

Question 52.
The opening screen of Windows is called
a) taskbar
b) system tray
c) desktop
d) none of the above
Answer:
c) desktop

Question 53.
The notification area of ubuntu-desktop is otherwise called……………….
(a) Task bar
(b) Desktop
(c) status bar
(d) Indicator area
Answer:
(d) Indicator area

Question 54.
_________is a graphic symbol representing the window elements like files, folders, shortcuts etc.
a) Taskbar
b) Icon
c) Shortcut key
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Icon

Question 55.
_________play a vital role in GUI based applications.
a) Taskbar
b) Icon
c) Shortcut key
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Icon

Question 56.
The icons which are available on the desktop by default while installing Windows OS are called __________icons.
a) quick launch
b) standard
c) default
d) desktop
Answer:
b) standard

Question 57.
Which menu has the rename option?
(a) File
(b) Edit
(c) View
(d) Window
Answer:
(a) File

Question 58.
_________icons can be created for any application or file or folder.
a) Standard
b) Default
c) Shortcut
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Shortcut

Question 59.
By double-clicking the _________icon, the related application or file or folder will open.
a) Standard
b) Default
c) Shortcut
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Shortcut

Question 60.
The disk drive icons graphically represent _________disk drive options.
a) six
b) five
c) three
d) four
Answer:
b) five

Question 61.
Which option reboot the computer?
(a) Restart
(b) Boot
(c) Reboot
(d) Reselect
Answer:
(a) Restart

Question 62.
The disk drive icons available for __________
a) Removable storage
b) Network drive
c) Pen drive
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 63.
__________is a typical rectangular area in an application or a document.
a) Cell pointer
b) Window
c) Table cell
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Window

Question 64.
_________ is an area on the screen that displays information for a specific program.
a) Cell pointer
b) Window
c) Table cell
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Window

Question 65.
Who developed Ubuntu OS?
(a) Mark Shuttleworth
(b) Ricki Mascitti
(c) Dan Bricklin
(d) Bob Frankston
Answer:
(a) Mark Shuttleworth

Question 66.
Application window can be __________
a) resized
b) maximized or minimized
c) placed side by side or overlap
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 67.
When two or more windows are open, only one of them is active and the rest are__________
a) inactive
b) hidden
c) minimized
d) maximized
Answer:
a) inactive

Question 68.
A __________is a section of the screen used to display the contents of a document.
a) System Window
b) Application Box
c) Application Window
d) Document Window
Answer:
d) Document Window

Question 69.
How many sets of scroll bars are there?
(a) 2
(b) 3
(c) 4
(d) 5
Answer:
(a) 2

Question 70.
__________ window is used for typing, editing, drawing, and formatting the text and graphics.
a) System Window
b) Application Box
c) Application Window
d) Document Window
Answer:
d) Document Window

Question 71.
__________window helps the user to communicate with the Application program.
a) System Window
b) Application Box
c) Application Window
d) Document Window
Answer:
c) Application Window

Question 72.
The title bar of a window will contain __________button.
a) minimize
b) maximize
c) close
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 73.
What is the name given to the larger window?
(a) Work window
(b) Document window
(c) Application window
(d) Desktop
Answer:
(c) Application window

Question 74.
__________in the menu bar can be accessed by pressing the Alt key and the letter that appears underlined in the menu title.
a) Menu
b) Title
c) Tool
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Menu

Question 75.
In Windows 7, in the absence of the menu bar, click __________and from the drop-down menu, click the Layout option and select the desired item from that list.
a) System Properties
b) Install
c) Uninstall
d) Organize
Answer:
d) Organize

Question 76.
The __________is the area in the document window to enter or type the text of your document.
a) application space
b) text space
c) content space
d) workspace
Answer:
d) workspace

Question 77.
The scroll bars are used to scroll the workspace __________
a) horizontally
b) vertically
c) either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) either A or B

Question 78.
Which option is used as a part of installing new software or windows update?
(a) Lock
(b) Restart
(c) Sleep
(d) Hibernate
Answer:
(b) Restart

Question 79.
Using the __________menu, we can start any application.
a) Start
b) File
c) Format
d) Tools
Answer:
a) Start

Question 80.
At the bottom of the screen is a horizontal bar called the __________
a) scrollbar
b) taskbar
c) quick launch toolbar
d) system tray
Answer:
b) taskbar

Question 81.
Task bar contains __________
a) Start button
b) shortcuts to various programs
c) minimized programs
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 82.
In the taskbar, the extreme right corner we can see the __________.
a) Start button
b) shortcuts to various programs
c) minimized programs
d) system tray
Answer:
d) system tray

Question 83.
System trays contains __________
a) volume control
b) network
c) date and time
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 84.
In the taskbar, __________contains task for frequently used applications.
a) scroll bar
b) start button
c) quick launch toolbar
d) system tray
Answer:
c) quick launch toolbar

Question 85.
By clicking the __________icon, the user can see the disk drivers mounted in the system in windows-XP and Windows Vista.
a) This PC
b) My Document
c) Computer
d) My Computer
Answer:
c) Computer

Question 86.
By clicking the __________icon, the user can see the disk drivers mounted in the system in Windows-8.
a) This PC
b) My Document
c) Computer
d) My Computer
Answer:
d) My Computer

Question 87.
The functionality of computer icon _________in all versions of Windows.
a) differs
b) remains the same
c) slightly change
d) None of these
Answer:
b) remains the same

Question 88.
By clicking the _________ icon, the user can see the disk drivers mounted in the system in Windows-7.
a) This PC
b) My Document
c) Computer
d) My Computer
Answer:
c) Computer

Question 89.
We can also open an application by clicking __________on the Start menu, and the name of the application.
a) Run
b) All Programs
c) Accessories
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Run

Question 90.
To quit an application, click the __________ button in the upper right corner of the application window.
a) Minimize
b) Maximize
c) Resize
d) Close
Answer:
d) Close

Question 91.
We can also quit an application by clicking on the option in Windows 7.
a) File → Exit
b) File → Close
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 92.
In Windows-7, we can organize your documents and programs in the form of_________
a) files
b) folder
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 93.
We can_________ the files and folders.
a) move and copy
b) rename and delete
c) search
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 94.
To better organise our files, we can store them in __________
a) shortcut
b) folder
c) recycle bin
d) None of these
Answer:
b) folder

Question 95.
There are __________ways in to create a new folder.
a) 5
b) 4
c) 3
d) 2
Answer:
d) 2

Question 96.
__________is a command to create a new folder.
a) File → New → Directory
b) File → New → Folder
c) File → Open → Folder
d) File → New → New Folder
Answer:
b) File → New → Folder

Question 97.
The default name of the new folder is__________
a) New folder
b) Untitled
c) Noname
d) None of these
Answer:
a) New folder

Question 98.
To create a folder in the desktop __________command is used.
a) left-click →  New → Folder
b) right-click → New → Directory
c) double click → New → Folder
d) right-click → New → Folder
Answer:
d) right-click → New → Folder

Question 99.
_________ is an in-built word processor application in Windows OS.
a) Word
b) Wordstar
c) Wordpad
d) Notepad
Answer:
c) Wordpad

Question 100.
In Windows OS to create and manipulate text documents __________is used by default.
a) Word
b) Wordstar
c) Wordpad
d) Notepad
Answer:
c) Wordpad

Question 101.
__________is used to open Wordpad.
a) Click Start → All Programs → Accessories → Wordpad.
b) Run → type Wordpad, click OK
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 102.
In Wordpad, save the file using __________
a) File → Save
b) Ctrl + S
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 103.
In the Save As dialog box, select the location where you want to save the file by using the _______drop down list box.
a) filename
b) look in
c) file type
d) None of these
Answer:
b) look in

Question 104.
We can use the _______ box on the Start menu to quickly search a particular folder or file in the computer or in a specific drive.
a) Find
b) Search
c) Look in
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Search

Question 105.
The most common way of opening a file or a Folder is to _______on it.
a) right-click
b) double click
c) click and drag
d) move the mouse
Answer:
b) double click

Question 106.
How many methods are there to rename a file?
a) 4
b) 3
c) 2
d) only one
Answer:
b) 3

Question 107.
_______is the command for cut operation.
a) Edit → Cut
b) File → Cut
c) Format → Cut
d) Window → Cut
Answer:
a) Edit → Cut

Question 108.
_______is the shortcut for cut operation.
a) Ctrl + C
b) Ctrl + X
c) Ctrl + P
d) Ctrl + V
Answer:
b) Ctrl + X

Question 109.
_______is the command for copy operation.
a) Edit → Copy
b) File → Copy
c) Format → Copy
d) Window → Copy
Answer:
a) Edit → Copy

Question 110.
_______is the shortcut for copy operation.
a) Ctrl + C
b) Ctrl + X
c) Ctrl + P
d) Ctrl + V
Answer:
a) Ctrl + C

Question 111.
_______is the command for paste operation.
a) Edit → Paste
b) File → Paste
c) Format → Paste
d) Window → Paste
Answer:
a) Edit → Paste

Question 112.
_______is the shortcut for paste operation.
a) Ctrl + C
b) Ctrl + X
c) Ctrl + P
d) Ctrl + V
Answer:
d) Ctrl + V

Question 113.
_______is used for copy operation.
a) Click Edit Copy
b) Press Ctrl + C
c) Right click → Copy from the pop-up menu
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 114.
_______is used for cut operation.
a) Click Edit → Cut
b) Press Ctrl + X
c) Right click Cut from the pop-up menu
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 115.
_______is used for paste operation.
a) Click Edit → Paste
b) Press Ctrl + V
c) Right click → Paste from the pop-up menu
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 116.
There are _______methods of transferring files to or from a removable disk.
a) 2
b) 3
c) only one
d) None of these
Answer:
a) 2

Question 117.
_______is a method of transferring files to or from a removable disk.
a) Copy and Paste
b) Send To
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 118.
If you want to select multiple files or folders, use _______
a) Ctrl + Click
b) Shift + Click
c) Alt + Click
d) All the above
Answer:
a) Ctrl + Click

Question 119.
If you want to select consecutive files or folders, click on the first file and then use_______at the last file.
a) Ctrl + Click
b) Shift + Click
c) Alt + Click
d) All the above
Answer:
b) Shift + Click

Question 120.
When we delete a file or folder, it will move into the _______
a) My Document
b) My Computer
c) Recycle Bin
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Recycle Bin

Question 121.
To permanently delete a file or folder (i.e. to avoid sending a file or folder to the Recycle Bin), hold down the _______key, and press deletes on the keyboard.
a) ALT
b) SHIFT
c) CTRL
d) None of these
Answer:
b) SHIFT

Question 122.
_______is a special folder to keep the files or folders deleted by the user.
a) My Document
b) My Computer
c) Recycle Bin
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Recycle Bin

Question 123.
The user cannot access the files or folders available in the Recycle bin without _______it.
a) deleting
b) copy
c) restoring
d) None of these
Answer:
c) restoring

Question 124.
To delete all files in the Recycle bin, select _______option.
a) Empty the Recycle Bin
b) Clear the Recycle bin
c) Trash
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Empty the Recycle Bin

Question 125.
_______option is used to switch to another user account on the computer without closing our open programs and Windows processes.
a) log-off
b) switch user
c) sleep
d) restart
Answer:
b) switch user

Question 126.
_________ option is used to switch to another user account on the computer after closing all your open programs and Windows processes.
a) log-off
b) switch user
c) sleep
d) restart
Answer:
a) log-off

Question 127.
_______ option is used to reboot the computer.
a) log-off
b) switch user
c) sleep
d) restart
Answer:
d) restart

Question 128.
_______option is often required as part of installing new software or Windows update.
a) log-off
b) switch user
c) sleep
d) restart
Answer:
d) restart

Question 129.
_______option puts the computer into a low-power mode that retains all running programs and open Windows in computer memory for a super-quick restart.
a) log-off
b) switch user
c) sleep
d) restart
Answer:
c) sleep

Question 130.
_______option found only on laptop computers.
a) hibernate
b) shutdown
c) sleep
d) restart
Answer:
a) hibernate

Part II

Choose the correct answer:

Question 1.
_______refers to a program or software in which the source code is available on the web to the general public free of cost.
a) malware
b) free source
c) open-source
d) None of these
Answer:
c) open-source

Question 2.
_______is typically created as a collaborative effort in which programmers continuously improve upon the source code on the web and share the changes within the community.
a) malware
b) free source code
c) open-source code
d) None of these
Answer:
c) open-source code

Question 3.
_______is one of the popular Open Source versions of the UNIX Operating System.
a) Linux
b) MSDOS
c) Oracle
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Linux

Question 4.
_______is open source as its source code is freely available.
a) Linux
b) MSDOS
c) Oracle
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Linux

Question 5.
The most popular Linux server distributor is_______
a) Ubuntu Linux
b) Linux Mint
c) Arch Linux
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 6.
The most popular Linux server distributor is_______
a) Deepin and Fedora
b) Debian
c) CentOS
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 7.
_______ is a Linux-based operating system.
a) Ubuntu
b) MSDOS
c) Oracle
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Ubuntu

Question 8.
_______ is designed for computers, smartphones, and network servers.
a) Ubuntu
b) MSDOS
c) Oracle
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Ubuntu

Question 9.
The Ubuntu system is developed by a UK based company called ._______
a) Microsoft
b) Borland International
c) Cambridge
d) Canonical Ltd
Answer:
d) Canonical Ltd

Question 10.
Ubuntu was conceived in the year _______
a) 1994
b) 2004
c) 2014
d) 2012
Answer:
b) 2004

Question 11.
Ubuntu was conceived by_______
a) Mark Shuttleworth
b) Mark Zuckerberg
c) Mark Shuttleberg
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Mark Shuttleworth

Question 12.
The desktop version of Ubuntu supports _______ software.
a) Firefox
b) Chrome
c) VLC
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 13.
Ubundu supports the office suite called_______
a) MS-Office
b) Star Office
c) Libre Office
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Libre Office

Question 14.
Ubuntu has in-built email software called_______
a) Firefox
b) Thunderfox
c) Firebird
d) Thunderbird
Answer:
d) Thunderbird

Question 15.
_______ gives the user access to email such as Exchange, Gmail, Hotmail, etc.
a) Firefox
b) Thunderfox
c) Firebird
d) Thunderbird
Answer:
d) Thunderbird

Question 16.
The best feature of Ubundu is _______
a) It is a free operating system
b) It is backed by a huge open source community
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 17.
_______ is based on the concept of a Graphical User Interface.
a) Ubundu
b) Microsoft Windows
c) Apple
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 18.
_______ is the icons in the Ubuntu OS.
a) Search your Computer
b) Files
c) Firefox Web browser
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 19.
_______ is a word processor software of Ubundu.
a) LibreOffice Writer
b) LibreOfficeCalc
c) LibreOffice Impress
d) None of these
Answer:
a) LibreOffice Writer

Question 20.
_______ is a spreadsheet software of Ubundu.
a) LibreOffice Writer
b) LibreOfficeCalc
c) LibreOffice Impress
d) None of these
Answer:
b) LibreOfficeCalc

Question 21.
_______ is a Presentation software of Ubundu.
a) LibreOffice Writer
b) LibreOfficeCalc
c) LibreOffice Impress
d) None of these
Answer:
c) LibreOffice Impress

Question 22.
_______ is the online shopping icon of Ubundu.
a) Amazon
b) Firefox
c) Bigshop
d) Wallmart
Answer:
a) Amazon

Question 23.
_______ is a Recycle Bin Icon of Ubundu.
a) Amazon
b) Firefox
c) Files
d) Trash
Answer:
d) Trash

Question 24.
In Unundu, the frequently used icons in the menu bar are found on the _______
a) left
b) middle
c) right
d) Either A or B or C
Answer:
c) right

Question 25.
The most common indicators in the Menu bar are located in the _______ .
a) Indicator
b) Notification area
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 26.
_______ manages network connections, allowing you to connect to a wired or wireless network.
a) Indicator
b) Notification area
c) Either A or B
d) Network Indicator
Answer:
d) Network Indicator

Question 27.
_______ shows the current keyboard layout.
a) Indicator
b) Notification area
c) Text Entry Settings
d) Network Indicator
Answer:
c) Text Entry Settings

Question 28.
The keyboard indicator menu contains the_______ menu items.
a) Character Map
b) Keyboard Layout Chart
c) Text Entry Settings
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 29.
_______ indicator incorporates your social applications.
a) Messaging
b) Sound
c) Session
d) Network
Answer:
a) Messaging

Question 30.
From Messaging indicator, we can access _______
a) instant messenger
b) email clients
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 31.
_______ indicator provides an easy way to adjust the volume as well as access your music player.
a) Messaging
b) Sound
c) Session
d) Network
Answer:
b) Sound

Question 32.
_______ indicator is a link to the system settings, Ubuntu Help, and session options
a) Messaging
b) Sound
c) Session
d) Network
Answer:
c) Session

Question 33.
_______ displays the current time and provides a link to your calendar and time and date settings.
a) Indicator
b) Clock
c) System Tray
d) Notification Area
Answer:
b) Clock

Question 34.
_______ is a session option.
a) locking your computer and user/guest session
b) logging out of a session
c) restarting the computer or shutting down completely
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 35.
The _______ shows the name of the currently selected directory.
a) Title bar
b) System Tray
c) Notification Area
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Title bar

Question 36.
The toolbar displays _______
a) your directory browsing history
b) your location in the file system
c) a search button and options for your current directory view
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 37.
The default Ubuntu 16.04 theme known as_______
a) Ambiance
b) Aspirant
c) Environment
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Ambiance

Question 38.
The Launcher is equivalent to _______
a) System Tray
b) Taskbar
c) Desktop
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Taskbar

Question 39.
The vertical bar of icons on the left side of the desktop is called _______
a) System Tray
b) Taskbar
c) Launcher
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Launcher

Question 40.
The Launcher provides easy access to _______
a) applications
b) mounted devices
c) Trash
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 41.
All current applications on your system will place an icon in the _______
a) System Tray
b) Taskbar
c) Launcher
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Launcher

Question 42.
_______ icon is equal to the search button in Windows OS.
a) Search Your Computer
b) Find
c) Quick Search
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Search Your Computer

Question 43.
_______ icon is equivalent to My Computer icon.
a) Your Computer
b) Files
c) Quick Search
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Files

Question 44.
We can directly go to Desktop, Documents using_______ icon.
a) Your Computer
b) Files
c) Quick Search
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Files

Question 45.
By clicking the _______ icon, we can directly browse the internet.
a) Amazon
b) Firefox Web Browser
c) Bishop
d) Walmart
Answer:
b) Firefox Web Browser

Question 46.
_______ is equivalent to clicking the Web Browser in Taskbar in Windows.
a) Amazon
b) Firefox Web Browser
c) Bigshop
d) Walmart
Answer:
b) Firefox Web Browser

Question 47.
_______ icon will directly take you to document preparation applications like MS Word in Windows.
a) LibreOffice Writer
b) LibreOfficeCalc
c) LibreOffice Impress
d) None of these
Answer:
a) LibreOffice Writer

Question 48.
_______ icon will open LibreOffice Calc application.
a) LibreOffice Writer
b) Libre Office Caic
c) LibreOffice Impress
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Libre Office Caic

Question 49.
_______ is similar to MS Excel in Windows.
a) LibreOffice Writer
b) Libre Office Caic
c) LibreOffice Impress
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Libre Office Caic

Question 50.
_______ icon is used to prepare any presentations in Ubuntu like MS PowerPoint.
a) LibreOffice Writer
b) LibreOfficeCaic
c) LibreOffice Impress
d) None of these
Answer:
c) LibreOffice Impress

Question 51.
_______ icon will let you add any additional applications you want.
a) LibreOffice Writer
b) LibreOfficeCalc
c) LibreOffice Impress
d) Ubundu Software
Answer:
d) Ubundu Software

Question 52.
Using _______ icon users can buy and sell any products online.
a) Amazon
b) Firefox Web Browser
c) Online Shopping
d) Wallnnart
Answer:
c) Online Shopping

Question 53.
_______ icon is similar to the Control panel in the Windows Operating System.
a) System Settings
b) Your Computer
c) Launcher
d) None of these
Answer:
a) System Settings

Question 54.
Match the following:
table
a) Trash 1. Online Shopping App
b) System Settings 2. Recycle Bin
c) LibreOffice Impress 3. Control Panel
d) Amazon 4. Presentation software
a) 2, 1, 4, 3
b) 4, 3, 1, 2
c) 3, 1, 4, 2
d) 2, 3, 4, 1
Answer:
d) 2, 3, 4, 1

Question 55.
Identify the correct statement from the following:
a) In Ubundu, all the deleted Files and Folders are moved to Trash
b) Similar to Windows OS, we can create, delete the files and folders with the same procedure by clicking the Files icon in Ubundu.
c) A new File or new Folder can also be created by using File menu in Ubundu
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 56.
Shutting down Ubuntu using Session _______ option.
a) Log out
b) Suspend
c) Shutdown
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Part – I

Shot Answers

Question 1.
Name some distributions of Linux.
Answer:

  1. Fedora
  2. Ubuntu
  3. BOSS
  4. RedHat
  5. Linux Mint.

Question 2.
What are the most popular operating systems suitable for desktop and laptop computers?
Answer:
All the Windows Series like Windows Vista, Windows-7, etc operating systems are suitable for desktop and laptop computers.

Question 3.
What is Open source Operating system?
Answer:
It is the software in which the source code is available to the general public for use and modification from its original design, free of charge.

Question 4.
Which operating system suitable for Apple phones, iPad, and iPods?
Answer:
iOS operating systems are suitable for Apple phones, iPad, and iPod.

Question 5.
What are the similarities between Ubuntu and other operating systems?
Answer:
All are based on the concepts of Graphical User Interface.

Question 6.
What is multitasking?
Answer:
Multiple applications can execute simultaneously in Windows, and this is known as multitasking.

Question 7.
What is a workspace of a window?
Answer:
The workspace is the area in the document window to enter or type the text of your document. The workspace is the element of a window.

Question 8.
What are the file management activities?
Answer:
File management activities are creating, modifying, saving, deleting files and folders.

Question 9.
What are the four versions of Windows 2000 and its application?
Answer:
The four versions of Windows 2000 are:

  • Windows 2000 – Professional – for business desktop and laptop systems.
  • Windows 2000 – Server – for both a Web server and an office server.
  • Windows 2000 – Advanced Server – for line-of-business applications.
  • Windows 2000 – Data Centre Server – for high-traffic computer networks.

Question 10.
What is Firefox?
Answer:
It is a browser.

Question 11.
What is a desktop?
Answer:
The opening screen of Windows is called Desktop.

Question 12.
Write a note on Icons.
Answer:
Icon is a graphic symbol representing the window elements like files, folders, shortcuts etc. Icons play a vital role in GUI based applications.

Question 13.
What do you mean by standard icon? Give an example.
Answer:
The icons which are available on desktop by default while installing Windows OS are called standard icons. The standard icons available in all Windows OS are My Computer, Documents and Recycle Bin.

Question 14.
How will you switch to desktop?
Answer:
We can move to the Desktop any time by pressing the Winkey + D or using Aero Peek while working in any application.

Question 15.
Define Window.
Answer:
Window is a typical rectangular area in an application or a document. It is an area on the screen that displays information for a specific program.

Question 16.
Write note on document window.
Answer:
A document window is a section of the screen used to display the contents of a document.

Question 17.
Write a note on Recycle Bin.
Answer:
Recycle Bin: Recycle bin is a special folder to keep the files or folders deleted by the user, which means you still have an opportunity to recover them. The user cannot access the files or folders available in the Recycle bin without restoring it.

Question 18.
How will you restore file or folder from Recycle Bin?
Answer:
To restore file or folder from the Recycle Bin

  • Open Recycle bin.
  • Right-click on a file or folder to be restored and select the Restore option from the pop-up menu.
  • To restore multiple files or folders, select Restore all items.
  • To delete all files in the Recycle bin, select Empty the Recycle Bin.

Question 19.
How will you create a desktop shortcut?
Answer:
Creating Shortcuts on the Desktop:
Shortcuts to your most often used folders and files may be created and placed on the Desktop to help automate your work.

  • Select the file or folder that you wish to have as a shortcut on the Desktop.
  • Right-click on the file or folder.
  • Select Send to from the shortcut menu, then select Desktop (Create Shortcut) from the sub¬menu.
  • A shortcut for the file or folder will now appear on your desktop and you can open it from the desktop in the same way as any other icon.

Question 20.
How will you log off/shut down the computer?
Answer:
To Log off/Shut down the computer :

  • Click start to → log off (click the arrow next to Shut down) or Start Shutdown.
  • If you have any open programs, then you will be asked to close them or windows will Force shut down, you will lose any unsaved information if you do this.

Question 21.
Compare switch user and log off options.
Answer:

  • Switch User: Switch to another user account on the computer without closing your open programs and Windows processes.
  • Log Off: Switch to another user account on the computer after closing all your open programs and Windows processes.

Question 22.
When we use the Lock and Restart option?
Answer:

  • Lock: Lock the computer while you’re away from it.
  • Restart: Reboot the computer. This option is often required as part of installing new software or Windows update.

Question 23.
Write a note on the Sleep mode option.
Answer:
Sleep: Puts the computer into a low-power mode that retains all running programs and open Windows in computer memory for a super-quick restart.

Question 24.
Write a note on Hibernate mode option? Where it is available?
Answer:
The Hibernate option is found only on laptop computers. It puts the computer into a low-power mode after saving all running programs and open windows on the machine’s hard drive for a quick restart.

Part – II

Short Answers

Question 1.
How will you rename the files or folders?
Answer:
Using the FILE Menu

  1. Select the File or Folder you wish to Rename.
  2. Click File → Rename.
  3. Type in the new name.
  4. To finalize the renaming operation, press Enter

Question 2.
What are the merits of open source code?
Answer:
Open Source code is typically created as a collaborative effort in which programmers continuously improve upon the source code on the web and share the changes within the community.

Question 3.
List out the important functions of an OS?
Answer:
Following are some of the important functions of an Operating System:

  1. Memory Management
  2. Process Management
  3. Device Management
  4. File Management
  5. Security Management
  6. Control overall system performance
  7. Error detecting aids
  8. Coordination between other software and users

Question 4.
List the distributors of Linux.
Answer:
The most popular Linux server distributors are: Ubuntu Linux

  • Linux Mint
  • Arch Linux
  • Deepin
  • Fedora
  • Debian
  • CentOS

Question 5.
Write about Ubuntu.
Answer:
Ubuntu is a Linux-based operating system. It is designed for computers, smartphones, and network servers. The system is developed by a UK-based company called Canonical Ltd. Ubuntu was conceived in 2004 by Mark Shuttleworth, a successful South African entrepreneur.

Question 6.
Write note on the Network indicator.
Answer:
Network indicator – This manages network connections, allowing you to connect to a wired or wireless network.

Question 7.
What are the four versions of Windows 2000?
Answer:

  1. Professional – business desktop and laptop systems.
  2. Server – used as both a web server and an office server.
  3. Advanced server – for a line of business applications.
  4. Datacenter server – for high-traffic computer networks.

Question 8.
Write note on the Sound indicator.
Answer:
Sound indicator – This provides an easy way to adjust the volume as well as access your music player.

Question 9.
What is a Window?
Answer:
Window is a typical rectangular area in an application or a document. It is an area on the screen that displays information for a specific program. The two types of windows are the application window and the document window.

Question 10.
Write about session indicators.
Answer:
Session indicator – This is a link to the system settings, Ubuntu Help, and session options like locking your computer, user/guest session, logging out of a session, restarting the computer, or shutting down completely.

Question 11.
How will you start an application?
Answer:

  1. Click the start button and then point to all programs. The program menu appears. Point to the group that contains the application you want to start and then click the application name.
  2. Click Run on the start menu and type the name of the application and click ok.

Question 12.
Write about Toolbar of Ubuntu.
Answer:
Toolbar – The toolbar displays your directory browsing history, your location in the file system, a search button, and options for your current directory view.

Question 13.
Write a note on Recycle bin.
Answer:
Recycle bin is a special folder to keep the files or folders deleted by the user. From the recycle bin, files can be restored back.

Part – I

Explain brief

Question 1.
Discuss the following Icons.
Answer:
Shortcut Icons:
Shortcut icons can be created for any application or file or folder. By double-clicking the icon, the related application or file, or folder will open. This represents the shortcut to open a particular application.

Disk drive icons:
The disk drive icons graphically represent five disk drive options.

  1. Hard disk.
  2. CD – ROM/DVD Drive.
  3. Pen drive.
  4. Other removable storage such as mobile, smartphone, tablet, etc.
  5. Network drives if your system is connected with another system.

Question 2.
What is a shortcut icon? Mention its types.
Answer:
Shortcut icons can be created for any application or file or folder. By double-clicking the icon, the related application or file, or folder will open.
Type of shortcuts:

  1. Desktop shortcut
  2. Keyboard shortcut

Question 3.
Write notes on disk drive icons.
Answer:
The disk drive icons graphically represent five disk drive options.

  1. Hard disk.
  2. CD-ROM/DVD Drive
  3. Pen drive
  4. Other removable storage such as mobile, smartphone, tablet, etc.
  5. Network drives if your system is connected with another system.

Question 4.
What is the application window? Explain with an example.
Answer:
It is an area on a computer screen with defined boundaries, and within which information is displayed.
Such windows can be resized, maximized, minimized, placed side by side, overlap, and so on.
An Application Window contains an open application i.e. current application such as Word or Paint. When two or more windows are open, only one of them is active and the rest are inactive.

Question 5.
Explain various methods of creating Files and Folders.
Answer:
Creating files and Folders:
Creating Folders:
You can store your files in many locations – on the hard disk or in other devices. To better organise your files, you can store them in folders.
There are two ways in which you can create a new folder:

Method I:
Step 1: Open Computer Icon.
Step 2: Open any drive where you want to create a new folder. (For example select D:)
Step 3: Click on File → New → Folder.
Step 4: A new folder is created with the default name “New folder”.
Step 5: Type in the folder name and press Enter key.

Method II:
In order to create a folder in the desktop:
Step 1: In the Desktop, right-click → New → Folder.
Step 2: A Folder appears with the default name “New folder” and it will be highlighted.
Step 3: Type the name you want and press Enter Key.
Step 4: The name of the folder will change.

Question 6.
Write about Taskbar.
Answer:
At the bottom of the screen there- is a horizontal bar called the taskbar. This bar contains the Start button(left side), shortcuts to various programs, minimized programs, and in the extreme right corner you can see the system tray which consists of volume control, network, date and time, etc. Next to the Start button is the quick Launch Toolbar which contains tasks for frequently used applications.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 16

Question 7.
Explain Computer Icon.
Answer:
Computer Icon – By clicking this icon, the user can see the disk drivers mounted in the system. In Windows XP, Vista, this icon is called “My computer” in Windows 8 and 10, it is called “This PC”.
The functionality of the computer icon remains the same in all versions of windows as shown in the following Figure.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 17

Question 8.
How will you copy files and folders?
Answer:
Copying Files and Folders:
There are variety of ways to copy files and folders:

The method I – COPY and PASTE:
To copy a file or folder, first, select the file or folder and then choose one of the following:

  1. Click Edit → Copy or Ctrl + C or right-click → Copy from the pop-up menu.
  2. To paste the file(s) or folder(s) in the new location, navigate to the target location then do one of the following:
  3. Click Edit → Paste or Ctrl + V.
  4. Or Right-click → Paste from the pop-up menu.

Method II – Drag and Drop:

  1. In the RIGHT pane, select the file or folder you want to copy.
  2. Click and drag the selected file and/or folder to the folder list on the left, and drop it where you want to copy the file and/or folder.
  3. Your file(s) and folder(s) will now appear in the new area.

Question 9.
How will you search files or folders using the Computer icon?
Answer:
Procedure:

  • Click Computer Icon from desktop or from the Start menu.
  • The Computer disk drive screen will appear and at the top right corner of that screen, there is a search box option.
  • Type the name of the file or the folder you want to search. Even if you give the part of the file or folder name, it will display the list of files or folders starting with the specified name.
  • Just click and open that file or the folder.

Question 10.
How will you delete a file or folder?
Answer:
To delete a file or folder: Select the file or folder you wish to delete.

  • Right-click the file or folder, select the Delete option from the pop-up menu or Click File → Delete or press the Delete key from the keyboard.
  • The file will be deleted and moved to the Recycle bin.

Question 11.
Represent overview of an operating system using a diagram.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 18

Part II

Explain brief

Question 1.
What are the features of Ubuntu?
Answer:
Features of Ubuntu

  • The desktop version of Ubuntu supports all norma! software like Windows such as Firefox, Chrome, VLC, etc.
  • It supports the office suite called LibreOffice.
  • Ubuntu has in-built email software called Thunderbird, which gives the user access to email such as Exchange, Gmail, Hotmail, etc.
  • There are free applications for users to view and edit photos, to manage and share videos.
  • It is easy to find content on Ubuntu with the smart searching facility.
  • The best feature is, it is a free operating system and is backed by a huge open source community.

Question 2.
What are the names of the icons in the Ubuntu OS?
Answer:

  • Search your Computer
  • Files
  • Firefox Webbrowser
  • LibreOffice Writer
  • LibreOfficeCalc
  • LibreOffice Impress
  • Ubuntu Software
  • Amazon
  • System Settings
  • Trash

Question 3.
Explain about Ubuntu menu bar.
Answer:
Menu bar – The menu bar is located at the top of the screen, The menu bar Incorporates common functions used in Ubuntu. The frequently used icons in the menu bar are found on the right. The most common indicators in the Menu bar are located in the indicator or notification area.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 19

Question 4.
Write a note on Text entry settings.
Answer:
Text entry settings: This shows the current keyboard layout (such as En, Fr, Ku, and so on. If more than one keyboard layout is shown, it allows you to select a keyboard layout out of those choices. The keyboard indicator menu contains the following menu items: Character Map, Keyboard Layout Chart, and Text Entry Settings.

Question 5.
Write about Ubundu desktop background.
Answer:
The desktop background Below the menu bar at the top of the screen is an image covering the entire desktop. This is the default desktop background or wallpaper;, belonging to the default Ubuntu 16.04 theme known as Ambiance.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 20

Question 6.
Explain Ubuntu Shutting down method.
Answer:
Shutting down Ubuntu using Session options
When you have finished working on your computer, you can choose to Log Out, Suspend or Shut down through the Session Indicator on the far right side of the top panel.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 21

Part – I

Explain brief

Question 1.
Explain the various mouse actions.
Answer:
The following are the mouse actions:

ActionReaction
Point to an itemMove the mouse pointer over the item.
ClickPoint to the item on the screen, press and release the left mouse button.
Right-clickPoint to the item on the screen, press and release the right mouse button. Clicking the right mouse button displays a pop-up menu with various options.
Double-clickPoint to the item on the screen, quickly press twice the left mouse button.
Drag and dropPoint to an item then hold the left mouse button as you move the pointer press and you have reached the desired position, release the mouse button.

Question 2.
Draw and explain the Elements of a window.
Answer:
The elements of a window
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 22

Menu Bar:
The menu bar is seen under the title bar. Menus in the menu bar can be accessed by pressing the Alt key and the letter that appears underlined in the menu title. Additionally, pressing Alt or F10 brings the focus on the first menu of the menu bar.

The Workspace:
The workspace is the area in the document window to enter or type the text of your document.

Scroll bars:
The scroll bars are used to scroll the workspace horizontally or vertically.

Corners and borders:
The corners and borders of the window help to drag and resize the windows. The mouse pointer changes to a double-headed arrow when positioned over a border or a corner. Drag the border or corner in the direction indicated by the double-headed arrow to the desired size. The window can be resized by dragging the corners diagonally across the screen.

Title bar:
The first line of the window is called the title bar. It contains the name of the application on its left and the sizing buttons on its right.

Question 3.
How will you create a folder? Explain its methods with an example.
Answer:
There are two ways in which you can create a new folder:

Method I:
Step 1: Open Computer Icon.
Step 2: Open any drive where you want to create a new folder. (For example select D:.
Step 3: Click on File → New Folder.
Step 4: A new folder is created with the default name “New folder”.
Step 5: Type in the folder name and press Enter key.

Method II:
In order to create a folder on the desktop:
Step 1: In the Desktop, right-click New → Folder.
Step 2: A Folder appears with the default name “New folder” and it will be highlighted.
Step 3: Type the name you want and press Enter Key.
Step 4: The name of the folder will change.

Question 4.
How will you create a file in Wordpad?
Answer:
To create files in Wordpad we need to follow the steps given below.

  1. Click Start → All Programs → Accessories → Wordpad or Run → type Wordpad, click OK. Wordpad window will be opened.
  2. Type the contents in the workspace and save the file using File → Save or Ctrl + S.
  3. Save As dialog box will be opened.
  4. In the dialog box, select the location where you want to save the file by using the Look in the drop-down list box.
  5. Type the name of the file in the file name text box.
  6. Click the save button.

Question 5.
Explain the method of finding Files and Folders.
Answer:
You can use the search box on the Start menu to quickly search a particular folder or file in the computer or in a specific drive.

To find a file or folder

  1. Click the Start button, the search box appears at the bottom of the start menu.
  2. Type the name of the file or the folder you want to search. Even if you give the part of the file or folder name, it will display the list of files or folders starting with the specified name.
  3. The files or the folders with the specified names will appear, if you click that file, it will directly open that file or the folder.
  4. There is another option called “See more results” which appears above the search box.
  5. If you click it, it will lead you to a Search Results dialog box where you can click and open that file or the folder.

Question 6.
Explain the various methods to Rename a file.
Answer:
You can rename using the File menu, left mouse button, or right mouse button.

Method 1:
Using the FILE Menu

  1. Select the File or Folder you wish to Rename.
  2. Click File → Rename.
  3. Type in the new name.
  4. To finalise the renaming operation, press Enter.

Method 2:
Using the Right Mouse Button

  1. Select the file or folder you wish to rename.
  2. Click the right mouse button over the file or folder.
  3. Select Rename from the pop-up menu.
  4. Type in the new name.
  5. To finalise the renaming operation, press Enter.

Method 3:
Using the Left Mouse Button

  1. Select the file or folder you wish to rename.
  2. Press F2 or click over the file or folder. A surrounding rectangle will appear around the name.
  3. Type in the new name.
  4. To finalise the renaming operation, press Enter.

Question 7.
How will you move the files and folders? Explain various methods.
Answer:
Method I:
CUT and PASTE: To move a file or folder, first select the file or folder and then choose one of the following:

  1. Click on the Edit → Cut or Ctrl + X Or right-click → cut from the pop-up menu.
  2. To move the file(s) or folder(s) in the new location, navigate to the new location and paste it using Click Edit → Paste from the edit menu or Ctrl + V using the keyboard.
  3. Or Right-click →  Paste from the pop-up menu. The file will be pasted in the new location.

Method II:
Drag and Drop: In the disk drive window, we have two panes called left and right panes. In the left pane, the files or folders are displayed like a tree structure. In the right pane, the files inside the specific folders in the left pane are displayed with various options.

  1. In the right pane of the Disk drive window, select the file or folder we want to move.
  2. Click and drag the selected file or folder from the right pane to the folder list on the left pane.
  3. Release the mouse button when the target folder is highlighted (active).
  4. Our file or folder will now appear in the new area.

Question 8.
How will you copy the files and folders? Explain various methods.
Answer:
Copying Files and Folders Method I – COPY and PASTE
To copy a file or folder, first, select the file or folder and then choose one of the following:

  1. Click Edit Copy or Ctrl + C or right-click Copy from the pop-up menu.
  2. To paste the file(s) or folder(s) in the new location, navigate to the target location then do one of the following:
  3. Click Edit Paste or Ctrl + V.
  4. Or Right-click → Paste from the pop-up menu.

Method II – Drag and Drop

  1. In the RIGHT pane, select the file or folder we want to copy.
  2. Click and drag the selected file and/or folder to the folder list on the left, and drop it where you want to copy the file and/or folder.
  3. Our file(s) and folder(s) will now appear in the new area.

Question 9.
How will you copy the files and folders to a removable disk? Explain various methods.
Answer:
Copying Files and Folders to a removable disk
The following are methods of transferring files to or from a removable disk:

  • Copy and Paste
  • Send To

METHOD I: Copy and Paste

  1. Plug the USB flash drive directly into an available USB port.
  2. If the USB flash drive or external drive folder does NOT open automatically, follow these steps:
  3. Click Start → Computer.
  4. Double-click on the Removable Disk associated with the USB flash drive.
  5. Navigate to the folders in your computer containing files you want to transfer.
  6. Right-click on the file you want to copy, then select Copy.
  7. Return to the Removable Disk window, right-click within the window, then select Paste.

METHOD II: Send To

  1. Plug the USB flash drive directly into an available USB port.
  2. Navigate to the folders in our computer containing files you want to transfer.
  3. Right-click on the file we want to transfer to your removable disk.
  4. Click Send To and select the Removable Disk associated with the USB flash drive.

Part – II

Explain detail

Question 1.
Explain the elements of Ubuntu,
Answer:
Search your Computer Icon
This icon is equal to the search button in Windows OS. Here, you have to give the name of the File or Folder for searching them.

Files :
This icon is equivalent to the My Computer icon. From here, you can directly go to Desktop, Documents, and so on.

Firefox Web Browser:
By clicking this icon, you can directly browse the internet. This is equivalent to clicking the Web Browser in Taskbar in Windows.

Online Shopping icon:
Using this icon users can buy and sell any products online.

System Settings Icons :
This icon is similar to the Control panel in the Windows Operating System. But here, you need to authenticate the changes by giving your password. You cannot simply change as you do in Windows.

Trash :
This icon is the equivalent of Recycle bin of windows OS. All the deleted Flies and Folders are
moved here.

Question 2.
Explain the method of creating, deleting files/folders in Ubuntu.
Answer:
Creating, Deleting Files/Folders
Similar to Windows OS, you can create, delete the files and folders with the same procedure by clicking the Files icon. The following Figure shows the method of creating a File or Folder by right-clicking on the Desktop.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 23

A new File or new Folder can also be created by using the File menu.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 24
Deleting a File/Folder: A file/folder created by you can be moved to trash by using right-click or by using the menu.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 25

Question 3.
Explain LibreOffice Writer, LibreOffice Cacl and LibreOffice Impress.
Answer:
LibreOffice Writer
This icon will directly take you to document preparation applications like MS Word in Windows.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 26

Libre Office Cac: This icon will open the LibreOffice Calc application. It is similar to MS Excel in Windows.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 27

LibreOffice Impress: By clicking this icon, you can open LibreOffice Impress to prepare any presentations in Ubuntu like MS PowerPoint.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 28

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Pdf Chapter 10 Flow of Control Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Solutions Chapter 10 Flow of Control

11th Computer Science Guide Flow of Control Text Book Questions and Answers

Book Evaluation

Part I

Choose The Correct Answer

Question 1.
What is the alternate name of null statement?
a) No statement
b) Empty statement
c) Void statement
d) Zero statement
Answer:
b) Empty statement

Question 2.
In C++, the group of statements should enclosed within:
a) { }
b) [ ]
c)()
d)<>
Answer:
a) { }

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 3.
The set of statements that are executed again and again in iteration is called as:
a) condition
b) loop
c) statement
d) body of loop
Answer:
d) body of loop

Question 4.
The multi way branching statement:
a) if
b) if… else
c) switch
d) for
Answer:
c) switch

Question 5.
How many types of iteration statements?
a) 2
b) 3
c) 4
d) 5
Answer:
b) 3

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 6.
How many times the following loop will execute?
for (int i=0; i<10; i++)
a) 0
b) 10
c) 9
d) 11
Answer:
b) 10

Question 7.
Which of the following is the exit control loop?
a) for
b) while
c) do…while
d) if…else
Answer:
c) do…while

Question 8.
Identify the odd one from the keywords of jump statements:
a) break
b) switch
c) go to
d) continue
Answer:
b) switch

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 9.
Which of the following is the exit control loop?
a) do-while
b) for
c) while
d) if-else
Answer:
a) do-while

Question 10.
A loop that contains another loop inside its body:
a) Nested loop
b) Inner loop
c) In line loop
d) Nesting of loop
Answer:
a) Nested loop

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Part – II

Short Answers

Question 1.
What is a null statement and compound statement?
Answer:
null statement; The “null or empty statement” is a statement containing only a semicolon. It takes the flowing form: ;
// it is a null statement
compound Statement:
In C++, a group of statements enclosed by pair of braces {} is called as a compound statement or a block.
The general format of compound statement is:
{
statement1;
statement2;
statement3;
}

Question 2.
What is a selection statement? Write its types?
Answer:
The selection statement means the statements are executed depends upon a condition. If a condition is true, a true block (a set of statements) is executed, otherwise, a false block is executed. This statement is also called a decision statement or selection statement because it helps in making a decision about which set of statements are to be executed.
Types:

  1. Two-way branching
  2. Multiway branching

Question 3.
Correct the following code segment:
Answer:
if (x=1)
p= 100;
else
P = 10;
Correct code: (Equal to operator is wrongly given)
if (x==1)
p= 100;
else
p = 10;

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 4.
What will be the output of the following code:
int year;
cin >> year;
if (year % 100 == 0)
if (year % 400 == 0)
cout << “Leap”;
else
cout << “Not Leap year”;

If the input is given is
(i) 2000
(ii) 2003
(iii) 2010
Answer:
i) 2000 AS INPUT
Output
Leap
ii) 2003AS INPUT
Output
Not Leap year
iii) 2010 AS INPUT
Output
Not Leap year

Question 5.
What is the output of the following code?
for (int i=2; i<=10 ; i+=2)
cout << i;
Answer:
Output
2 4 6 8 10

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 6.
Write a for loop that displays the number from 21 to 30.
Answer:
# include
using namespace std;
int main()
{
for (int = 21; i < 31; i++)
cout << “value of i:” << i << endl;
return 0;
}
Output:
Value of i: 21
Value of i: 22
Value of i: 23
Value of i: 24
Value of i: 25
Value of i: 26
Value of i: 27
Value of i: 28
Value of i: 29
Value of i: 30

Question 7.
Write a while loop that displays numbers 2,4, 6, 8…….20.
Answer:
While loop to
i = 2;
while(i<=20)
{
cout<< i <<“,”;
i = i+2;
}

Question 8.
Compare an if and a ? : operator.
Answer:
The if statement evaluates a condition, if the condition is true then a true-block is executed, otherwise false-block will be executed! Block may consists of one or more statements. The conditional operator (or Ternary operator) . is an alternative for ‘if else statement’. Here if the condition is true one statement otherwise another statement will be executed.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Part – III

Short Answers

Question 1.
Convert the following if-else to a single conditional statement:
Answer:
if (x >= 10)
a = m + 5;
else
a = m;
a = (x >= 10)? m + 5 : m ;

Question 2.
Rewrite the following code so that it is functional:
Answer:
v = 5;
do;
{
total += v;
cout << total;
while v <=10
CORRECT CODE:
int v = 5;
do
{
total += v;
v++;
} while (v <= 10); cout << total;

Question 3.
Write a C++ program to print the multiplication table of a given number.
Answer:

# include
using namespace std;
int main ()
{

int num;
cout << “Enter Number to find its multiplication table”; cin >> num;
for (int a = 1; a < = 10; a++)
{
cout << num << “*” << a << “=” << num*a << endl;
}
return( );
}

Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control 1

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 4.
Write the syntax and purpose of switch statement.
Answer:
The syntax of the switch statement is:
switch(expression)
{
case constant 1:
statement(s);
break;
case constant 2:
statement(s);
break;
.
.
.
.
default:
statement(s);
}
Purpose of switch statement:
The switch statement is a multi-way branch statement. It provides an easy way to dispatch execution to different parts of code based on the value of the expression.

Question 5.
Write a short program to print following series: a) 1 4 7 10…… 40
Answer:
PROGRAM
using namespace std;
#inciude
int main()
{
for(int i=1;i<=40;i=i+3)
cout<<i<<” “;
return 0;
}
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control 2

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Part – IV

Explain In Detail

Question 1.
Explain the control statement with a suitable example.
Answer:
Control statements are statements that alter the sequence of flow of instructions.
In a program, statements may be executed sequentially, selectively, or iteratively. Every programming language provides statements to support sequence, selection (branching), and iteration.
Selection statement:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control 3
The selection statement means the statement(s) are executed depends upon a condition. If a condition is true, a true block ¡s executed otherwise a false block is executed. This statement is also called a decision statement or selection statement because it helps in making decisions about which set of statements are to be executed.
Iteration statement:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control 4
The iteration statement is a set of the statement are repetitively executed depends upon conditions. If a condition evaluates to true, the set of statements (true block) is executed again and again. As soon as the condition becomes false, the repetition stops. This is also known as a looping statement or iteration statement.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 2.
What entry control loop? Explain any one of the entry control loops with a suitable example.
Answer:
In an entry-controlled loop, the test- expression is evaluated before entering into a loop, while and for statements are called as entry controlled loop.
Working of while loop:
A while loop is a control flow statement that allows the loop statements to be executed as long as the condition is true. The while loop ¡s an entry-controlled loop because the test-expression is evaluated before the entering into a loop.
The while loop syntax is:
while (Test expression )
{
Body of the loop;
}
Statement-x;
In a while loop, the test expression is evaluated and if the test expression result is true, then the body of the loop is executed and again the control is transferred to the while loop. When the test expression result is false the control is transferred to statement-x.
The control flow and flow chart of the while loop is shown below.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control 5
Example:
#include <iostream>
using namespace std;
int main ()
{
int i=1,sum=0;
while(i<=10)
{
sum=sum+i;
i++;
}
cout<<“The sum of 1 to 10 is “<<sum; return 0;
}
Output
The sum of 1 to 10 is 55

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 3.
Write a program to find the LCM and GCD of two numbers.
Answer:
PROGRAM:
using namespace std;
#include <iostream>
int main()
{
int n1, n2, i, gcd;
cout<<“Enter two integers:”;
cin>>n1>>n2;
for(i=1; i <= n1 && i <= n2; ++i)
{
// Checks if i is factor of both integers
if(n1%i==0 && n2%i==0)
gcd = i;
}
int lcm = n1*n2 /gcd;
cout<<“\nG.C.M.OF”<<nl<<“and”<<n2<<”
is”<<gcd;
cout< < “\nL.C. M. OF “< < n 1 < < ” and ” < < n2< < ” is “<<lcm; return 0;
}
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control 6
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control 7

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 4.
Write programs to find the sum of the following series:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control 8
Answer:
PROGRAM
using namespace std;
#include
int main()
{
int i,x,n,f=1,sign=1;
float sum=0,t;
cout<<“\nEnter N value”;
cin>>n;
cout<<“\nEnter x value …”;
cin>>x;
t=x;
for(i=1;i<=n;i++)
{
f = f * i;
sum = sum + sign * t/f;
t = t * x;
sign = -sign;
}
cout<<”SUM OF THE SERIES = “<<sum;
return O;
}
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control 9
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control 10
PROGRAM
using namespace std;
#include
int main()
{
int i,x,n;
float sum=0,t;
cout<<“\nEnter N value”;
cin>>n;
cout<<“\nEnter x value …”;
cin>>x;
t=x;
for(i=l;i<=n;i++)
{
sum = sum + t/i;
t = t * x;
}
cout<<“SUM OF THE SERIES = “<<sum;
}
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control 11

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 5.
Write a program to find sum of the series s=1 +x +x2 + ……..+xn
Answer:
PROGRAM
using namespace std;
#include
int main()
{
int sum=1,x,i,t,n;
cout<<“\nEnter N value”;
cin>>n;
cout<<“\nEnter x value … “;
cin>>x;
t=x;
for(i=l;i<=n;i++)
{
sum = sum + t;
t = t * x;
}
cout<<“SUM = “<<sum;
}
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control 12

11th Computer Science Guide Flow of Control Additional Questions and Answers

Choose The Correct Answer 1 Mark

Question 1.
The empty statement is otherwise called as ………………..
(a) Control statement
(b) Zero statement
(c) Null statement
(d) Block statement
Answer:
(c) Null statement

Question 2.
The basics of control structure are……………. statement.
a) Selection
b) Iteration
c) Jump
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 3.
Iteration statement is called as ………………..
(a) Null statement
(b) Block statement
(c) Selection statement
(d) Looping statement
Answer:
(d) Looping statement

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 4.
In a program, the action may be ……………..
a) Variable declarations
b) Expression evaluations
c) Assignment operations
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 5.
……………….. is a multi-path decision-making statement.
(a) if
(b) if-else
(c) else – if
(d) if-else ladder
Answer:
(d) if-else ladder

Question 6.
The ……………. is a statement containing only a semicolon.
a) Null
b) Empty statement
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 7.
……………….. is more efficient than the if-else statement.
(a) Control statement
(b) Switch statement
(c) Empty statement
(d) Null statement
Answer:
(b) Switch statement

Question 8.
C++ allows a group of statements enclosed by pair of ……………..braces.
a) ()
b) { }
c) [ ]
d) < >
Answer:
b) { }

Question 9.
C++ supports types of iteration statements.
(a) 3
(b) 2
(c) 4
(d) 5
Answer:
(a) 3

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 10.
……………. statements alter the sequence of flow of instructions.
a) Control
b) Null
c) Compound
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Control

Question 11.
……………….. is used to transfer the control from one place to another place without any condition in a program.
(a) Break statement
(b) Continue statement
(c) goto statement
(d) All the above
Answer:
(c) goto statement

Question 12.
The ……………. statement are the statements, that are executed one after another only once from top to bottom.
a) Sequential
b) Selective
c) Iterative
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Sequential

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 13.
…………….. statements do not alter the flow of execution.
a) Sequential
b) Selective
c) Iterative
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Sequential

Question 14.
…………….. statements always end with a semicolon (;).
a) Sequential
b) Selective
c) Iterative
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Sequential

Question 15.
The ……………. statement means the statement (s) are executed depends upon a condition.
a) Sequential
b) Selective
c) Iterative
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Selective

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 16.
If a condition is true, a true block (a set of statements) is executed otherwise a false block is executed is called …………… statement.
a) Decision
b) Selection
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 17.
The ……………. statement is a set of the statement are repetitively executed depends upon conditions.
a) Sequential
b) Selective
c) Iterative
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Iterative

Question 18.
The condition on which the execution or exit from the loop is called ………………
a) Exit-condition
b) Test-condition
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 19.
In C++, any non-zero is treated as …………… including negative numbers
a) False
b) True
c) Complement
d) None of these
Answer:
b) True

Question 20.
In C++, zero is treated as …………..
a) False
b) True
c) Complement
d) None of these
Answer:
a) False

Question 21.
Decisions in C++ are made using …………….. statement.
a) if..else
b) switch., case
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 22.
……………. statement which chooses between two alternatives.
a) if..else
b) switch., case
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) if..else

Question 23.
………………. creates branches for multiple alternatives sections of code, depending on the value of a single variable.
a) if..else
b) switch., case
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) switch., case

Question 24.
…………. is a two-way branching statement.
a) if..else
b) switch., case
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) if..else

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 25.
……………….. is a multiple branching statement.
a) if..else
b) switch., case
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) switch., case

Question 26.
An if statement contains another if the statement is called …………….
a) Nested if
b) Compound if
c) Block if
d) Group if
Answer:
a) Nested if

Question 27.
The nested if can have ……………. forms.
a) four
b) two
c) three
d) five
Answer:
c) three

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 28.
……………. is nested if form.
a) If nested inside if part
b) If nested inside both if part and else part
c) If nested inside else part
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 29.
The ………….. is a multi-path decision-making statement.
a) if-else ladder
b) Simple if
c) if… else
d) None of these
Answer:
a) if-else ladder

Question 30.
In ……………..type of statement ‘if’ is followed by one or more else if statements and finally end with an else statement.
a) if-else ladder
b) Simple if
c) if… else
d) None of these
Answer:
a) if-else ladder

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 31.
The……………. operator is an alternative for the if-else statement.
a) Conditional
b) Ternary
c) Continue
d) Either A or B
Answer:
d) Either A or B

Question 32.
The conditional operator consists of …………….. symbols.
a) two
b) three
c) four
d) five
Answer:
a) two

Question 33.
The conditional operator takes …………….. arguments.
a) two
b) three
c) four
d) five
Answer:
b) three

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 34.
The switch statement is a …………… statement.
a) Multi-way branch
b) Two-way branch
c) Jump
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Multi-way branch

Question 35.
………….. statement provides an easy way to dispatch execution to different parts of code based on the value of the expression.
a) if..else
b) switch
c) goto
d) None of these
Answer:
b) switch

Question 36.
The ………………statement replaces multiple if-else sequences.
a) if..else
b) switch
c) go to
d) None of these
Answer:
b) switch

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 37.
The expression provided in the switch should result in a…………… value.
a) Constant
b) Variant
c) Null
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Constant

Question 38.
In switch statement …………… statement is optional.
a) default
b) break
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 39.
The …………… statement is used inside the switch to terminate a statement sequence.
a) default
b) break
c) continue
d) None of these
Answer:
b) break

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 40.
In a switch statement, when a ………….. statement is reached, the flow of control jumps to the next line following the switch statement.
a) go to
b) break
c) continue
d) None of these
Answer:
b) break

Question 41.
……………. statement checks only for equality.
a) go to
b) if,.else
c) continue
d) switch
Answer:
d) switch

Question 42.
………….. statement checks for equality as well as for logical expression.
a) go to
b) if..else
c) continue
d) switch
Answer:
b) if..else

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 43.
………….. statement uses a single expression for multiple choices.
a) go to
b) if..else
c) continue
d) switch
Answer:
d) switch

Question 44.
A(n) ………….. statement uses multiple statements for multiple choices.
a) go to
b) if..else
c) continue
d) switch
Answer:
b) if..else

Question 45.
The ……………. statement evaluates integer, character, pointer or floating-point type or Boolean type.
a) go to
b) if..else
c) continue
d) switch
Answer:
b) if..else

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 46.
……….. statement evaluates only character or an integer data type.
a) go to
b) if..else
c) continue
d) switch
Answer:
d) switch

Question 47.
If the expression inside the switch statement turns out to be false then statements are executed.
a) default
b) break
c) else block
d) None of these
Answer:
a) default

Question 48.
If the expression inside if turns out to be false, statement inside ………….. will be executed.
a) default
b) true block
c) else block
d) None of these
Answer:
c) else block

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 49.
The ………….. statement is more flexible.
a) switch
b) if
c) continue
d) None of these
Answer:
b) if

Question 50.
The …………… statement is more efficient than the if-else statement.
a) switch
b) go to
c) continue
d) None of these
Answer:
a) switch

Question 51.
Which is true related to the switch statement?
a) A switch statement can only work for the quality of comparisons.
b) No two case labels in the same switch can have identical values.
c) If character constants are used in the switch statement, they are automatically converted to their equivalent ASCII codes.
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 52.
When a switch is a part of the statement sequence of another switch, then it is called as …………….. switch statement.
a) Iterative
b) Sequential
c) Nested
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Nested

Question 53.
A(n) ………….. is a sequence of one or more statements that are repeatedly executed until a condition is satisfied.
a) Iteration
b) Looping
c) Iteration or Looping
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Iteration or Looping

Question 54.
………….. is used to reduce the length of code, to reduce time, to execute the program and takes less memory space.
a) Iteration
b) Looping
c) Iteration or Looping
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Iteration or Looping

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 55.
C++supports ………….. types of iteration statements.
a) five
b) four
c) three
d) two
Answer:
c) three

Question 56.
C++ supports ………….. type of iteration statement.
a) for
b) while
c) do..while
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 57.
Every loop has …………….. elements.
a) five
b) four
c) three
d) two
Answer:
b) four

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 58.
Every loop has ………….. element.
a) Initialization expression
b) Test expression / Update expression
c) The body of the loop
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 59.
The control variable(s) must be initialized …………. the control enters into a loop.
a) after
b) before
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) before

Question 60.
Whose value decides whether the loop-body will be executed or not?
a) Test expression
b) Update expression
c) Initialization expression
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Test expression

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 61.
In an ……….. loop, the test-expression is evaluated before entering into a loop,
a) Entry-controlled
b) Exit-controlled
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Entry-controlled

Question 62.
In an ………….. loop, the test-expression is evaluated before exiting from the loop.
a) Entry-controlled
b) Exit-controlled
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Exit-controlled

Question 63.
……………. is used to change the value of the loop variable.
a) Test expression
b) Update expression
c) Initialization expression
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Update expression

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 64.
……………. statement is executed at the end of the loop after the body of the loop is executed.
a) Test expression
b) Update expression
c) Initialization expression
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Update expression

Question 65.
In an …………. loop, first, the test expression is evaluated and if it is nonzero, the body of the loop is executed otherwise the loop is terminated.
a) Entry-controlled
b) Exit-controlled
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Entry-controlled

Question 66.
In an …………. loop, the body of the loop is executed first then the test-expression is evaluated.
a) Entry-controlled
b) Exit-controlled
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Exit-controlled

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 67.
………….. loop statement contains three different statements.
a) for
b) while
c) do..while
d) All the above
Answer:
a) for

Question 68.
The for statement contains ……………. statement
a) Test expression
b) Update expression
c) Initialization expression
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 69.
The for statement sections are separated by ………………
a) Semicolons
b) Colon
c) Comma
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Semicolons

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 70.
The initialization part of the loop is used to initialize variables or declare a variable which is executed …………… time(s).
a) Loop repeated
b) Only one
c) two
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Only one

Question 71.
How many times the following loop will be executed?
for (i=0; i <= 10; i++);
a) 10
b) 9
c) 11
c) None of these
Answer:
c) 11

Question 72.
If the body of the loop contains a ……………. statement(s), need not use curly braces.
a) Single
b) More than one
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Single

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 73.
In for loop, multiple initializations and multiple update expressions are separated by ……………
a) Semicolons
b) Colons
c) Commas
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Commas

Question 74.
In a for loop, which expression is optional?
a) Test expression
b) Update expression
c) Initialization expression
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 75.
What will be formed if the following loop is executed?
for( i=0; ++i);
a) Finite loop
b) Indefinite loop
c) No iteration
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Indefinite loop

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 76.
A loop that has no statement in its body is called an ……………
a) Empty loop
b) Indefinite loop
c) Finite loop
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Empty loop

Question 77.
Identify the empty loop from the following.
a) for( i+0 ; i<=5; +=i);
b) for( i+0 ; i<=5; +=i); {cout<<“C++”;>
c) for( i+0 ; i<=5; +=i) { }
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 78.
A ………….. loop is useful for pausing the program for some time.
a) Time delay
b) Infinite loop
c) Finite loop
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Time delay

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 79.
……………. is a time delay loop.
a) for(i=l; i<=100; i++);
b) int i=l;
while( ++i < 10)
{
}
c) int i=l;
do
{
} while( ++i < 10);
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 80.
How many times the following loop will be executed?
int i=l;
while( ++i < 10)
cout<< “The value of i is “<<i;
a) 10
b) 9
c) 8
d) Infinite times
Answer:
c) 8

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 81.
How many times the following loop will be executed?
int i=l;
while( i++< 10)
cout<< “The value of i is “<<i;
a) 10
b) 9
c) 8
d) Infinite times
Answer:
b) 9

Question 82.
In ………… loop, the body of the loop will be executed atleast once.
a) while
b) do..while
c) for
d) All the above
Answer:
b) do..while

Question 83.
In ……………….. loop, the body of the loop is executed at least once, even when the condition evaluates false during the first iteration.
a) while
b) do..while
c) for
d) All the above
Answer:
b) do..while

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 84.
What will be the output of the following program?
using namespace std;
int main ()
{
int n = 10;
do
{
cout<<n<<“”; n-; }while (n>0);
}
a) 109 8 7 6 5 43 2 1
b) 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1
c) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
d) 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1,0
Answer:
b) 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1

Question 85.
……………. statements are used to interrupt the normal flow of the program.
a) Jump
b) Loop
c) Decision making
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Jump

Question 86.
……………. is a jump statement.
a) go to statement
b) break statement
c) continue statement
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 87.
The ………….. statement is a control statement which is used to transfer the control from one place to another place without any condition in a program.
a) go to
b) break
c) continue
d) All the above
Answer:
a) go to

Question 88.
A …………… statement is a jump statement which terminates the execution of the loop and the control is transferred to resume normal execution after the body of the loop.
a) go to
b) break
c) continue
d) All the above
Answer:
b) break

Question 89.
…………….. statement forces the loop to continue or execute the next iteration,
a) go to
b) break
c) continue
d) All the above statement is executed in
Answer:
c) continue

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 90.
When the …………….statement is executed in the loop, the code inside the loop following the …………… statement will be skipped and the next iteration of the loop will begin.
a) go to
b) break
c) continue
d) All the above
Answer:
c) continue

Question 91.
……………. statement breaks the iteration.
a) continue
b) break
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) break

Question 92.
…………… statement skips the iteration.
a) continue
b) break
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) continue

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 93.
…………….. statement is used with loops as well as switch case.
a) continue
b) break
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) break

Question 94.
………….. statement is only used in loops.
a) continue
b) break
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) continue

Very Short Answers (2 Marks)

Question 1.
What is an if statement? Write its syntax.
Answer:
The if statement evaluates a condition, if the condition is true then a true – block (a statement or set of statements) is executed, otherwise the true – block is skipped. The general syntax of the if the statement is:
if (expression)
true – block;
statement – x;

Question 2.
What are the basic control structures?
Answer:
The basics of control structures are:

  • Selection statement
  • Iteration statement
  • Jump statement

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 3.
What is a computer program?
Answer:
A computer program is a set of statements or instructions to perform a specific task.

Question 4.
What is nested if? Mention its types.
Answer:
An if statement contains another if the statement is called nested if. The nested can have, one of the following three forms.

  1. If nested inside if part
  2. If nested inside else part
  3. If nested inside both if part and else part

Question 5.
What are control statements?
Answer:
Control statements are statements that alter the sequence of flow of instructions.
In a program, statements may be executed sequentially, selectively, or iteratively. Every programming language provides statements to support sequence, selection (branching), and iteration.

Question 6.
What is the exit condition of a loop?
Answer:
The condition on which the execution or exit from the loop is called exit-condition or test-condition.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 7.
What is an iteration or loop?
Answer:
An iteration or loop is a sequence of one or more statements that are repeatedly executed until a condition is satisfied. These statements are also called control flow statements.

Question 8.
What are the advantages of a loop or an iteration?
Answer:
It is used to reduce the length of code, to reduce time, to execute the program, and takes less memory space

Question 9.
What are loop elements?
Answer:
Every loop has four elements that are used for different purposes. These elements are

  1. Initialization expression
  2. Test expression
  3. Update expression
  4. The body of the loop

Question 10.
What are the parts of a loop?
Answer:
Every loop has four elements that are used for different purposes. These elements are:

  • Initialization expression
  • Test expression
  • Update expression
  • The body of the loop

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 11.
Write a note on the declaration of a variable in a for a loop.
Answer:
Declaration of a variable in a for loop:
In C++, the variables can also be declared within a for loop.
For instance,
for(int i=0; i<=5; ++i)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control 13
A variable declared inside the block of main() can be accessed anywhere inside main() i.e., the scope of variable in main().

Question 12.
Write a program to display numbers from 1 to 10 except 6 using a continue statement.
Answer:
C++ program to display numbers from 1 to 10 except 6 using continue statement
#include
using namespace std;
int main()
{
if (i = 6)
continue;
else
cout << i << ” ”
}
return 0;
}
Output:
1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10

Question 13.
Write about the go-to statement.
Answer:
go to the statement: The go-to statement is a control statement which is used to transfer the control from one place to another place without any condition in a program.
The syntax of the go-to statement is;
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control 14
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control 16
In the syntax above, the label is an identifier. When go-to label; is encountered, the control of the program jumps to label: and executes the code below ¡t.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 14.
Write a note on the break statement.
Answer:
break statement: A break statement is a jump statement which terminates the execution of the loop and the control is transferred to resume normal execution after the body of the loop. The following figure shows the working of break statement with looping statements;
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control 15

Question 15.
Write a note on the continue statement.
Answer:
continue statement:
The continue statement works quite similar to the break statement. Instead of terminating the loop, the continue statement forces the loop to continue or execute the next iteration. When the continue statement is executed in the loop, the code inside the loop following the continue statement will be skipped and the next iteration of the loop will begin.
The following figure describes the working flow of the continue statement
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control 17

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Short Answers 3 Marks

Question 1.
Write a note on the sequence statement.
Answer:
sequence statement:
The sequential statement is the statements, that are executed one after another only once from top to bottom. These statements do not alter the flow of execution. These statements are called sequential flow statements. They always end with a semicolon (;).
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control 18

Question 2.
What is a selection statement? Mention its types.
Answer:
Selection statement: The selection statement means the statement (s) are executed depends upon a condition. If a condition is true, a true block is executed otherwise a false block is executed. This statement is also called a decision statement or selection statement because it helps in making a decision about which set of statements are to be executed.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control 19

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 3.
Explain the Iteration statement.
Answer:
Iteration statement: The iteration statement is a set of the statement are repetitively executed depends upon conditions. If a condition evaluates to true, the set of statements (true block) is executed again and again. As soon as the condition becomes false, the repetition stops. This is also known as a looping statement or iteration statement.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control 20

Question 4.
Explain if statement with syntax and an example.
Answer:
The if statement evaluates a condition, if the condition is true then a true-block is executed, otherwise, the true-block is skipped.
Syntax: if (expression) true-block; statement-x;
In the above syntax, if is a keyword that should contain expression or condition which is enclosed within parentheses. Working of if statement: If the expression is true then the true-block is executed and followed by statement-x is also executed, otherwise, the control passes to statement-x. It is implemented in the following flowchart.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control 21
Example 1:
if ( qty> 500)
dis=10;
Example 2:
if(age>=18)
cout<< “\n You are eligible for voting ….”;

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 5.
Explain if..else statement with syntax and an example.
Answer:
The syntax of the if..else statement:
if (expression)
{
True-block;
}
else
{
False-block;
}
Statement-x
Working of if..else statement:
In if..else statement, first the expression or condition is evaluated as either true or false. If the result is true, then the statements inside the true-block are executed and the false-block is skipped. If the result is false, then the statement inside the false-block is executed i.e., the true-block is skipped. It is implemented in the following flowchart.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control 22
Example:
if(num%2==0)
cout<< “\n The given number is Even”;
else
cout<< “\n The given number is Odd”;

Question 6.
What is a conditional or ternary operator? Explain.
Answer:
The conditional operator (or Ternary operator) is an alternative for the ‘if-else statement’. The conditional operator consists of two symbols (?:). It takes three arguments. The control flow of the conditional operator is shown below.
The syntax of the conditional operator is:
expression 1? expression 2: expression 3
In the above syntax, expression 1 is a condition which is evaluated, if the condition is true (Non-zero), then the control is transferred to expression 2, otherwise, the control passes to expression 3.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control 23
Example:
#include
using namespace std;
int main()
{
int a, b, largest;
cout << “\n Enter any two numbers:
cin >> a >> b;
largest = (a>b)? a : b;
cout << “\n Largest number: ” << largest;
return 0;
}
Output
Enter any two numbers: 12 98
Largest number: 98

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 7.
Explain the nested switch statement.
Answer:
Nested switch:
When a switch is a part of the statement sequence of another switch, then it is called a nested switch statement. The inner switch and the outer switch constant may or may not be the same.
The syntax of the nested switch statement is: switch (expression)
{
case constant 1:
statement(s);
break;
switch(expression)
{
case constant 1:
statement(s);
break;
case constant 2:
statement(s);
break;
.
.
.
default: statement(s);
}
case constant 2:
statement(s);
break;
.
.
.
default:
statement(s);
}
Example:
#include
using namespace std;
int main()
{
int a = 8;
cout<<“The Number is : ” < switch (a)
{
case 0 :
cout<<“The number is zero” <<endl;
break;
default:
cout<<“The number is a non-zero
integer” <<endl;
int b = a % 2;
switch (b)
{
case 0:
cout<<“The number is even” <<endl;
break;
case 1:
cout<<“The number is odd” <<endl;
break;
}
}
return 0;
}
Output
The Number is: 8
The number is a non-zero integer
The number is even

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 8.
Explain variations of for loop?
Answer:
Variations of for loop:
Variations increase the flexibility and applicability of for loop.
Multiple initializations and multiple update expressions:
Multiple statements can be used in the initialization and update expressions of for loop.
This multiple initializations and multiple update expressions are separated by commas.
For example:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control 24
Output
The value of i is 0 The value of j is 10
The value of i is 1 The value of j is 9
The value of i is 2 The value of j is 8
The value of i is 3 The value of j is 7
The value of i is 4 The value of j is 6
In the above example, the initialization part contains two variables i and j, and the update expression contains i++ and j++. These two variables are separated by commas which are executed in sequential order i.e., during initialization firstly i-0 followed by j=10. Similarly, in update expression, firstly i++ is evaluated followed by j++ is evaluated.

Question 9.
Explain for loop optional expression with suitable examples.
Answer:
Optional expressions;
The for loop contains three parts, i.e., initialization expressions, test expressions and
update expressions. These three expressions are optional in a for loop.
Case 1:
#include
using namespace std;
int main ()
{
int i, sum=0, n;
cout<<“\n Enter The value of n”;
cin>>n;
i =1;
for (; i<=10;i++)
{
sum += i;
}
cout<<“\n The sum of 1 to” <<n<<“is “<<sum;
return 0;
}
Output
Enter the value of n 5
The sum of 1 to 5 is 15
In the above example, variable i is declared and the sum is initialized at the time of variable declaration.
The variable i is assigned to 0 before the for loop but still, the semicolon is necessary before test expression.
In a for loop, if the initialization expression is absent then the control is transferred to the test expression/conditional part.
Case 2:
#include
using namespace std;
int main ()
{
int i, sum=0, n;
cout<<“\n Enter The value of n”; cin>>n;
i =1;
for (; i<=10; )
{
sum += i;
++i;
cout<<“\n The sum of 1 to” <<n<<“is “<<sum;
return 0;
}
Output
Enter the value of n 5
The sum of 1 to 5 is 15
In the above code, the update expression is hot done, but a semicolon is necessary before the update expression.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control 25
In the above code, neither the initialization nor the update expression is done in the for a loop. If both or any one of the expressions are absent then the control is transferred to the conditional part.
Case 3:
An infinite loop will be formed if a test- expression is absent in a for a loop.
For example:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control 26

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 10.
What is an empty loop? Give a suitable example.
Answer:
Empty loop:
An empty loop means a loop that has no statement in its body is called an empty loop. Following for loop is an empty loop:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control 27
In the above code, the for loop contains a null statement, it is an empty loop.
Similarly, the following for loop also forms an empty loop.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control 28
In the above code, the body of a for loop enclosed by braces is not executed at all because a semicolon is ended after the for a loop.

Question 11.
What do you mean by the nesting of loops?
Answer:
Nesting of loops:
A loop which contains another loop is called a nested loop.
The syntax is given below:
for (initialization(s); test-expression; update expression(s))
{
for (initialization(s); test-expression; update expression(s)
{
statement(s);
}
statement(s);
{
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control 29
Example:
#include
using namespace std;
int main(void)
{
cout<< “A multiplication table:”
< <<endl<< “” <<endl;
for(int c = 1; c < 10; C++)
{
cout<< c << “l”;
for(int i = 1; i< 10; i++)
{
cout< }
cout<<endl;
}
return 0;
}

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 12.
What are the Differences between the Break and Continue statement?
Answer:

Break

Continue

The break is used to terminate the execution of the loop.Continue is not used to terminate the execution of the loop.
It breaks the iteration.It skips the iteration.
When this statement is executed, control will come out from the loop and executes the statement immediately after the loop.When this statement is executed, it will not come out of the loop but moves/jumps to the next iteration of the loop.
The break is used with loops as well as switch cases.Continue is only used in loops, it is not used in switch cases.

Book Evaluation

Hands-On Practice
Write a C++ program to solve the following problems:
Question 1.
Temperature – conversion program that gives the user the option of converting Fahrenheit to Celsius or Celsius to Fahrenheit and depending upon the user’s choice.
Answer:
PROGRAM :
using namespace std;
#include<iostream>
int main()
{
float f,c;
int choice;
cout<<“\nl, FahrenheiT to Celsius”;
cout<<“\n2. Celsius to FahrenheiT”;
cout<<“\n3.Exit”;
cout<<“\nENTER YOUR CHOICE “;
cin>>choice;
switch(choice)
{
case 1: cout<<“\nENTER TEMPERATURE IN FAHRENHEIT “;
cin>>f;
c=5.0/9.0 *(f-32);
cout<<“\nTEMPERATURE IN FAHRENHEIT “<<f;
cout«”\nTEMPERATURE IN CELSIUS “<<c;
break;
case 2: cout<<“\nENTER TEMPERATURE IN CELSIUS “;
cin>>c;
f = 9*c/5 + 32;
cout< <“\nTEMPERATURE IN FAHRENHEIT “<<f;
cout< < “\nTEMPERATURE IN CELSIUS “<<c;
break;
default: cout< <“\nPROCESS COMPLETED”; > .
}
}
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control 30

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 2.
The program requires the user to enter two numbers and an operator. It then carries out the specified arithmetical operation: addition, subtraction, multiplication, or division of the two numbers. Finally, it displays the result.
using namespace std;
#include <iostream>
int main()
{
float num1,num2,result;
char op;
coutczcz”\nl. Enter two numbers”;
cin>>num1>>num2;
cout<<”\nEnter operaotr + or – or * or / : “; cin>>op;
switch(op)
{
case’+’:
result = num1 + num2;
cout<<“\nAdded value “<<result;
break;
case’-‘:
result = num1 – num2;
cout<<“\nSubtracted value “<<result;
break;
case ‘*’:
result = num1 * num2;
cout<<“\Multiplied value “<<result;
break;
case’/’:
result = num1 / num2;
cout<<“\nDivided value “<<result;
break;
default:cout<<“\nPROCESS COMPLETED”;
}
}
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control 31
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control 32

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 3.
Program to input a character and to print whether a given character is an alphabet, digit or any other character.
Answer:
PROGRAM
using namespace std;
#include <iostream>
#include
int main()
{
char ch;
cout<<“\nl. Enter a character :”; cin>>ch;
if(isdigit(ch))
cout<<“\nThe given character “<<ch<<” is a digit”;
else if(isalpha(ch))
cout<<“\nThe given character “<<ch<<” is an alphabet”;
else
cout<<“\nThe given character “<<ch<<” is other character”;
}
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control 33

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 4.
Program to. print whether a given character Is an uppercase or a lowercase character or a digit or any other character. Use ASCII codes for it. The ASCII codes are as given below:
Answer:
Characters -ASCII Range
‘0’ – ‘9’ – 48 – 57
‘A’ – ‘Z’ – 65 – 90
‘a’ – ‘z’ – 97 – 122
other characters 0 – 255 excluding the above-mentioned codes.
PROGRAM
using namespace std;
#include
int main()
{
char ch;
cout<<“\nl. Enter a character: cin>>ch;
int av = ch;
if(av>47 m av<58)
cout<<“\nThe given character “<<ch<<” is a digit”; else if(av>64 && av<91)
cout<<“\nThe given character “<<ch<<” is an Uppercase character”; else if(av>96 && av < 123)
cout<<“\nThe given character “<<ch<<” is n Lowercase character”;
else
cout<<“\nThe given character “<<ch<<” is an Other character”;
}
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control 34
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control 35

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 5.
Program to calculate the factorial of an integer.
Answer:
PROGRAM
using namespace std;
#include
int main()
{
int i,n;
long int fact=l;
cout<<“\nEnter a number… cin>>n; ‘
for(i=l; i<=n; i++)
fact = fact * i;
cout<<“\nFactorial of “<<n<<” is “<<fact;
}
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control 36

Question 6.
Program that print 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128.
Answer:
PROGRAM
using namespace std;
#include
int main()
{
int i;
for(i=l; i< =128; i=i*2)
cout<<i<<“\t”;
}
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control 37

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 7.
Program to generate divisors of an integer.
Answer:
PROGRAM
using namespace std;
#include
int main() {
int n,d;
cout<<“\n Enter a number…”; cin>>n;
cout<<“\nThe divisors for “< for(d=l; d<=n/2;d++)
if(n%d==0)
cout<<d<<“\t”;
cout<<n;
}
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control 38

Question 8.
Program to print fibonacci series i.e., 0112 3 5 8
Answer:
PROGRAM
using namespace std;
#include
int main()
{
int n,fl,f2,f3;
fl=-l; ,
f2=l;
cout«”\nHOW MANY TERMS … “; .
cin>>n;
cout<<,r\nThe FIBONACCI TERMS ARE \n”; for(int i=l; i<=h;i++)
{
f3=fl+f2;
cout<<f3<<“\n”;
fl-f2;
f2=f3;
}
}
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control 39

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 9.
Programs to produces the following design using nested loops.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control 41
Answer:
9. A)
PROGRAM
using namespace std;
#include
int main()
{
int i,j;
for(i=l; i<=6; i++)
{
char c = ‘A’; for(j=l;j<=i;j++)
{
cout<<c<<“\t”;
C++;
}
cout<<“\n\n”;
}
}
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control 42
9. B)
PROGRAM
using namespace std;
#include
int main()
{
int i,j;
for(i=l; i<=5; i++) { for(j=5;j>=i;j–)
cout<<j<<“\t”;
cout<<“\n\n”;
}
}
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control 43
9.c)
PROGRAM
using namespace std;
#include
int main()
{
int i,j,k=0,m;
for(i=7; i> = l; i=i-2)
{
for(j=l;j<=i;j++)
cout<<“#\t”;
cout<<“\n\n”;
k++;
for(m=l;m<=k;m++)
cout<<“\t”;
}
}
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control 44

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control

Question 10.
Program to check whether the square root of a number is a prime or not.
Answer:
PROGRAM
using namespace std;
#include
#include int main()
{
int n,srn,d,p=0;
cout<<“\nENTER A NUMBER … cin>>n;
srn=sqrt(n);
cout<<“\nTHE GIVEN NUMBER IS “<<n;
cout<<“\nTHE SQUARE ROOT OF”<<n<<” IS”<<srn;
for(d=2; d<=srn/2;d++)
{
if(srn%d==0)
{
p=1;
break;
}
}
if(p==0)
cout <<“\nTHE SQUARE ROOT OF THE GIVEN NUMBER “<<n<<” IS A PRIME”; else
cout <<“\nTHE SQUARE ROOT OF THE GIVEN NUMBER “<<n<<” IS NOT A PRIME”;
}
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 10 Flow of Control 45

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Pdf Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Solutions Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

11th Computer Science Guide Theoretical Concepts of Operating System Text Book Questions and Answers

Part I

Choose the correct answer.

Question 1.
Operating system is a
a) Application Software
b) Hardware
c) System Software
d) Component
Answer:
c) System Software

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 2.
Identify the usage of Operating Systems
a) Easy interaction between the human and computer
b) Controlling input & output Devices
c) Managing use of main memory
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 3.
Which of the following is not a function of an Operating System?
a) Process Management
b) Memory Management
c) Security management
d) Complier Environment
Answer:
d) Complier Environment

Question 4.
Which of the following OS is a Commercially licensed Operating system?
a) Windows
b) UBUNTU
C) FEDORA
d) REDHAT
Answer:
a) Windows

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 5.
Which of the following Operating systems support Mobile Devices?
a) Windows 7
b) Linux
c) BOSS
d) iOS
Answer:
a) Windows 7

Question 6.
File Management manages
a) Files
b) Folders
c) Directory systems
d) All the Above
Answer:
d) All the Above

Question 7.
Interactive Operating System provides
a) Graphics User Interface (GUI)
b) Data Distribution
c) Security Management
d) Real Time Processing
Answer:
a) Graphics User Interface (GUI)

Question 8.
Android is a
a) Mobile Operating system
b) Open Source
c) Developed by Google
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 9.
Which of the following refers to Android operating system’s version?
a) JELLYBEAN
b) UBUNTU
c) OS/2
d) MITTIKA
Answer:
a) JELLYBEAN

Part II

Short Answers

Question 1.
What are the advantages of management in Operating System?
Answer:

  1. Allocating memory is easy and cheap
  2. Any free page is ok, OS can take the first one out of the list it keeps
  3. Eliminates external fragmentation
  4. Data (page frames) can be scattered all over PM
  5. Pages are mapped appropriately anyway
  6. Allows demand paging and pre – paging
  7. More efficient swapping
  8. No need for considerations about fragmentation
  9. Just swap out the page least likely to be used

Question 2.
What is the multi-user Operating system?
Answer:
It is used in computers and laptops that allow same data and applications to be accessed by multiple users at the same time.
The users can also communicate with each other. Windows, Linux and UNIX are examples for multi-user Operating System.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 3.
What is a GUI?
Answer:
GUI – Graphical User Interface – It allows the use of icons or other visual indicators to interact with electronic devices, rather than using only text via the command line. For example, all versions of Microsoft Windows utilize a GUI, whereas MS-DOS does not.

Question 4.
List out different distributions of Linux operating system.
Answer:
Linux distributors are Ubuntu, Mint, Fedora, RedHat, Debian, Google’s Android, Chrome OS, and Chromium OS.

Question 5.
What are the security management features available in Operating System?
Answer:
Security Management features:

  1. File access level security
  2. System-level security
  3. Network-level security

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 6.
What is multi-processing?
Answer:
This is a one of the features of Operating System. It has two or more processors for a single running process .

Question 7.
What are the different Operating Systems used in computer?
Answer:
Different operating system used:

  1. Single user, single Task Operating system
  2. Multi-user operating system
  3. Multiprocessing operating system
  4. Distributed Operating system

Part III

Explain in Brief

Question 1.
What are the advantages and disadvantages of Time-sharing features?
Answer:

AdvantagesDisadvantages
Many applications can run at the same time.it consumes much resources.
The CPU is not idle.Constraint on security and integrity of data.
Provides the advantage of quick response.Reliability constraint exists.

Question 2.
Explain and List examples of mobile operating system.
Answer:
A Mobile Operating System (or mobile OS) is an operating system that is specifically designed to run on mobile devices such as phones, tablets, smartwatches, etc.
Example: Apple IOS

Google Android: Android is a mobile OS developed by Google, based on Linux and designed for smartphones and tabs. iOS was developed by Apple.
Example: Android, ColorOS, LGUX, MIUI.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 3.
What are the differences between Windows and Linux Operating systems?
Answer:

WINDOWSLINUX
It is a licensed OSLinux is an open-source operating system
Vulnerable to viruses and malware attacksMore secure
Windows must boot from the primary- partitionIt can be booted from an either primary or logical partition
Windows file name are not case sensitiveIn Linux, file names are case sensitive
Windows uses the microkernel which takes less spaceLinux uses the monolithic kernel which consumes more running space

Question 4.
Explain the process management algorithms in Operating System.
Answer:
The following algorithms are mainly used to allocate the job (process) to the processor: FIFO, SJF, Round Robin, based on priority.

  1. First In First Out (FIFO) Scheduling – This algorithm is based on queuing technique. Technically, the process that enters the queue first is executed first by the CPU, followed by the next, and so on. The processes are executed in the order of the queue.
  2. Shortest Job First (SJF) Scheduling – This algorithm works based on the size of the job being executed by the CPU.
  3. Round Robin Scheduling – Round Robin (RR) Scheduling algorithm is designed especially -for time-sharing systems, jobs are assigned, and processor time in a circular method.
  4. Based on priority – The given job (process) is assigned on a priority. The job which has higher priority is more important than ether jobs.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Part IV

Explain in detail

Question 1.
Explain the concept of a Distributed Operating System.
Answer:
The data and application that are stored and processed on multiple physical locations across the world over the digital network (internet/intranet). The Distributed Operating System is used to access shared data and files that reside in any machine around the world. The user can handle the data from different locations. The users can access it as if it is available on their own computer.

The advantages of distributed Operating System are as follows:

  • A user at one location can make use of all the resources available at another location over the network.
  • Many computer resources can be added easily in the network
  • Improves the interaction with the customers and clients.
  • Reduces the load on the host computer.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 2.
Explain the main purpose of an operating system.
Answer:
The main use of the Operating System is:

  • To ensure that a computer can be used to extract what the user wants it to do.
  • Easy interaction between the users and computers.
  • Starting computer operation automatically when power is turned on (Booting).
  • Controlling Input and Output Devices.
  • Manage the utilization of main memory.
  • Providing security to user programs.

Question 3.
Explain the advantages and disadvantages of open-source operating systems.
Answer:
The benefits of open source are tremendous and have gained huge popularity in the IT field in recent years. They are as follows:

  1. Open-source (OS) is free to use, distribute and modify.
  2. Open source is independent of the company as an author who originally created it.
  3. It is accessible to everyone. Anyone can debug the coding.
  4. It doesn’t have the problem of incompatible formats that exist in proprietary software.
  5. It is easy to customize as per our needs.
  6. Excellent support will be provided by programmers who will assist in making solutions.

Some of the disadvantages are:

  1. The latest hardware is incompatible, i.e. lack of device drivers.
  2. It is less user-friendly and not as easy to use.
  3. There may be some indirect costs involved such as paying for external support.
  4. Malicious users can potentially view it and exploit any vulnerability.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

11th Computer Science Guide Theoretical Concepts of Operating System Additional Questions and Answers

Part I

Choose the correct answer

Question 1.
Software is classified into ………………. types.
(a) five
(b) two
(c) four
(d) six
Answer:
(b) two

Question 2.
_________ interacts basically with the hardware to generate the desired output.
a) hardware
b) freeware
c) software
d) None of these
Answer:
c) software

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 3.
Which one of the following is not an algorithm?
(a) NTFS
(b) FIFO
(c) SJE
(d) Round Robin
Answer:
(a) NTFS

Question 4.
_________is a software classification.
a) application software
b) system software
c) both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) both A and B

Question 5.
Which one of the following is not a prominent operating system?
(a) UNIX
(b) IOS
(c) GUI
(d) Android
Answer:
(c) GUI

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 6.
_________is an application software.
a) MS-Word
b) VLC player
c) MS-Excel
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 7.
Which one of the following comes under proprietary license?
(a) Apple Mac OS
(b) Google’s Android
(c) UNIX
(d) LINUX
Answer:
(a) Apple Mac OS

Question 8.
_________is an application software to play audio, video files.
a) MS-Word
b) VLC player
c) MS-Excel
d) All the above
Answer:
b) VLC player

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 9.
………………. is the second most popular mobile operating system globally after Android.
(a) Microsoft Windows
(b) iOS
(c) UNIX
(d) LINUX
Answer:
(b) iOS

Question 10.
_________is a system software.
a) Operating System
b) Language Processor
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 11.
Which one of the following is System software?
(a) Operating System
(b) Language Processor
(c) Both a & b
(d) none of these
Answer:
(c) Both a & b

Question 12.
_________controls input, output of all other peripheral devices.
a) Operating System
b) Language Processor
c) VLC player
d) MS-Word
Answer:
a) Operating System

Question 13.
Hardware and software are managed by ……………….
(a) GUI
(b) OS
(c) Bootstrap
(d) keyboard
Answer:
(b) OS

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 14.
Without a(n) _________, a computer cannot effectively manage all the resources,
a) Operating System
b) Language
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Operating System

Question 15.
An OS that allows only a single user to perform a task at a time is called……………….
(a) Single user os
(b) Single task os
(c) Both a & b
(d) Multi-tasking os
Answer:
(c) Both a & b

Question 16.
A user cannot communicate directly computer _________
a) software
b) hardware
c) Both A and B
c) None of these
Answer:
b) hardware

Question 17.
Identify the multi-user OS?
(a) Windows
(b) Linux
(c) UNIX
(d) All of these
Answer:
(d) All of these

Question 18.
The mobile devices mostly use _________as mobile OS.
a) Android
b) iOS
c) Either A or B
d) None of th
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 19.
GUI stands for ……………….
(a) Geo User Interact
(b) Global User InterChange
(c) Graphical User Interface
(d) Global User Interface
Answer:
(c) Graphical User Interface

Question 20.
Operating System is basically – an interface between the _________
a) user and hardware
b) user and memory
c) programmer and hardware
d) None of these
Answer:
a) user and hardware

Question 21.
The operating system processes are executed by ……………….
(a) User code
(b) System code
(c) Task
(d) Program
Answer:
(b) System code

Question 22.
_________translates the user request into machine language.
a) Operating System
b) Language Processor
c) Application program
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Operating System

Question 23.
NTFS is a ……………….
(a) game
(b) file management technique
(c) OS
(d) System-level security
Answer:
(b) file management technique

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 24.
The main use of Operating 5ystem is _________
a) Controlling Input and Output Devices
b) Manage the utilization of main memory
c) Providing security to user programs
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 25.
Unix was developed in the year ……………….
(a) 1970
(b) 1980
(c) 1990
(d) 1960
Answer:
(a) 1970

Question 26.
A user task is a _________function.
a) printing a document
b) writing a file to disk
c) editing a file or downloading a file
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 27.
………………. is a windows alternative open-source operating system.
(a) React OS
(b) Boss
(c) Redhat
(d) Fedora
Answer:
(a) React OS

Question 28.
______ OS is used in computers and laptops.
a) Multi-user
b) Multitask
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Multi-user

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 29.
Which among the following is not an android mobile open source version?
(a) Donut
(b) Froyo
(c) Nougat
(d) Alpha
Answer:
(a) Donut

Question 30.
In _________OS users can also communicate with each other.
a) Multi-user
b) Multitask
c) Single user
d) MS-DOS
Answer:
a) Multi-user

Question 31.
_____ is an example of a multi-user Operating System.
a) Windows
b) Linux
c) UNIX
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 32.
A cheap computer can be build with _________
a) raspbion OS
b) Raspberry Pi
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 33.
_________is a platform that’s designed to teach how to build a computer.
a) raspbion OS
b) Raspberry Pi
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) raspbion OS

Question 34
______ is a key feature of an OS.
a) User interface
b) Fault tolerance
c) Memory management
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 35.
_________is the only way that a user can make interaction with a computer.
a) User interface
b) Fault tolerance
c) Memory management
d) All the above
Answer:
a) User interface

Question 36.
_________is the main reason for the key success of GUI.
a) User friendly
b) Fault tolerance
c) Robust
d) None of these
Answer:
a) User friendly

Question 37.
GUI means _________
a) Graphical User Interlink
b) Good User Interface
c) Graph User Interface
d) Graphical User Interface
Answer:
d) Graphical User Interface

Question 38.
The _________is a window based system.
a) command mode
b) GUI
c) both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) GUI

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 39.
_________are playing vital role of the particular application.
a) Icons
b) Commands
c) Navigations
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Icons

Question 40.
The___________should satisfy the customer based on their needs.
a) user interface
b) fault tolerance
c) memory management
d) all the above
Answer:
a) user interface

Question 41.
The ________ should save the user’s precious time.
a) user interface
b) fault tolerance
c) memory management
d) all the above
Answer:
a) user interface

Question 42.
The ________is to satisfy the customer.
a) user interface
b) fault tolerance
c) memory management
d) all the above
Answer:
a) user interface

Question 43.
The ________should reduce the number of errors committed by the user.
a) process management
b) fault tolerance
c) memory management
d) None of these
Answer:
d) None of these

Question 44.
_____ is the process of controlling and coordinating the computer’s main memory.
a) process management
b) fault tolerance
c) memory/ management
d) None of these
Answer:
c) memory/ management

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 45.
________is the process of assigning memory space to various running programs to optimize overall computer performance.
a) user interface
b) memory management
c) fault tolerance
d) all the above
Answer:
b) memory management

Question 46.
________involves the allocation of specific memory blocks to individual programs based on user demands.
a) user interface
b) memory management
c) fault tolerance
d) all the above
Answer:
b) memory management

Question 47.
________ensures the availability of adequate memory for each running program at all times.
a) process management
b) fault tolerance
c) memory management
d) None of these
Answer:
c) memory management

Question 48.
The objective of the Memory Management process is to improve ________
a) the utilization of the CPU
b) the speed of the computer’s response
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 49.
The Operating System is responsible for the________
a) Keeping track of which portion of memory is currently being used and who is using them.
b) Determining which processes and data to move in and out of memory.
c) Allocation and de-allocation of memory blocks as needed by the program in main memory.
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 50.
________ is function that includes creating and deleting processes.
a) process management
b) fault tolerance
c) memory management
d) None of these
Answer:
a) process management

Question 51.
________ providing mechanisms for processes to communicate and synchronize with each other.
a) process management
b) fault tolerance
c) memory management
d) None of these
Answer:
a) process management

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 52.
A(n)____i_____ s the unit of work in a computer.
a) task
b) process
c) operation
d) None of these
Answer:
b) process

Question 53.
A word-processor program being run by an individual user on a computer is a________
a) task
b) process
c) operation
d) None of these
Answer:
b) process

Question 54.
A system task, such as sending output to a printer or screen, can also be called as a ________
a) task
b) process
c) operation
d) none of these
Answer:
b) process

Question 55.
A computer processes are classified as _________ categories.
a) 5
b) 4
c) 3
d) 2
Answer:
d) 2

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 56.
A category of computer process is _________
a) operating system process
b) user process
c) both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) both A and B

Question 57.
________process is executed by system code.
a) operating system process
b) user process
c) both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) operating system process

Question 58.
________process is execute by user code.
a) operating system process
b) user process
c) both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) user process

Question 59.
All the computer processes can potentially execute concurrently on a ________CPU,
a) single
b) parallel
c) linear
d) None of these
Answer:
a) single

Question 60.
A process needs certain resources including _________ to finish its task.
a) CPU time
b) Memory
c) Files and I/O devices
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 61.
The Operating System is responsible for the_______activity.
a) Scheduling processes and threads on the CPUs
b) Suspending and resuming processes
c) Providing mechanisms for process synchronization
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 62.
The ________ algorithm is mainly used to allocate the job to the processor.
a) FIFO or SJF
b) Round Robin
c) Based on Priority
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 63.
FIFO means ________
a) First In Fast Out
b) Fast In First Out
c) First In First Out
d) None of these
Answer:
c) First In First Out

Question 64.
________is based on queuing technique.
a) FIFO
b) Round Robin
c) Based on Priority
d) All the above
Answer:
a) FIFO

Question 65.
________algorithm works based on the size of the job being executed by the CPU.
a) FIFO
b) Round Robin
c) Based on Priority
d) SJF
Answer:
d) SJF

Question 66.
________algorithm is designed especially for time-sharing systems.
a) FIFO
b) Round Robin
c) Based on Priority
d) SJF
Answer:
b) Round Robin

Question 67.
In the _______algorithm jobs are assigned and processor time in a circular method.
a) FIFO
b) Round Robin
c) Based on Priority
d) SJF
Answer:
b) Round Robin

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 68.
The challenge in the computer and software industry is to protect user’s ________from hackers.
a) data
b) operation
c) hardware
d) all the above
Answer:
a) data

Question 69.
The Operating System provides ________levels of securities to the user end.
a) four
b) three
c) two
d) many
Answer:
b) three

Question 70.
The Operating System security is ________
a) File access level
b) System-level
c) Network level
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 71.
In order to access the files created by other people, you should have the ________
a) user name and password
b) ogin id
c) email id
d) access permission
Answer:
d) access permission

Question 72.
File access permissions can be granted by the__________
a) creator of the file
b) administrator of the system
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 73.
________level security is offered by the password in a multi-user environment.
a) File access
b) System
c) Network
d) All the above
Answer:
b) System

Question 74.
________offers the password facility.
a) Windows
b) Linux
c) Windows and Linux
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Windows and Linux

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 75.
________security is an indefinable one.
a) File access level
b) System-level
c) Network level
d) All the above
Answer:
c) Network level

Question 76.
The people from all over the world try to provide ________security.
a) File access level
b) System-level
c) Network level
d) All the above
Answer:
c) Network level

Question 77.
The Operating Systems should be ________
a) patience
b) error-free
c) robust
d) None of these
Answer:
c) robust

Question 78.
When there is a fault, the ________should not crash.
a) application program
b) operating system
c) data
d) None of these
Answer:
b) operating system

Question 79.
The operating system manages the ________on a computer.
a) files
b) folders
c) directory systems
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 80.
Any type of data in a computer is stored in the form of ________
a) blocks
b) files
c) archives
d) None of these
Answer:
b) files

Question 81.
FAT stands for ________
a) File Allocation Task
b) File Authentication Table
c) Fixed Allocation Table
d) File Allocation Table
Answer:
d) File Allocation Table

Question 82.
The FAT stores general information about files like_________
a) filename and type
b) size
c) starting address and access mode
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 83.
______ is the file access mode.
a) sequential
b) indexed / indexed-sequential
c) direct/relative
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 84.
The ________ of the operating system helps to create, edit, copy, allocate memory to the files, and also updates the FAT.
a) system agent
b) file agent
c) file supervisor
d) file manager
Answer:
d) file manager

Question 85.
ext2 stands for _______________
a) secondary extended file system
b) second extended folder system
c) second extended file scheme
d) second extended file system
Answer:
d) second extended file system

Question 86.
ext2 used in_________
a) Linux
b) MSDOS
c) Unix
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Linux

Question 87.
NTFS stands for_______
a) New Technology Focus System
b) New Technology File System
c) New Technology Filter System
d) New Trend File system
Answer:
b) New Technology File System

Question 88.
NTFS developed by________
a) Apple
b) IBM
c) Intel
d) Microsoft
Answer:
d) Microsoft

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 89.
______ has two or more processors for a single running process.
a) Mega processing
b) Micro processing
c) Multi-processing
d) Mixed-processing
Answer:
c) Multi-processing

Question 90.
Processing takes place in parallel is known as __________ processing.
a) parallel processing
b) distributed processing
c) parent
d) None of these
Answer:
a) parallel processing

Question 91.
______feature is used for high-speed execution which increases the power of computing.
a) parallel processing
b) distributed processing
c) multi-processing
d) None of these
Answer:
a) parallel processing

Question 92.
________allows execution of multiple tasks or processes concurrently.
a) Extended processing
b) Time sharing
c) Batch processing
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Time sharing

Question 93.
In _______ each task a fixed time is allocated.
a) Extended processing
b) Time sharing
c) Batch processing
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Time sharing

Question 94.
In_________the processor switches rapidly between various processes after a time is elapsed or the process is completed.
a) Extended processing
b) Time sharing
c) Batch processing
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Time sharing

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 95.
________feature takes care of the data and application that are stored and processed on multiple physical locations across the world over the digital network.
a) Multi-user OS
b) Distributed OS
c) Singe user OS
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Distributed OS

Question 96.
_________ is used to access shared data and files that reside in any machine around the world.
a) Multi-user OS
b) Distributed OS
c) Singe user OS
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Distributed OS

Question 97.
In_________ OS the user can handle the data from different locations.
a) Multiuser OS
b) Distributed OS
c) Singe user OS
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Distributed OS

Question 98.
________is the advantage of distributed Operating System.
a) A user at one location can make use of all the resources available at another location over the network.
b) Many computer resources can be added easily to the network
c) Improves the interaction with the customers and clients.
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 99.
_______reduces the load on the host computer.
a) Multi-user OS
b) Distributed OS
c) Singe user OS
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Distributed OS

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 100.
Prominent OS is________
a) UNIX and Windows
b) Linux
c) iOS and Android
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 101.
Modem operating systems use a
a) command mode interaction
b) GUI
c) visual
d) None of these
Answer:
b) GUI

Question 102.
OS can be
a) Proprietary with a commercial license
b) Open source
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 103.
_______is a proprietary with a commercial license OS.
a) Microsoft Windows
b) Apple Mac OS
c) Apple iOS
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 104.
________ is a open source free license OS.
a) Unix
b) Linux
c) Google’s Android
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 105.
Unix derive originally from _______
a) Borland International
b) AT&T Bell Labs
c) Intel
d) None of these
Answer:
b) AT&T Bell Labs

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 106.
The development of the Unix began in the year__________
a) 1960
b) 1966
c) 1970
d) 1976
Answer:
c) 1970

Question 107.
The Unix was developed by _______
a) Ken Thompson
b) Dennis Ritchie
c) Both A and B
d) Bjarne Stroustrup
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 108.
_______ OS can be modified and distributed by anyone around the world.
a) MS-DOS
b) Windows
c) Linux
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Linux

Question 109.
Most of the servers run on Linux because_______
a) it is easy to customize
b) it is rigid
c) it is not case sensitive
d) None of these
Answer:
a) it is easy to customize

Question 110.
_______is Linux distributor.
a) Ubuntu
b) Mint
c) Fedora
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 111.
_______is Linux distributor.
a) RedHat
b) Debian
c) Google’s Android
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 112.
_______is Linux distributor.
a) Chrome OS
b) Chromium OS
c) Both A and B
d) MS-DOS
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 113.
The Linux operating system was originated in the year _________
a) 1990
b) 1991
c) 1890
d) 1980
Answer:
d) 1980

Question 114.
The Linux operating system was developed by________
a) Ken Thompson
b) Dennis Ritchie
c) Linus Torvalds
d) Bjarne Stroustrup
Answer:
c) Linus Torvalds

Question 115.
Linux is similar to the________operating system.
a) Windows
b) UNIX
c) MS-DOS
d) None of these
Answer:
b) UNIX

Question 116.
Unix and the C programming language were developed by
a) Borland International
b) AT&T Bell Labs
c) Intel
d) None of these
Answer:
b) AT&T Bell Labs

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 117.
_______OS is primarily targeted to Intel and AMD architecture based computers.
a) Windows
b) UNIX
c) MS-DOS
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Windows

Question 118.
_______is a Windows-alternative open-source operating system.
a) RearOS
b) ReachOS
c) ReactOS
d) None of these
Answer:
c) ReactOS

Question 119.
________is a mobile device.
a) phones
b) tablets
c) MP3 players
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 120.
Android is a mobile operating system developed by
a) Borland International
b) AT&T Bell Labs
c) Intel
d) Google
Answer:
d) Google

Question 121.
_________ OS is designed primarily for touch screens mobile devices such as smartphones and tablets.
a) Windows
b) UNIX
c) MS-DOS
d) Android
Answer:
d) Android

Question 122.
Google has developed _______for televisions.
a) Android Wear
b) Android Car
c) Android TV
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Android TV

Question 123.
Google has developed _______ for cars.
a) Android Auto
b) Android Car
c) Android TV
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Android Auto

Question 124.
Google has developed_________for wrist watches.
a) Android Wear
b) Android Car
c) Android TV
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Android Wear

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 125.
Google has developed separate Android for_________
a) game consoles
b) digital cameras
c) PCs
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 126.
________ is an Android version.
a) Alpha and Beta
b) Cupcake and Donut
c) Eclair and Froyo
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 127.
_________ is an Android version.
a) Gingerbread
b) Honeycomb
c) Icecream Sandwich
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 128.
___________ is an Android version.
a) Jelly Bean
b) Kitkat and Lollipop
c) Marshmallow and Nought
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 129.
________ is a mobile Operating System created and developed by Apple Inc.
a) Android
b) iOS
c) Unix
d) None of these
Answer:
b) iOS

Question 130.
__________ is a mobile Operating System created and developed only for hardware of the Apple iPhone.
a) Android
b) iOS
c) Unix
d) None of these
Answer:
b) iOS

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 131.
________is the second most popular mobile Operating System globally.
a) Android
b) iOS
c) Unix
d) None of these
Answer:
b) iOS

Question 132.
________ is the top most popular mobile Operating System globally.
a) Android
b) iOS
c) Unix
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Android

Question 133.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 1
is the logo of _______OS.
a) Windows 7
b) Windows 8
c) Mac OS
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Windows 8

Question 134.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 2
is the logo of ______OS
a) Windows 7
b) Windows 8
c) Mac OS
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Mac OS

Question 135.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 3
is the logo of______OS
a) Linux
b) Apple iOS
c) Mac OS
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Linux

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 136.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 4
is the logo of _______OS
a) Windows 7
b) Apple iOS
c) Mac OS
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Apple iOS

Question 137.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 5
is the logo of _______OS
a) Android
b) Apple iOS
c) Mac OS
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Android

Question 138.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 6
is the logo of ______OS
a) Android
b) Apple iOS
c) Mac OS
d) Unix
Answer:
d) Unix

Part II

Short Answers

Question 1.
What is an operating system?
Answer:
An operating system is software which serves as the interface between a user and a computer.

Question 2.
What are the classifications of software?
Answer:
Software is classified into two types:

  • Application Software.
  • System Software.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 3.
What is a Real-Time operating system?
Answer:
It is multi-tasking and multi-user operating system designed for real-time-based applications such as robotics, weather, and climate prediction software, etc.

Question 4.
What is system software?
Answer:
The system software is a type of computer program that is designed to run the computer’s hardware and application programs. Example: Operating System.

Question 5.
What are the advantages of Distributed Operating system?
Answer:
Resources can be used in different locations. Improves interaction with customers and clients. Reduces load on host computers. The data can be exchanged via email and chat.

Question 6.
List any 4 system software.
Answer:

  1. Operating System.
  2. Language Processor.
  3. Compiler.
  4. Loader.

Question 7.
Explain Round Robin Scheduling.
Answer:
This type of scheduling is also known as the Time-sharing scheduling process. In this, each program is given a fixed amount of time to execute.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 8.
What are the functions of an operating system?
Answer:
The functions of an Operating System include file management, memory management, process management and device management and many more.

Question 9.
Mention different management techniques?
Answer:
Single continuous allocation, Partitioned allocation, Paged memory management, Segmented memory management.

Question 10.
What are the popular operating systems used in mobile devices?
Answer:
The mobile devices mostly use Android and iOS as mobile OS.

Question 11.
What is an Android?
Answer:
Android is a mobile operating system developed by Google, based on Linux, and designed primarily for touch screens mobile devices such as smartphones and tablets.

Question 12.
How OS cars be developed and released?
Answer:
OS can be either proprietary with a commercial license or can be open source.

Question 13.
What is Process Management?
Answer:
Process management is a function that includes creating and deleting processes and providing mechanisms for processes to communicate and synchronize with each other.

Question 14.
Write note on Microsoft Windows.
Answer:
Microsoft Windows is a family of proprietary operating systems designed by Microsoft Corporation and primarily targeted to Intel and AMD architecture-based computers.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 15.
What are the 3 levels of security?
Answer:

  1. File Access Level
  2. System Level
  3. Network Level.

Question 16.
Write about raspbion OS.
Answer:
Raspbion OS is a platform that’s designed to teach how to build a computer, what every part of a circuit board does, and finally how to code apps or games. The platform is available in pre-designed kits.

Question 17.
Write not on User Interface.
Answer:
User interface is one of the significant features in Operating System. The only way that users can make interact with a computer. If the computer interface is not user-friendly, the user slowly reduces the computer usage from their normal life.

Question 18.
What is the objective of memory management?
Answer:
The objective of the Memory Management process is to improve both the utilization of the CPU and the speed of the computer’s response to its users via main memory.

Question 19.
What is process management?
Answer:
Process management is a function that includes creating and deleting processes and providing mechanisms for processes to communicate and synchronize with each other.

Question 20.
What is the process? Give an example.
Answer:
A process is the unit of work in a computer. A word¬processing program being run by an individual user on a computer is a process.

Question 21.
Give any two examples for a process. Examples:
Answer:
A word-processing program being run by an individual user on a computer.
System task, such as sending output to a printer or screen.

Question 22.
What is the classification of a process?
Answer:
A computer consists of a collection of processes. They are classified as two categories:

  1. Operating System processes are executed by system code.
  2. User Processes which is executed by user code.

Question 23.
What are the requirements of a process?
Answer:
A process needs certain resources including CPU time, memory, files, and I/O devices to finish its task.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 24.
What is the major challenge in the computer and software industry?
Answer:
The major challenge in the computer and software industry is to protect user’s legitimate data from hackers.

Question 25.
Explain File Access level security.
Answer:
In order to access the files created by other people, you should have access permission. Permissions can either be granted by the creator of the file or by the administrator of the system.

Question 26.
How will you offer system-level security?
Answer:
System-level security is offered by the password in a multi-user environment.

Question 27.
Which OS offers system-level security?
Answer:
Both Windows and Linux offer the password facility to enable system-level security.

Question 28.
Write a note on network-level security.
Answer:
Network security is an indefinable one. So people from all over the world try to provide such security.

Question 29.
Write a note on Fault Tolerance.
Answer:
Fault Tolerance: The Operating Systems should be robust. When there is a fault, the Operating System should not crash, instead, the Operating System has fault tolerance capabilities and retains the existing state of the system.

Question 30.
How data is stored in a computer?
Answer:
Any type of data in a computer is stored in the form of files and directories/folders through File Allocation Table (FAT).

Question 31.
What will be stored in FAT?
Answer:
The FAT stores general information about files like filename, type (text or binary), size, starting address, and access mode.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 32.
What are the various file access modes?
Answer:
File access modes are:

  • Sequential.
  • Indexed.
  • Indexed-sequential.
  • Direct.
  • Relative.

Question 33.
Write note on file manager.
Answer:
The file manager of the operating system helps to create, edit, copy, allocate memory to the files and also updates the FAT,

Question 34.
What is multi-process?
Answer:
This is one of the features of Operating System, It has two or more processors for a single running process. Each processor works on different parts of the same task or on two or more different tasks. This feature is used for high-speed execution which increases the power of computing.

Question 35.
Write note on parallel processing.
Answer:
Processing takes place in parallel is known as parallel processing.

Question 36.
Write a note on Time Sharing,
Answer:
It allows the execution of multiple tasks or processes concurrently. For each task, a fixed time is allocated. This division of time is called Time- sharing.

Question 37.
Why distributed operating system is used?
Answer:
The Distributed Operating System is used to access shared data and files that reside in any machine around the world.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 38.
What are the advantages of GUI?
Answer:
A GUI lets you use your mouse to click icons, buttons, menus, and everything is clearly displayed on the screen using a combination of graphics and text elements.

Question 39.
What are the key features of OS?
Answer:
Features of the Operating System:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 7

Question 40.
What devices are controlled by OS?
Answer:
OS controls input, output and other peripheral devices such as disk drives, printers and electronic gadgets

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Part III

Explain in Brief

Question 1.
Write a short note on Android.
Answer:
Android:
Android is a mobile operating system developed by Google, based on Linux, and designed primarily for touch screens mobile devices such as smartphones and tablets. Google has further developed Android TV for televisions, Android Auto for cars, and Android Wear for wrist watches, each with a specialized user interface. Variants of Android are also used on game consoles, digital cameras, PCs, and other electronic gadgets.

Question 2.
List various OS with their symbol.
Answer:
Various Operating Systems:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 8

Question 3.
Explain the classification of Operating Systems according to availability.
Answer:
Classification of Operating Systems according to availability.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 9

Question 4.
Write a note on iOS – iPhone OS.
Answer:
iOS (formerly iPhone OS) is a mobile Operating System created and developed by Apple Inc., exclusively for its hardware. It is the Operating System that presently powers many of the company’s mobile devices, including the iPhone, iPad, and iPod Touch. It is the second most popular mobile Operating System globally after Android.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 5.
List the various Linux distributions.
Answer:
Linux Distributions:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 10

Question 6.
Write a note on single-user OS?
Answer:
An os allows only a single user to perform a task at a time. It is called a single user and single task os.
Example: MS-DOS.

Question 7.
Explain Android OS.
Answer:
Android is a mobile operating system developed by Google, based on Linux and designed primarily for touch screen mobile devices such as smartphones and tablets.

Google has further developed Android TV for televisions, Android Auto for cars and Android Wear for wrist watches, each with a specialized user interface.

Variants of Android are also used on game consoles, digital cameras, PCs and other electronic gadgets.

Question 8.
What are the various Android versions?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 11

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 9.
Define Process?
Answer:

  1. A process is a unit of work (program) in a computer.
  2. A word processing program being run by an individual user on a computer is a process.
  3. A system task, such as sending output to a printer or screen can also be called a process.

Question 10.
What are the points are considered when User Interface is designed for an application.
Answer:
The following points are considered when User
The interface is designed for an application.

  • The user interface should enable the user to retain this expertise for a longer time.
  • The user interface should also satisfy the customer based on their needs.
  • The user interface should save user’s precious time. Create graphical elements like Menus,Window,Tabs, Icons and reduce typing work will be an added advantage of the Operating System.
  • The ultimate aim of any product is to satisfy the customer. The User Interface is also to satisfy the customer.
  • The user interface should reduce number of errors committed by the user with a little practice the user should be in a position to avoid errors.

Question 11.
Name the activities done by os related to the process management?
Answer:

  1. Scheduling processes and threads on the CPU.
  2. Creating and deleting both user and system processes.
  3. Suspending and resuming processes.
  4. Providing mechanisms for process synchronization.
  5. Providing mechanisms for process communication.

Question 12.
What are the responsibilities of the Operating System in connection with memory management?
Answer:
The Operating System is responsible for the following activities in connection with memory management:

  • Keeping track of which portion of memory are currently being used and who is using them.
  • Determining which processes and data to move in and out of memory.
  • Allocation and de-allocation of memory blocks as needed by the program in main memory.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 13.
Write a note on the File Allocations Table (FAT).
Answer:

  1. Any type of data in a computer is stored in the form of flies and directories/folders through File Allocation Table (FAT).
  2. The FAT stores general information about files like file name, type (text or binary), size, starting address and access mode (sequential / indexed / indexed – sequential / direct / relative).

Question 14.
Explain File Management.
Answer:
File Management:
File management is an important function of OS which handles the data storage techniques. The operating system manages the files, folders, and directory systems on a computer.

Any type of data in a computer is stored in the form of files and directories/folders through File Allocation Table (FAT). The FAT stores general information about files like filename, type (text or binary), size, starting address and access mode (sequential/indexed/indexed-sequential/direct/ relative).

The file manager of the operating system helps to create, edit, copy, allocate memory to the files, and also updates the FAT. The OS also takes care of the files that are opened with proper access rights to read or edit them.

There are few other file management techniques available like Next-Generation File System (NTFS) and ext2 (Linux).

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 15.
Write a note on React OS.
React os is a window – alternative open-source os which is being developed on the principles of windows – without using any of the Microsoft code.

PART – IV

Explain in detail.

Question 1.
What is the Need for Operating System? Explain in detail.
Answer:
Operating System has become essential to enable the users to design applications without the knowledge of the computer’s internal structure of hardware. Operating System manages all the Software and Hardware.

Most of the time there are many different computer programmes running at the same time, they all need to access the Computers, CPU, Memory, and Storage. The need for an Operating System is basically – an interface between the user and hardware.

Interaction of Operating system and user
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 12

Operating System works as translator, while it translates the user request into machine language (Binary language), processes it and then sends it back to Operating System. Operating System converts processed information into the user-readable form.

Question 2.
What are the uses of the Operating System?
Answer:
The main use of the Operating System is:

  • To ensure that a computer can be used to extract what the user wants it to do.
  • Easy interaction between the users and computers.
  • Starting computer operation automatically when power is turned on (Booting).
  • Controlling Input and Output Devices.
  • Manage the utilization of main memory.
  • Providing security to user programs.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 3.
Explain User Interface?
Answer:
User Interface:
The user interface is one of the significant features of the Operating System. The only way that a user can make interacting with a computer. If the computer interface is not user-friendly, the user slowly reduces the computer usage from their normal life. This is the main reason for the key success of GUI (Graphical User Interface) based Operating System. The GUI is a window-based system with a pointing device to direct I/O, choose from menus, make selections, and a keyboard to enter text. Its vibrant colours attract the user very easily. Beginners are impressed by the help and pop-up window message boxes. Icons are playing a vital role in the particular application.

Now Linux distribution is also available as a GUI-based Operating System. The following points are considered when User Interface is designed for an application.

  1. The user interface should enable the user to retain this expertise for a longer time.
  2. The user interface should also satisfy the customer based on their needs.
  3. The user interface should save the user’s precious time. Create graphical elements like Menus, Window, Tabs, Icons and reduce typing work will be an added advantage of the Operating System.
  4. The ultimate aim of any product is to satisfy the customer. The User Interface is also designed to satisfy the customer.
  5. The user interface should reduce the number of errors committed by the user with a little practice the user should be in a position to avoid errors (Error Log File)

Question 4.
Explain distributed operating system.
Answer:
This feature takes care of the data and applications that are stored and processed on multiple physical locations across the world over the digital network. The Distributed Operating System is used to access shared data and files that reside in any machine around the world. The user can handle the data from different locations. The users can access as if it is available on their own computer.

The advantages of distributed Operating System are as follows:

  • A user at one location can make use of all the resources available at another location over the network.
  • Many computer resources can be added easily to the network.
  • Improves the interaction with the customers and clients.
  • Reduces the load on the host computer.

Question 5.
Explain process Management.
Answer:
Process Management:
Process management is a function that includes creating and deleting processes and providing mechanisms for processes to communicate and synchronize with each other. A process is a unit of work (program) in a computer. A word processing program being run by an individual user on a computer is a process. A system task, such as sending output to a printer or screen, can also be called a Process.

A computer consists of a collection of processes, they are classified into two categories:

  1. Operating System processes which is executed by system code.
  2. User Processes which is executed by user code.

All these processes can potentially execute concurrently on a single CPU. A process needs certain resources including CPU time, memory, files, and I/O devices to finish its task.

The Operating System is responsible for the following activities associated with the process management:

  1. Scheduling processes and threads on the CPUs.
  2. Creating and deleting both user and system processes.
  3. Suspending and resuming processes.
  4. Providing mechanisms for process synchronization.
  5. Providing mechanisms for process communication.

The following algorithms are mainly used to allocate the job (process) to the processor.

  1. FIFO
  2. SJF
  3. Round Robin
  4. Based on Priority

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

ACTIVITY

Question 1.
Draw a line between the operating system logo and the correct description.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 13

Question 2.
Discuss and provide suitable answers to the questions below.
Answer:
One of the functions of an Operating System is multi-tasking.
i) Explain one reason why multi-tasking is needed in an operating system.
Reasons:

  • CPU is used most of the time and never becomes idle.
  • The system looks fast as all the tasks run in parallel.
  • Short-time jobs are completed faster than long-time jobs.
  • Resources are used nicely.
  • Total read time is taken to execute program/job decreases.
  • Response time is shorter.

ii) State two other functions of an Operating System.
Disk Management:
The operating system manages the disk space. It manages the stored files and folders in a proper way.

Device Controlling:
The operating system also controls all devices attached to the computer. The hardware devices are controlled with the help of small software called a device driver.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Print controlling:
The operating system also controls the printing function. If a user issues two print commands at a time, it does not mix data of these files and prints them separately.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Pdf Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

11th Bio Botany Guide Reproductive Morphology Text Book Back Questions and Answers

Part – I

Choose the Right Answer: 

Question 1.
Vexillary aestivation is characteristic of the family
a. Fabaceae
b. Asteraceae
c. Solanaceae
d. Brassieaceae
Answer:
a. Fabaceae

Question 2.
Gynoecium with united carpels is termed as
a. Apocarpous
b. Multicarpellary
c. Syncarpous
d. None of the above
Answer:
c. Syncarpous

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

Question 3.
Aggregate fruit develops from
a. Multicarpellary apocarpous ovary
b. Multicarpellary syncarpous ovary
c. Multicarpellary ovary
d. Whole Inflorescence
Answer:
a. multicarpellary apocarpous ovary

Question 4.
In an inflorescence where flowers are borne laterally in an aeropetal succession, the position of the youngest floral bud shall be
a. Proximal
b. distal
c. Intercalary
d. Anywhere
Answer:
a. Proximal

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

Question 5.
A true fruit is the one where
a. only ovary of the flower develops into fruit.
b. ovary and caly x of the flower develops into fruit.
c. ovary, caly x, and thalamus of the flower develops into fruit.
d. All floral whorls of the flower develops is to fruit.
Answer:
a.only ovary of the flower develops into the fruit

Question 6.
Find out the floral formula for a besexual flower with bract, regular, pentamerous, distinct caly x and corolla , superior ovary without bracteole.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 1

Question 7.
Giving the technical terms for the following.
a. A sterile stamen …………………..
b. Stamens are united in one bunch …………….
c. Stamens attached to the petals ……………….
Answer:
a. staminode
b. monodelphous
c. Epipetalous (petalostemonous)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

Question 8.
Explain different types of placentation with example
Answer:
Marginal:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 2
It is with the plaentae along the marging of a unicarpellate ovary.
Example-Fabaceae.

Axile:

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 3
The placentae arises from the column in a compound ovary with septa.
Example-Hibiscus, tomato lemon

Superficial:

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 4

Ovules arise from the surfae of the septa.
Example: Nymphaeceae

Parietal:

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 5

It is the placentae on the ovary walls or upon intruding partitions of a unilocular, compound Ovary.
Example: Mustard, Argemone, cucumber.

Free-central:

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 6

It is with the placentae along the column in a compound ovary without septa.
Example: Caryophyllaceae, Dianthus, Primrose

Basal:

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 7

It is the placenta at the base of the ovary.
Example: Sunflower (asrteraceae) Marigold.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

Question 9.
Differences between aggregate fruit with multiple fruit.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 8

Question 10.
Explain different type of fleshy fruit with suitable example
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 9
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 10

Part II

11th Bio Botany Guide Reproductive Morphology Additional Important Questions and Answers

Choose the Right Answer:

Question 1.
Placentation in tomato and lemon is …………….
(a) parietal
(b) marginal
(c) free – central
(d) axile
Answer:
(d) axile

Question 2.
This is not a racemose Inflorescence
a. Spite
b. Catkin
c. Spadix
d. Cauliflower
Answer:
d.Cauliflower

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

Question 3.
Geocarpic fruits are seen in …………… .
(a) carrot
(b) groundnut
(c) radish
(d) turnip
Answer:
(b) groundnut

Question 4.
Pendulose spikes occur in
a. Piper nigrum
b. Dry za sativa
c. Tridax sp
d. Zeamays
Answer:
a. Piper nigrum

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

Question 5.
When the calyx is coloured and showy, it is called …………… .
(a) petaloid
(b) sepaloid
(c) bract
(d) spathe
Answer:
(a) petaloid

Question 6.
Parietal placentation occurs in
a. Hibiscus
b. Nymphaeaceae
c. Cucumber
d. Fabaceae
Answer:
c. Cucumber

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

Question 7.
Trace the correct F.D of Jxora coccinea

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 11
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 12

Question 8.
In Theobroma cocoa, the inflorescence arise from …………… .
(a) terminal shoot
(b) axillary part
(c) trunk of plant
(d) leaf node
Answer:
(c) trunk of plant

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

Question 9.
An example for a Pseudo fruit
a. Apple
b. Tomato
c. Pumpkin
d. Mango
Answer:
a. Apple

Question 10.
The fruit type intermediate between dehiscent and indehiscent is known as
a. Regma
b. Samara
c. Schizocarpic
d. Nut
Answer:
c. Schizocarpic

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

Question 11.
Thyrsus is a type of …………… inflorescence.
(a) raceme
(b) cyme
(c) mixed
(d) special
Answer:
(c) mixed

Question 12.
Br, Ebrl, O7 p3+3 A(3) Go – is
a. This F.D of male flower of musa
b. The F.D of crotalaria juncea
c. The F.D. of male flower of phyllanthus amaras
d. The F.D of male flower of cocos nucifera
Answer:
c.The F.D of male flower of phyllnthus amaras.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

Question 13.
Calyz is distinctly leaf-like, large often orange or white coloured as in mussenda it is known as
a. Campanulate sepals
b. Tubular sepals
c. Petaloid sepals
d. Sepaloid petals
Answer:
c. Petaloid sepals

Question 14.
If unisexual and bisexual flowers are seen in same plant then the plant is said to be …………… .
(a) polyphyllous
(b) polygamous
(c) hermaphroditic
(d) dioecious
Answer:
(b) polygamous

III. Match the following

Question 1.
(I) Spathe – A) Hibiscus sp
(II) Spikelet – B) Musa sp
(III) Epicaly – C) Paddy
(IV) Pislillate flower – D) Cocas Nucifera
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 13
Answer:
b. D-C-A-B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

Question 2.
(I) Epipetalous – A) G(2)
(II) Monoadeiphous – B) P(5)
(III) Inferior Ovary – C) A(a)
(IV) Gamophyllous – D) C(5)A5
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 14
Answer:
a. D-C-A-B

Question 3.
(I) Catkin – A) Cauliflower
(Il) Corymb – B) Mangifera indica
(III) Panicle – C) Coriandrumsatiuum
(IV) Umbel – C) Coriandrumsatiuum
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 15
Answer:
b. D-C-B-A

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

Question 4.
(I) A single female flower surrounded by a group of male – A) Coenanthum flowers-enclosed in an involucre
(II) Circular disclike fleshy open receptacle bearing – B) Hypanthodium pistillate at the centre & staminate flowers at periphery}
(III) Receptacle hollow male flowers towards ostiole female – C) Polychasialcyme and neutral in the middle
(IV) Central axis ends in a flower lateral axis branches repeatedly – D) cyathium
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 16
Answer:
b. D-A-B-C

Question 5.
(I) Persistent calyx – A) Calyx falls after the opening of a flower
(II) Deciduous calyx – B) Continue to grow with fruit and encloses it completely or partially
(III) Caduceus calyx – C) Calyx continues to be along with fruit forms a cup
(VI) Accresent calyx – D) Calyx falls during the early development stage of the flower
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 17
Answer:
C. C-A-D-B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

IV. Choose the wrong pair

Question 1.
a. Follicle – Calotropis
b. Silicula – Capsella
c. Loculicidal capsule – Lady’s finger
d. Legume – Castor castor
Answer:
d. Legume

Question 2.
a. Raceme – Crotalaria
b. Cyme – Cyathium
c. Special type – Hypanthodium
d. Mixed type – Thyssus
Answer:
b. Cyme – Cyathium

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

Question 3.
a. Monoecious – Coconut
b. Dioecious – Musa
c. Polygamous – Mangifera
d. Bisexual – Brinjal
Answer:
b. Dioecius- Musa

V. Fill up the tabulation with the right answer.

Question 1.

ConditionExplanationExample
1. Apostemonous__________________Cassia
2. PolyadelphonsFilaments connate into many bundles__________________
3. __________________Stamens adnate to petalsDatura
Syngenesious__________________Asteraceae

Answer:
1. Stamens distinct do not fuse with other parts
2. Citrus
3. Epipetalous
4. Anthers connate, filaments free

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

Question 2.

Attachment of AntherDescriptionExample
1. Basiifixed………………….Datura
2. ………………….The apex of filament is attached to the dorsal side of the antherHibiscus
3. VersatileThe filament is attached to the anther at the midpoint ……………..
4. …………..The filament is continued from the base to the apexRanunculus

Answer:
1. Base of another is attached to the tip of the filament
2. Dorsifixed
3. Grasses
4. Adnate

VI. Choose the wrong pair

Question 1.
1. Ripened ovary – Seed
2. Ovary wall – Testa & tegmen
3. Ferlised ovule – Seed
4. Integuments of – Pericarp ovule
Answer:
3. Ferlized ovule – Seed

Question 2.
1. Cremocarp – groundnut
2. Carcerulus – coriander
3. Lomentum – abutilon
4. Regma – castor
Answer:
4. Regma – castor

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

Question 3.
1. Caryopsis – paddy
2. Cypsela – coriander
3. Cremocarp – groundut
4. Lomentum – sunflower
Answer:
1. Caryopsis – paddy

VII. Identify the diagram & Label it correctly

Question 1.
Cymose inflorescen or simple dichasium
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 19
Answer:
Cymose inflorescen or simple dichasium
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 19
A-Bract
B-Old flower
C-Young flower

Question 2.
This is Papilionaceous Corolla
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 20
Answer:
This is Papilionaceous Corolla
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 20

A-Standard petal or corolla
B-Wing petals or alae
C-Keel petals or camia

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

Question 3.
The given diagram is spadix inflorescence
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 21
Answer:
The given diagram is spadix inflorescene
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 21
A-Central axis
B- Female flower
C- Male flower

Question 4.
The given diagram is verticillaster
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 22
Answer:
The given diagram is verticillaster
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 22
A-Central axis
B-Monocharial scorpioid lateral branches
C-Blder flowers

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

Question 5.
The diagram represents the tetradynamous condition of stamen
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 23
Answer:
The diagram represents the tetradynamous condition of stamen
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 23

A-4 long stamens
B-2 long stamens

VIII. Find out the true or false

Question 1.
(i) Asymmetric flowers cannot be divided into equal halves in any plane
(ii) The calyx of tridax is modified into a tubular structure
(iii) Heterostemonous stamens, have different lengths in the same flower
(iv) Hypanthium is a fleshy elevated stamina disk which is nectariferous in nature.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 24
Answer:
a. True – False – True – True

Question 2.
(i) Aeswation is the arrangement of sepals and petals in the flower when it open
(ii) Lodicule is the reduced scale-like perianth in the members of Poaceae
(iii) The walls of the ovary and septa form a cavity called locule
(iv) The branch that bears the flower is called the parental axis.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 25
Answer:
c. False – True – True – False

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

IX. In the following diagram what are the parts.

Question 1.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 26
Answer:
c. Peduncle – Involucre – Female flower – Male flower

X. Write down the edible parts of the following.

Question 1.

  1. Apple …….?
  2. Coconut …….?
  3. Jack fruit ……?
  4. Mango ……?
  5. Tomato ……?
  6. Orange …….?
  7. Pomegranate ……..?

Answer:

  1. Thalamus
  2. Oily endosperm
  3. Perianth
  4. Fleshy juicy mesocarp
  5. Epi, meso, and endocarp i.e (pericarp)
  6. Juicy hairs
  7. Testa of seed

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

XI. Read the following Assertion and Reason & Find the correct answer.

Question 1.
Assertion (A): Fruits are the products of pollination and fertilization
Reason (R): All floral whorls of a flower develop into a fruit
(a) A and R are correct. R is explaining A
(b) A and R are correct but R is not explaining Assertion
(c) A is true but R is wrong
(d) A is true but R is not explaining Assertion
Answer:
(c) A is true but R is wrong

Question 2.
Assertion (A): Homochlamydeous condition is prevalent in monocot
Reason (R) : Undifferentiated calyx and corolla is known as perianth
(a) A and R are correct and R is explaining A
(b) A and R are correct but R is not explaining Assertion
(c) A is true but R is wrong
(d) A is true but R is not explaining Assertion
Answer:
(a) A and R are correct and R is explaining A

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

Question 3.
Assertion (A): Almost all flowers are hermaphrodite
Reason (R): Male and female sex organs do not occur in the same flower
(a) A and R are correct R is explaining A
(b) A and R are correct but R is not explaining assertion
(c) A is true but R is wrong
(d) A is true but R is not explaining assertion
Answer:
(c) A is true but R is wrong

XII. Fill up the blanks by giving technical terms for the following.

Question 1.
a) The study of fruits …….
Answer:
Pomology

b) lkebana is an act of ……….
Answer:
Flower arrangement

c) The botanical name of Saffron flower ……………
Answer:
Crocus Sativum

d) The flower grows once in 12 years …………
Answer:
Kurinji (Strobilanthus kunthranus)

e) World’s largest fruit is …………………
Answer:
Lodoicea maldivica

f) King Herod’s palace, near dead sea, scientist have got a seed viable for …………. years
Answer:
20,000 years

g) The longest and largest inflorescence of any flowering plant is ………………
Answer:
Corypha umbraculifera (cudai palm)

h) The largest single flower is known sofae is ………………
Answer:
Rafflesia arnoldi

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

Give very short answers – 2 Marks

Question 1.
How will you define inflorescence?
Answer:
An inflorescence is a group of flowers arising from a branched or unbranched axis with a definite pattern.

Question 2.
Distinguish between Bract and Bracteole.
Answer:

Bract

Bracteole

  • Bract is that scale-like or structure leaf-like from which arises a flower
  • The presence of bract can be denoted as Bracteate its absence known as a bracteole
  • It is the scale-like or leaf-like structures seen on the pedicel of the flower just above the Bract.
  • The presence of bracteole in a flower is known as Bractolate, if it is absent it is known as Bracteolate

Question 3.
Distinguish between the Posterior and Anterior sides of a flower.
Answer:

Posterior side

Anterior side

The side of the flower facing the mother axis is called the Posterior side.
It is also known the part towards the plan
The side of the flower facing away from the mother axis is called the anterior side.
It is the part away from the plant.

Question 4.
Distinguish between Superior and Inferior Ovary.
Answer:

Superior Ovary

Inferior Ovary

It is the attachment of ovary relative to other floral parts – if the ovary with sepals, petals and stamens attached at the base of the ovary, e.g Hibiscus, MangiferaIf in the ovary the sepals petals and stamens attached at the base of the ovary it is called Inferior.
e.g Ixora or Musa.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

Question 5.
What is a sessile flower?
Answer:
A flower without a pedicel or stalk is said to be a sessile flower.

Question 6.
What is the use of Pappus?
Answer:
Pappus is the hair-like structures – (modification of calyx)
Pappus occur in Asteraceaemembers – They help in the dispersal of fruits.

Question 7.
Write the units of (a) Perianth and (b) Calyx.
Answer:
The units of (a) Perianth and (b) Calyx:

  1. Perianth – tepals and
  2. Calyx – sepals

Question 8.
Distinguish between Apocarpous & Syncarpous.
Answer:

Apocarpous

Syncarpous

A pistil containing two or more distinct carpels is known as apocarpous condition e.g AnnonaA pistil containing two or more carpels which write or cannot-it is known as a syncarpous condition, e.g citus, tomato

Question 9.
Define a Carpel & Locule.
Answer:

Carpel

Locule

Components of gynoecium usually made of one or more carples they may be distinct or cannot Usually no. of carpel equals the no.of loculeThe walls of the ovary and (crosswall of ovary from a cavity called lcoule Usually no.of locules equals the no of carples exception Bicarpellary unilocular condition in Asteraceae

Question 10.
Draw the structure of the Anthophore.
Answer:
Intermodal extension between Calyx and Coralla
A – Androecium
B – Gynoecium
C – Corolla
D – Anthophore
E – Calyx
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 27

Question 11.
Classify racemose Inflorescence.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 28

Question 12.
Draw the structure of Hypanthodium and label the parts.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 29
A – Ostiole
B – Male flowers
D – Neutral flower gall flower
C – Female flower
E – Receptacle

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

Question 13.
Compare Achene & Caryposis.
Answer:

Achene

Caryopsis

Indehiscent one-seeded fruit Develop from monocarpellary ovary Pericarp hard leathery-remain free from seed coat E.g. ClematisIndehiscent one-seeded fruit Develop from monocarpellary ovary Pericarp fused with seed coat E.g. Paddy

Question 14.
Compare Legume and Follicle
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 30

Question 15.
Differentiate between Dicotyledonous seed and Monocotyledonous seed.
Answer:

Dicot

Monocot

Two cotyledons occur Usually cotyledons store food and become thick and fleshy nourishes seedling during early development E.g.PeaOnly one cotyledon occur The endosperm persistent and nourishes the seedling during early development E.g. Castor

Question 16.
Differentiate between Albuminous and Non-albuminous seed.
Answer:

Albuminous seed

Non Albuminous seed

The cotyledons are then membranous and mature seeds have endosperm persistent and nourishes the seedling during its early development. Eg. Castor, SunflowerFood is stored in cotyledons and mature seeds are without endosperm.
Eg. Pea, Groundnut

Give Short Answers – 3 Marks

Question 1.
Differentiate between Racemose and Cymose Inflorescence.
Answer:

Characters

Racemose

Cymose

1. Main axisUnlimited growthLimited growth
2. Arrangement of flowersAcropetal successionBasipetal succession
3. OpeningCentripetalCentrifugal
4. Oldest flowerAt the baseAt the top

Question 2.
What is meant by Salver shaped or Hypocrateriform corolla. Give Eg.
Answer:
Petals of a flower fused to form a long narrow tube with spreading limbs are called salver-shaped or hypocrateriform corolla.
E.g. Ixora, Catharanthus sp.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

Question 3.
Differentiate between Corymbose and Umbellate inflorescence by drawing diagrams.
Answer:

Question 4.
Why do we call Thyrsus as Raceme of Cymes?
Answer:
a. The main axis is indefinite growth like raceme
b. But it bears pedicellate cymes on either side laterally. E.g. Ocimum sanctum.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 32

Question 5.
Differentiate between Cyathium and Coenanthium.
Answer:

Cyathium

Coenanthium

A single female flower surrounded by many male flowers enclosed by a common involucre Flowers are naked-Aclamydeous Extrafloral nectary is present in involucre E.g. EuphorbiaCircular disc-like fleshy open receptacle bearing many pistillate or female flowers at the center surrounded by many male or staminate flowers at the periphery. Eg. Dorsenia

Question 6.
Differentiate between Homogamous head & Heterogamous head inflorescence.
Answer:

Homogamous Head

Heterogamous Head

Only one kind of florets 2 Types Has only tongue florets- E.g. Launaea Has only tube florets – E.g. VernoruaIt has 2 types of florets -Tongue of ray, Tube of Disc Tongue florets seen towards the periphery, and Tube florets located at the centre of the inflorescence E.g. Helianths & Tridax

Question 7.
Distinguish between the two types of Monochasial Cyme.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 33

Question 8.
Distinguish between Anthophore and Androphore, Gynophore and Gynandrophore
Answer:

Anthophore

AndrophoreGynophore

Gynandrophore

The intermodal elongation between calyx and corolla E.g. Silene conoideaThe internal elongation between coralla and Aroecium E.g. GrewiaThe internal elongation between Androecium and cynoecium E.g. CapparisThe unified internal elongation between corolla and Androecium as well as between Androecium and gynoecium E.g gynandropsis

Question 9.
Distinguish between Connation & Adnation
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 34

Question 10.
Differentiate between Didynamous and Tetradynamous condition of the stamen.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 35

Question 11.
Explain the various types of Schizocarpic fruit.
Answer:
This fruit type of intermediate between dehiscent and indehiscent fruit. The fruit instead of dehiscing rather splits into a number of segments, each containing one or more seeds. They are of the following types:

  1. Cremocarp: Fruit develops from bicarpellary, syncarpous, inferior ovary and splitting into two one-seeded segments known as mericarps. e.g., Coriander and Carrot.
  2. Carcerulus: Fruit develops from bicarpellary, syncarpous, superior ovary and splitting into four one-seeded segments known as nutlets, e.g., Leucas, Ocimum and Abutilon.
  3. Lomentum: The fruit is derived from monocarpellary, unilocular ovary. A leguminous fruit, constricted between the seeds to form a number of one seeded compartments that separate at maturity, e.g., Desmodium, Arachis and Mimosa.
  4. Regma: They develop from tricarpellary, syncarpous, superior, trilocular ovary and splits into one-seeded cocci which remain attached to carpophore, e.g., Ricinus and Geranium.

Question 12.
Identify the plant & Write down the floral formula of the given floral diagram.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 36

Question 13.
Draw the floral diagram of Ixora Coccinea flower and write down floral formula.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 37

Question 14.
Classify the anthers based on their mode of attachment.
Answer:
The anthers based on their mode of attachment:

  1. Basifixed: (Innate) Base of anther is attached to the tip of filament, e.g., Brassica, Datura
  2. Dorsifixed: Apex of filament is attached to the dorsal side of the anther, e.g. Citrus, Hibiscus
  3. Versatile: Filament is attached to the anther at midpoint, e.g., Grasses
  4. Adnate: Filament is continued from the base to the apex of anther, e.g. Verbena, Ranunculus, Nelumbo.

Essay Questions – 5 Marks

Question 1.
Distinguish between Monoecious – Dioecious &Polygamous.
Answer:

MonoeciousDioeciousPolygamous
a.One house i.e male and female flowers present in the same flower . E.g. CoconutTwo house i.e male and and female flowers present on separate plants
E.g. Papaya
Here male flowers(staminate) female flowers (pistillate) & bisexual flowers occur in a single plant E.g. Mangifera

Question 2.
List out the significance of fruits.
Answer:
The significance of fruits:

  1. Edible part of the fruit is a source of food, energy for animals.
  2. They are source of many chemicals like sugar, pectin, organic acids, vitamins and minerals.
  3. The fruit protects the seeds from unfavourable climatic conditions and animals.
  4. Both fleshy and dry fruits help in the dispersal of seeds to distant places.
  5. In certain cases, fruit may provide nutrition to the developing seedling.
  6. Fruits provide source of medicine to humans.

Question 3.
What are the various parts of a typical flower.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 38

Question 4.
Detìne Aestivation Give an account of various types of aestivation?
Answer:

  • Aestivation: Arrangement of sepals and petals in the flowers bud.
  •  Types : There are 5 types
  •  Valvate : Margins of sepals and petals do not overlap but touch each other.
    Eg. Calyx — malvaceac inem bers .
  • Twisted or convolute or contorted: One margin of each petal or sepal overlapping on
    the other petal – Eg. Corolla of Malvaceae (china i-ose)
  • Imbricate : Sepals\ Petalsepals petaals – overlap irregularly one member of the whorl-
    exterior another interior other three one margin exterior other interior

3 types

  1.  Ascending-imbricate Eg. Cassia,
  2. . Descendingly-imbricate (vexillary aestivation) Eg. Clihoria,
  3. . Quincuncial- Eg. Guava
    Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 39

Question 5.
Define placentation and explain the various types of placentation with diagrams.
Answer:

Marginal:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 2
It is with the plaentae along the marging of a unicarpellate ovary.
Example-Fabaceae.
Axile:

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 3
The placentae arises from the column in a compound ovary with septa.
Example-Hibiscus, tomato lemon

Superficial:

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 4

Ovules arise from the surfae of the septa.
Example: Nymphaeceae

Parietal:

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 5

It is the placentae on the ovary walls or upon intruding partitions of a unilocular, compound Ovary.
Example: Mustard, Argemone, cucumber.

Free-central:

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 6

It is with the placentae along the column in a compound ovary without septa.
Example: Caryophyllaceae, Dianthus, Primrose

Basal:

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 7

It is the placenta at the base of the ovary.
Example: Sunflower (Asteraceae) Marigold.

Question 6.
Draw the floral diagram and flower of Cocos Nucifera and try to describe the flower with the floral diagram and floral formula.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 40
Male flower // Femle flower
Male flower of Cocos nucifera.

Male flower – Unisexual male Actinomorphic Bracteate, Bracteolate Incomplete
Perianth – 6 tepals – outer 3 and inner 3 two whorlsimbricate – apophyllous
Androecium – 6 stamens – outer 3 and inner 3 – free anther dithecous
Gynoecium – Absent – pistillode present

Female Flower – Unisexual female Actinomorphic Bracteole, ebracteolate, incomplete
Perianth – 6 tepals outer 3 -inner 3 outer valvate, inner imbricate apophyllous
Androecium – Absent staminode tricarpellary
Gynoecium – Ovary superior – tricarpellary trilocular syncarpous- ovules-Axile Placentation.

Question 7.
Describe the ovary types on the basis of its positive relative to other parts.
Answer:
The ovary can be divided into 3 types on this basis
Superior Ovary : (Flower Hypogynous)
It is the ovary with sepals, petals and stamens attached at the base of the ovary.

In feriror ovary : (Flower Epigynous)
It is the ovary with sepals, petals and stamens attached at the apex of the ovary.

Half inferior ovary : (Flower Perigynous) It is the ovary with sepals petals and stamens or hypanthium attached near the middle of the ovary

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 41

Question 8.
Give an account of Dry Dehiscent fruits.
Answer:

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 43

Question 9.
Give an account of dry indehiscent fruits.
Answer:

Type of fruitNature of ovarySpecial aspectsExample
1.AcheneMonocarpellary superior ovary ApocarpousApocarpous Fruit wall pericarp is free from seed coat.Clematis strawberry
2.CypselaBicarpellary inferior ovary syncarpousReduced scales Hairy or feathery – calyx lobes-PappusTridax helianthus
3.CaryopsisMonocarpellary superior ovaryFruit wall inseparably fused with seedOryza triticum
4.NutMulticarpellary syncarpous superior ovaryHard woody bony pericarpAnacardium
5.SamaraMonocarpellary superior ovaryPericarp (ovary wall) Develop into then wing-like structure – help in fruit dispersalPterocarpus
6.UtricleBicarpellary unilocular syncarpous superior ovaryPericarp loosely encloses the seed.Chenopodium.

Question 10.
Explain only the racemose type with the elongated main axis.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 42

Question 11.
Draw a chart depicting various types of Fruits.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 44

Question 12.
What is the significance of Seeds?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 45

Question 13.
Draw the tabulation showing various fruits & their edible part.
Answer:

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 46
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 47
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 48

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Pdf Chapter 9 Introduction to C++ Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Solutions Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

11th Computer Science Guide Introduction to C++ Text Book Questions and Answers

Book Evaluation
Part I

Choose The Correct Answer

Question 1.
Who developed C++?
a) Charles Babbage
b) Bjarne Stroustrup
c) Bill Gates
d) Sundar Pichai
Answer:
b) Bjarne Stroustrup

Question 2.
What was the original name given to C++?
a) CPP
b) Advanced C
c) C with Classes
d) Class with C
Answer:
c) C with Classes

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 3.
Who coined C++?
a) Rick Mascitti
b) Rick Bjarne
c) Bill Gates
d) Dennis Ritchie
Answer:
a) Rick Mascitti

Question 4.
The smallest individual unit in a program is:
a) Program
b) Algorithm
c) Flowchart
d) Tokens
Answer:
d) Tokens

Question 5.
Which of the following operator is extraction operator of C++?
a) >>
b) <<
c) <>
d) AA
Answer:
a) >>

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 6.
Which of the following statements is not true?
a) Keywords are the reserved words convey specific meaning to the C++ compiler.
b) Reserved words or keywords can be used as an identifier name.
c) An integer constant must have at least one digit without a decimal point.
d) Exponent form of real constants consists of two parts
Answer:
b) Reserved words or keywords can be used as an identifier name.

Question 7.
Which of the following is a valid string literal?
a) ‘A’
b) ‘Welcome’
c) 1232
d) “1232”
Answer:
d) “1232”

Question 8.
A program written in high level language is called as ………………………
a) Object code
b) Source code
e) Executable code
d) All the above
e) Executable code
Answer:
b) Source code

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 9.
Assume a=5, b=6; what will be result of a & b?
a) 4
b) 5
c) 1
d) 0
Answer:
a) 4

Question 10.
Which of the following is called as compile time operators?
a) size of
b) pointer
c) virtual
d) this
Answer:
a) sizeof

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Part – II

Very Short Answers

Question 1.
What is meant by a token? Name the token available in C++.
Answer:
C++ program statements are constructed by many different small elements such as commands, variables, constants, and many more symbols called operators and punctuators. Individual elements are collectively called Lexical units or Lexical elements or Tokens.
C++ has the following tokens:

  1. Keywords
  2. Identifiers
  3. Literals
  4. Operators
  5. Punctuators

Question 2.
What are keywords? Can keywords be used as identifiers?
Answer:
Keywords:
Keywords are the reserved words which convey specific meaning to the C++ compiler.
They are the essential elements to construct C++ programs.
Example:
int / float / auto / register Reserved words or keywords cannot be used as an identifier name.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 3.
The following constants are of which type?

  1. 39
  2. 032
  3. OXCAFE
  4. 04.14

Answer:

  1. 39 – Decimal
  2. 032 – Octal
  3. OXCAFE – Hexadecimal
  4. 04.14 – Decimal

Question 4.
Write the following real constants into the exponent form:
i) 23.197
ii) 7.214
iii) 0.00005
iv) 0.319
Answer:
i) 23.197 : 0.23197 E2 (OR) 2.3197 E1 (OR) 23197E-3
ii) 7.214 : 0.7214 E1 (OR) 72.14 E-1 (OR) 721.4 E-2 (OR) 7214E-3
iii) 0.00005 : 5E-5
iv) 0.319 : 3.19 E-l (OR) 31.9 E-2 (OR) 319 E-3

Question 5.
Assume n=10; what will be result of n>>2;?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++ 1

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 6.
Match the following:

A

B

(a) Modulus(1) Tokens
(b) Separators(2) Remainder of a division
(c) Stream extraction(3) Punctuators
(d) Lexical Units(4) get from

Answer:
a) 2
b) 3
c) 4
d) 1

Part – III

Short Answers

Question 1.
Describe the differences between keywords and identifiers.
Answer:
Keywords:

  • Keywords are the reserved words which convey specific meaning to the C++ compiler.
  • They are essential elements to construct C++ programs.
  • Most of the keywords are common to C, C++, and Java.

Identifiers:

  • Identifiers are the user-defined names given to different parts of the C++ program.
  • They are the fundamental building blocks of a program.
  • Every language has specific rules for naming the identifiers.

Question 2.
Is C++ case sensitive? What is meant by the term “case sensitive”?
Answer:
Yes. C++ is case sensitive as it treats upper and lower-case characters differently.
Example: NUM, Num, num are different in C++.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 3.
Differentiate “=” and “==”.
Answer:

  • ‘=’ is an assignment operator which is used to assign a value to a variable which is on the left hand side of an assignment statement.
  • ‘=’operator copies the value at the right side
    of the operator to the left side variable. Ex. num = 10; means 10 assign to the variable num.
  • ‘= =’ is a relational operator. It is used to compare both operands are same or not.
  • Ex. num = = 10 means it compare num value with 10 and returns true(l) if both are same or returns false(0)

Question 4.
Assume a=10, b=15; What will be the value of a∧b?
Answer:
Bitwise XOR (∧) will return 1 (True) if only one of the operand is having a value 1 (True). If both are True or both are False, it will return 0 (False).
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++ 2

Question 5.
What is the difference between “Run time error” and “Syntax error”?
Answer:
Run time Error:

  • A run time error occurs during the execution of a program. It occurs because of some illegal operation that takes place.
  • For example, if a program tries to open a file which does not exist, it results in a run-time error.

Syntax Error:

  • Syntax errors occur when grammatical rules of C++ are violated.
  • For example: if you type as follows, C++ will throw an error.
    cout << “Welcome to Programming in C++”

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 6.
What are the differences between “Logical error” and “Syntax error”?
Answer:

  • A Program has not produced the expected result even though the program is grammatically correct. It may be happened by the wrong use of variable/operator/order of execution etc. This means, the program is grammatically correct, but it contains some logical error. So, a Semantic error is also called a “Logic Error”.
  • Syntax errors occur when grammatical rules of C++ are violated.

Question 7.
What is the use of a header file?
Answer:
Header files contain definitions of Functions and Variables, which are imported or used into any C++ program by using the preprocessor #include statement. Header files have an extension “.h” which contains C++ function declaration and macro definition.
Example: #include

Question 8.
Why is main function special?
Answer:
Every C++ program must have a main function. The main() function is the starting point where all C++ programs begin their execution. Therefore, the executable statements should be inside the main() function.

Question 9.
Write two advantages of using include compiler directive.
Answer:

  1. The program is broken down into modules, thus making it more simplified.
  2. More library functions can be used, at the same time size of the program is retained.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 10.
Write the following in real constants.

  1. 15.223
  2. 211.05
  3. 0.00025

Answer:

  1. 15.223 → 1.5223E1 → 0.15223E2 → 15223E-3
  2. 211.05 → 2.1105E2 → 21105 E-2
  3. 0.00025 → 2.5E-4

Part – IV

Explain In Detail

Question 1.
Write about Binary operators used in C++.
Answer:
Binary Operators require two operands:
Arithmetic operators that perform simple arithmetic operations like addition, subtraction, multiplication, division (+, -, *, %, /), etc. are binary operators which require a minimum of two operands.

Relational operators are used to determining the relationship between its operands. The relational operators (<, >, >=, <=, ==, !=) are applied on two operands, hence they are binary operators. AND, OR (logical operator) both are binary operators. The assignment operator is also a binary operator (+=, – =, *=, /=, %=).

Question 2.
What are the types of Errors?
Answer:
COMMON TYPES OF ERRORS

Type of Error

Description

Syntax ErrorSyntax is a set of grammatical rules to construct a program. Every programming language has unique rules for constructing the sourcecode.
Syntax errors occur when grammatical rules of C++ are violated.
Example: if we type as follows, C++ will throw an error.
cout << “Welcome to C++”
As per grammatical rules of C++, every executable statement should terminate with a semicolon. But, this statement does not end with a semicolon.
Semantic error’A Program has not produced expected result even though the program is grammatically correct. It may be happened by the wrong use of variable/operator/order of execution etc. This means, the program is grammatically correct, but it contains some logical error. So, Semantic error is also called a “Logic Error”.
Run­ time error A run time error occurs during the execution of a program. It occurs because of some illegal operation that takes place.
For example, if a program tries to open a file which does not exist, it results in a run-time error.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 3.
Assume a=15, b=20; What will be the result of the following operations?
a) a&b
b) a|b
c) aAb
d)a>>3
e) (~b)
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++ 3

11th Computer Science Guide Introduction to C++ Additional Questions and Answers

Choose The Correct Answer

Question 1.
The latest standard version published in December 2017 as ISO/IEC …………….. which is informally known as C++ 17.
(a) 14882 : 1998
(b) 14883 : 2017
(c) 14882 : 2017
(d) 14882 : 2000
Answer:
(c) 14882 : 2017

Question 2.
C++ language was developed at ……………….
a) Microsoft
b) Borland International
c) AT & T Bell Lab
d) Apple Corporation
Answer:
c) AT & T Bell Lab

Question 3.
An integer constant is also called……………..
(a) fixed point constant
(b) floating-point constant
(c) real constants
(d) Boolean literals
Answer:
(a) fixed point constant

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 4.
C++supports ………… programming paradigms.
a) Procedural
b) Object-Oriented
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 5.
…………….. relational operators are binary operators.
(a) 7
(b) 8
(c) 6
(d) 2
Answer:
(c) 6

Question 6.
C++ is a superset (extension) of …………….. language.
a) Ada
b) BCPL
c) Simula
d) C
Answer:
d) C

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 7
…………….. used to label a statement.
(a) colon
(b) comma
(c) semicolon
(d) parenthesis
Answer:
(a) colon

Question 8.
The name C++ was coined by …………….
a) Lady Ada Lovelace
b) Rick Mascitti
c) Dennis Ritchie
d) Bill Gates
Answer:
b) Rick Mascitti

Question 9.
IDE stands for ……………..
(a) Integrated Development Environment
(b) International Development Environment
(c) Integrated Digital Environment
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) Integrated Development Environment

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 10.
Till 1983, C++ was referred to as …………………
a) New C
b) C with Classes
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 11.
…………….. data type signed more precision fractional value.
(a) char
(b) short
(c) long double
(d) signed doubles
Answer:
(c) long double

Question 12.
C# (C-Sharp), D, Java, and newer versions of C languages have been influenced by ………………. language.
a) Ada
b) BCPL
c) Simula
d) C++
Answer:
d) C++

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 13.
…………….. manipulator is the member of iomanip header file.
(a) setw
(b) setfill
(c) setf
(d) all the above
Answer:
(d) all the above

Question 14.
C++is ……………… language.
a) Structural
b) Procedural
c) Object-oriented
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Object-oriented

Question 15.
C++ includes ………………..
a) Classes and Inheritance
b) Polymorphism
c) Data abstraction and Encapsulation
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 16.
C language does not allow ………………
a) Exception handling
b) Inheritance
c) Function overloading
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 17.
……………. is a set of characters which are allowed to write a C++ program.
a) Character set
b) Tokens
c) Punctuators
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Character set

Question 18.
A character represents any …………………..
a) Alphabet
b) Number
c) Any other symbol (special characters)
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 19.
Most of the Character set, Tokens, and expressions are very common to C based programming languages like ………………..
a) C++
b) Java
c) PHP
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 20.
…………… is a white space.
a) Horizontal tab
b) Carriage return
c) Form feed
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 21.
C++ program statements are constructed by many different small elements called……………….
a) Lexical units
b) Lexical elements
c) Tokens
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 22.
…………… is a C++token.
a) Keywords
b) Identifiers and Literals
c) Punctuators and Operators
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 23.
The smallest individual unit in a program is known as a ……………
a) Token
b) Lexical unit
c) Token or a Lexical unit
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Token or a Lexical unit

Question 24.
………………… are the reserved words which convey specific meaning to the C++ compiler.
a) Keywords
b) Identifiers and Literals
c) Punctuators and Operators
d) All the above
Answer:
a) Keywords

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 25.
………………. are the essential elements to construct C++ programs.
a) Keywords
b) Identifiers and Literals
c) Punctuators and Operators
d)All the above
Answer:
a) Keywords

Question 26.
Most of the keywords are common to …………… languages.
a) C, and C++
b) C++ and Java
c) C, C++ and Java
d) None of these
Answer:
c) C, C++ and Java

Question 27.
……………. is a case sensitive programming language.
a) C, and C++
b) C++ and Java
c) C, C++ and Java
d) None of these
Answer:
c) C, C++ and Java

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 28.
In ……………. language, all the keywords must be in lowercase.
a) C, and C++
b) C++ and Java
c) C, C++ and Java
d) None of these
Answer:
c) C, C++ and Java

Question 29.
……………… is a new keyword in C++.
a) using
b) namespace
c) std
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 30.
…………….. is a new keyword in C++.
a) bal
b) static_cast
c) dynamic_cast
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 31.
………….. is a new keyword in C++.
a) true
b) false
c) Both A and B
c) None of these
Answer:
c) None of these

Question 32.
Identifiers are the user-defined names given to …………..
a) Variables and functions
b)Arrays
c) Classes
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 33.
Identifiers containing a …………. should be avoided by users.
a) Double underscore
b) Underscore
c) number
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Double underscore

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 34.
The first character of an identifier must be an ………….
a) Alphabet
b) Underscore (_)
c) Alphabet or Underscore (_)
c) None of these
Answer:
c) Alphabet or Underscore (_)

Question 35.
Only …………… is permitted for the variable name.
a) Alphabets
b) Digits
c) Underscore
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 36.
Identify the correct statement from the following.
a) C++ is case sensitive as it treats upper and lower-case characters differently.
b) Reserved words or keywords cannot be used as an identifier name.
c) As per ANSI standards, C++ places no limit on its length.
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 37.
ANSI stands for …………..
a) All National Standards Institute
b) Advanced National Standards Institute
c) American National Standards Institute
d) None of these
Answer:
c) American National Standards Institute

Question 38.
Identify the invalid variable name from the following.
a) num-add
b) this
c) 2myfile
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 39.
Identify the odd one from the following.
a) Int
b) _add
c) int
d) tail marks
Answer:
c) int

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 40.
……………… are data items whose values do not change during the execution of a program.
a) Literals
b) Constants
c) Identifiers
d) Both A and B
Answer:
d) Both A and B

Question 41.
…………. is a type constant in C++.
a) Boolean constant
b) Character constant
c) String constant
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 42.
…………… is a type of numeric constant.
a) Fixed point constant
b) Floating-point constant
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 43.
……………. are whole numbers without any fractions.
a) Integers
b) Real constant
c) Floating-point constant
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Integers

Question 44.
In C++, there are …………….. types of integer constants.
a) Two
b) Three
c) Four
d) Six
Answer:
b) Three

Question 45.
In C++, ……………… is a type of integer constant.
a) Decimal
b) Octal
c) Hexadecimal
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 46.
Any sequence of one or more digits (0 …. 9) is called ……………… integer constant.
a) Decimal
b) Octal
c) Hexadecimal
d) All the above
Answer:
a) Decimal

Question 47.
Any sequence of one or more octal values (0 …. 7) that begins with 0 is considered as a(n) …………… constant.
a) Decimal
b) Octal
c) Hexadecimal
d) All the above
Answer:
b) Octal

Question 48.
When you use a fractional number that begins with 0, C++ has consider the number as ………………..
a) An integer not an Octal
b) A floating-point not an Octal
c) An integer not a Hexadecimal
d) None of these
Answer:
a) An integer not an Octal

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 49.
Any sequence of one or more Hexadecimal values (0 …. 9, A …. F) that starts with Ox or OX is considered as a(n) ………….. constant.
a) Decimal
b) Octal
c) Hexadecimal
d) All the above
Answer:
c) Hexadecimal

Question 50.
Identify the invalid octal constant,
a) 05,600
b) 04.56
c) 0158
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 51.
Identify the valid hexa decimal constant
a) 0X1,A5
b) 0X.14E
c) CAFE
d) CPP
Answer:
c) CAFE

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 52.
The suffix ………….. added with any constant forces that to be represented as a long constant.
a) L or I
b) U or u
c) LO
d) Lg
Answer:
a) L or I

Question 53.
The suffix …………… added with any constant forces that to be represented as an unsigned constant.
a) L or I
b) U or u
c) US
d) us
Answer:
b) U or u

Question 54.
A _______ constant is a numeric constant having a fractional component.
a) Real
b) Floating point
c) Real or Floating point
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Real or Floating point

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 55.
……………. constants may be written in fractional form or in exponent form.
a) Real
b) String
c) Character
d) Integer constant
Answer:
a) Real

Question 56.
Exponent form of real constants consists of ………….. parts.
a) three
b) two
c) four
d) five
Answer:
b) two

Question 57.
Exponent form of real constants consists of ……………. part.
a) Mantissa
b) Exponent
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 58.
The mantissa must be a(n) …………. constant.
a) Integer
b) Real
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 59.
58.64 can be written as …………….
a) 5.864E1
b) 0.5864E2
c) 5864E-2
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 60.
Internally boolean true has value ……………
a) 0
b) 1
c) -1
d) None of these
Answer:
b) 1

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 61.
Internally boolean false has value …………….
a) 0
b) 1
c) -1
d) None of these
Answer:
a) 0

Question 62.
A character constant is any valid single character enclosed within ………….. quotes.
a) Double
b) Single
c) No
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Single

Question 63.
Identify the odd one from the following,
a) ‘A’
b) ‘2’
c) ‘$’
d) “A”
Answer:
d) “A”

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 64.
The value of a single character constant has an equivalent ………….. value.
a) BCD
b) ASCII
c) Nibble
d) None of these
Answer:
b) ASCII

Question 65.
The ASCII value of ‘A’ is …………..
a) 65
b) 97
c) 42
d) 75
Answer:
a) 65

Question 66.
The ASCII value of ‘a’ is ……………
a) 65
b) 97
c) 42
d) 75
Answer:
b) 97

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 67.
C++ allows certain non-printable characters represented as ……………. constants.
a) Integer
b) Real
c) Character
d) String
Answer:
c) Character

Question 68.
The non-printable characters can be represented by using …………………………
a) Escape sequences
b) String
c) Boolean
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Escape sequences

Question 69.
An escape sequence is represented by a backslash followed by …………. character(s).
a) One
b) Two
c) One or Two
d) None of these
Answer:
c) One or Two

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 70.
______ is escape sequence for audible or alert bell.
a) \a
b)\b
c) \n
d)\f
Answer:
a) \a

Question 71
_______ is escape sequence for backspace.
a)\a
b)\b
c) \n
d) \f
Answer:
b)\b

Question 72.
______ is escape sequence for form feed.
a)\a
b)\b .
c) \n
d) \f
Answer:
d) \f

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 73.
______ is escape sequence for new line or line feed.
a) a
b)\b
c)\n
d)\f
Answer:
c)\n

Question 74.
……………. is escape sequence for carriage return.
a)\r
b)\c
c)\n
d)\cr
Answer:
a)\r

Question 75.
______ is escape sequence for horizontal tab.’
a)\a ‘
b)\b
c)\t
d)\f
Answer:
c)\t

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 76.
_______ is escape sequence for vertical tab.
a)\v
b)\b
c) \t
d) \f
Answer:
a)\v

Question 77.
………………. is escape sequence for octal number.
a) \On
b) \xHn
c)\O
d)O
Answer:
a) \On

Question 78.
______ is escape sequence for hexadecimal number.
a) \On
b) \xHn
c)\O
d)\O
Answer:
b) \xHn

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 79
______ ¡s escape sequence for Null character.
a) \On
b) \xHn
c)\O
d)\n
Answer:
c)\O

Question 80.
______ ¡s escape sequence for Inserting?
a) \?
b) \\
c)\’
d)\”
Answer:
a) \?

Question 81.
______ is an escape sequence for inserting a single quote.
a)\?
b)\\
c) \‘
d) \“
Answer:
c) \‘

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 82.
______ is escape sequence for inserting double quote.
a)\?
b)\\
c) \‘
d) \“
Answer:
d) \“

Question 83.
______ is escape sequence for inserting
a)\?’
b)\\
c) \‘
d) \“
Answer:
b)\\

Question 84.
ASCII was first developed and published in 1963 by the …………. Committee, a part of the American Standards Association (ASA).
a) X3
b) A3
c) ASA
d) None of these
Answer:
a) X3

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 85.
Sequence of characters enclosed within ………. quotes are called as String literals,
a) Single
b) Double
c) No
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Double

Question 86.
By default, string literals are automatically added with a special character………..at the end.
a) ‘\0’ (Null)
b) ‘\S’
c) V
d) None of these
Answer:
a) ‘\0’ (Null)

Question 87.
Identify the valid string constant from the following.
a) “A”
b) “Welcome”
c) “1234”
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 88.
The symbols which are used, to do some mathematical or logical operations are called as ………………
b) Operands
d) None of these
a) Operators
c) Expressions
Answer:
a) Operators

Question 89.
The data items or values that the operators act upon are called as ……………
a) Operators
b) Operands
c) Expressions
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Operands

Question 90.
In C++, the operators are classified as ………… types on the basis of the number of operands,
a) two
b) three
c) four ,
d) five
Answer:
b) three

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 91.
………….. operators require only one operand.
a) Unary
b) Binary
c) Ternary
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Unary

Question 92.
…………… operators require two operands.
a) Unary
b) Binary
c) Ternary
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Binary

Question 93.
………… operators require three operands.
a) Unary
b) Binary
c) Ternary
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Ternary

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 94.
C++ operators are classified as …………… types
a) 7
b) 3
c) 10
d) 4
Answer:
a) 7

Question 95.
…………… operators perform simple operations like addition, subtraction, multiplication, division etc.
a) Logical
b) Relational
c) Arithmetic
d) Bitwise
Answer:
c) Arithmetic

Question 96.
…………… operator is used to find the remainder of a division.
a) /
b) %
c) *
d) **
Answer:
b) %

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 97.
…………….. operator is called as Modulus operator.
a) /
b)%
c) *
d) **
Answer:
b)%

Question 98.
An increment or decrement operator acts upon a …………….. operand and returns a new value,
a) Single
b) Two
c) Three
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Single

Question 99.
………….. is a unary operator.
a) ++
b) —
c) Both ++ and —
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both ++ and —

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 100.
The increment operator adds …………….. to its operand.
a) 1
b) 0\
c) -1
d) None of these
Answer:
a) 1

Question 101.
The decrement operator subtracts …………… from its operand.
a) 1
b) 0\
c) -1
d) None of these
Answer:
a) 1

Question 102.
The …………….. operators can be placed either as prefix (before) or as postfix (after) to a variable.
a) ++
b) –
c) ++or–
d) None of these
Answer:
c) ++or–

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 103.
With the prefix version, C++ performs the increment/decrement………….. using the operand.
a) Before
b) After
c) When required
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Before

Question 104.
With the postfix version, C++ performs the increment/decrement…………….. using the operand.
a) Before
b) After
c) When required
d) None of these
Answer:
b) After

Question 105.
With the postfix version, C++ uses the value of the operand in evaluating the expression …………… incrementing /decrementing its present value.
a) Before
b) After
c) When required
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Before

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 106.
……………… operators are used to determining the relationship between its operands.
a) Logical
b) Relational
c) Arithmetic
d) Bitwise
Answer:
b) Relational

Question 107.
When the relational operators are applied on two operands, the result will be a …………… value.
a) Boolean
b) Numeric
c) Character
d) String
Answer:
a) Boolean

Question 108.
C++ provides …………. relational operators.
a) Seven
b) six
c) Eight
d) Five
Answer:
b) six

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 109.
All six relational operators are ……………
a) Unary
b) Binary
c) Ternary
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Binary

Question 110.
A logical operator is used to evaluate …………… expressions.
a) Logical and Relational
b) Logical
c) Relational
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Logical and Relational

Question 111.
Which logical operator returns 1 (True), if both expressions are true, otherwise it returns 0 (false)?
a) AND
b) OR
c) NOT
d) All the above
Answer:
a) AND

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 112.
Which logical operator returns 1 (True) if either one of the expressions is true. It returns 0 (false) if both the expressions are false?
a) AND
b) OR
c) NOT
d) All the above
Answer:
b) OR

Question 113.
Which logical operator simply negates or inverts the true value?
a) AND
b) OR
c) NOT
d) All the above
Answer:
c) NOT

Question 114.
AND, OR both are ……………. operators.
a) Unary
b) Binary
c) Ternary
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Binary

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 115.
NOT is a(n) …………… operator.
a) Unary
b) Binary
c) Ternary
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Unary

Question 116.
Identify the correct statement from the following.
a) The logical operators act upon the operands that are themselves called logical expressions.
b) Bitwise operators work on each bit of data and perform the bit-by-bit operations.
c) There are two bitwise shift operators in C++, Shift left (<<) & Shift right (>>).
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 117.
In C++, there are …………… kinds of bitwise operator.
a) Three
b) Four
c) Two
d) Five
Answer:
a) Three

Question 118.
…………. is a type of bitwise operator.
a) Logical bitwise operators
b) Bitwise shift operators
c) One’s compliment operators
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 119.
______ will return 1 (True) if both the operands are having the value 1 (True); Otherwise, it will return 0 (False).
a) Bitwise AND (&) .
b) Bitwise OR (|)
c) Bitwise Exclusive OR(A)
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Bitwise AND (&)

Question 120.
………… will return 1 (True) if any one of the operands is having a value 1 (True); It returns 0 (False) if both the operands are having the value 0 (False)
a) Bitwise AND (&)
b) Bitwise OR (|)
c) Bitwise Exclusive OR(A)
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Bitwise OR (|)

Question 121.
…………. will return 1 (True) if only one of the operand is having a value 1 (True).If both are True or both are False, it will return 0 (False).
a) Bitwise AND (&)
b) Bitwise OR (|)
c) Bitwise Exclusive OR(A)
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Bitwise Exclusive OR(A)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 122.
There are …………… bitwise shift operators in C++.
a) Three
b) Two
c) Four
d) Five
Answer:
b) Two

Question 123.
……………. is a type of * .wise shift operator in
C++.
a) Shift left
b) Shift right
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 124.
……………. is a type of bitwise shift left operator in C++.
a) <<
b) >>
c) &&
d) ||
Answer:
a) <<

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 125.
…………. is a type of bitwise shift right operator in C++.
a) <<
b) >>
c) &&
d) ||
Answer:
b) >>

Question 126.
The value of the left operand is moved to the left by the number of bits specified by the right operand using …………. operator.
a) <<
b) >>
c) &&
d) ||
Answer:
a) <<

Question 127.
The value of the left operand is moved to right by the number of bits specified by the right operand using …………. operator.
a) <<
b) >>
c) &&
d) ||
Answer:
b) >>

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 128.
Right operand should be an unsigned integer for …………… operator.
a) Arithmetic
b) Relational
c) Bitwise Shift
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Bitwise Shift

Question 129.
………… is the bitwise one’s complement operator.
a) <<
b) >>
c) &&
d) ~
Answer:
d) ~

Question 130.
The bitwise ………….. operator inverts all the bits in a binary pattern, that is, all l’s become 0 and all 0’s become 1.
a) Shift left
b) Shift right
c) One’s complement
d) None of these
Answer:
c) One’s complement

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 131.
…………… is a unary operator.
a) Shift left
b) Shift right
c) Bitwise one’s complement
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Bitwise one’s complement

Question 132.
………….. operator is used to assigning a value to a variable which is on the left-hand side of an assignment statement.
a) Assignment
b) Logical
c) Bitwise
d) Conditional
Answer:
a) Assignment

Question 133.
…………. is commonly used as the assignment operator in all computer programming languages.
a) :=
b) ==
c) =
d) None of these
Answer:
c) =

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 134.
…………… operator copies the value at the right side of the operator to the left side variable,
a) Assignment
b) Logical
c) Bitwise
d) Conditional
Answer:
a) Assignment

Question 135.
The assignment operator is a(n) ……………….. operator.
a) Unary
b) Binary
c) Ternary
d) Conditional
Answer:
b) Binary

Question 136.
How many conditional operators are used in C++?
a) one
b) two
c) three
d) four
Answer:
a) one

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 137.
…………….. operator is a Ternary Operator.
a) Assignment
b) Logical
c) Bitwise
d) Conditional
Answer:
d) Conditional

Question 138.
…………… operator is used as an alternative to if … else control statement.
a) Assignment
b) Logical
c) Bitwise
d) Conditional
Answer:
d) Conditional

Question 139.
……………. is a pointer to a variable operator.
a) &
b) *
c) →
d) → *
Answer:
b) *

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 140.
…………… is an address operator.
a) &
b) *
c) →
d) →*
Answer:
a) &

Question 141.
……………. is a direct component selector operator.
a) .(dot)
b) *
c) →
d) →*
Answer:
a) .(dot)

Question 142.
…………… is an indirect component selector operator.
a) .(dot)
b) *
c) →
d) →*
Answer:
c) →

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 143.
…………. is a dereference operator.
a) . (dot)
b) .*
c) →
d) →*
Answer:
b) .*

Question 144.
……………… is a dereference pointer to class member operator.
a) . (dot)
b) .*
c) →
d) →*
Answer:
d) →*

Question 145.
……………. is a scope resolution operator.
a) .(dot)
b) .*
c) : :
d) →*
Answer:
c) : :

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 146.
The operands and the operators are grouped in a specific logical way for evaluation is called as………………
a) Operator precedence
b) Operator association
c) Hierarchy
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Operator association

Question 147.
Which operator is lower precedence?
a) Arithmetic
b) Logical
c) Relational
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Logical

Question 148.
Which operator is higher precedence?
a) Arithmetic
b) Logical
c) Relational
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Arithmetic

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 149.
Which operator is the lowest precedence?
a) Assignment
b) Comma
c) Conditional
d) Arithmetic
Answer:
b) Comma

Question 150.
In C++, asterisk ( * ) is used for ……………… purpose.
a) Multiplication
b) Pointer to a variable
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 151.
……………. punctuator indicates the start and the end of a block of code.
a) Curly bracket { }
b) Paranthesis ()
c) Sqaure bracket [ ]
d) Angle bracket < >
Answer:
a) Curly bracket { }

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 152.
……………. punctuator indicates function calls and function parameters.
a) Curly bracket { }
b) Paranthesis ()
c) Square bracket [ ]
d) Angle bracket < >
Answer:
b) Paranthesis ()

Question 153.
……………. punctuator indicates single and multidimensional arrays.
a) Curly bracket { }
b) Paranthesis ()
c) Square bracket [ ]
d) Angle bracket < >
Answer:
c) Square bracket [ ]

Question 154.
……………… punctuator is used as a separator in an expression.
a) Comma,
b) Semicolon;
c) Colon :
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Comma,

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 155.
Every executable statement in C++ should terminate with a ………..
a) Comma,
b) Semicolon;
c) Colon:
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Semicolon;

Question 156.
……………… punctuator is used to label a statement.
a) Comma,
b) Semicolon;
c) Colon:
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Colon:

Question 157.
………….. is a single line comment.
a) /I
b) /* ……..*/
c) \\
d) None of these
Answer:
a) /I

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 158.
……………… is a multi line comment.
a) //
b) /* */
c) \\
d) None of these
Answer:
b) /* */

Question 159.
C++ provides the operator to get input. .
a) >>
b) <<
c) ||
d) &&
Answer:
a) >>

Question 160.
…………….. operator extracts the value through the keyboard and assigns it to the variable on its right.
a) >>
b) <<
c) ||
d) &&
Answer:
a) >>

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 161.
………………. operator is called as “Stream extraction” or “get from” operator.
a) >>
b) <<
c) ||
d) &&
Answer:
a) >>

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 162.
Get from operator requires …………….. operands.
a) three
b) two
c) four
d) five
Answer:
b) two

Question 163.
…………….. is the operand of get from the operator.
a) Predefined identifier cin
b) Variable
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 164.
To receive or extract more than one value at a time ………… operator should be used for each variable.
a) >>
b) <<
c) ||
d) &&
Answer:
a) >>

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 165.
……………. is called cascading of operator.
a) >>
b) <<
c) 11 .
d) Both A and B
Answer:
d) Both A and B

Question 166.
C++ provides …………… operator to perform output operation. a) >>
b) <<
c) ||
d) &&
Answer:
b) <<

Question 167.
The operator ………….. is called the “Stream insertion” or “put to” operator.
a) >>
b) <<
c) ||
d) &&
Answer:
b) <<

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 168.
…………… operator is used to send the strings or values of the variables on its right to the object on its left. a) >>
b) <<
c) ||
d) &&
Answer:
b) <<

Question 169.
The second operand of put to operator may be a …………….
a) Constant
b) Variable
c) Expression
d) Either A or B or C
Answer:
d) Either A or B or C

Question 170.
To send more than one value at a time …………… operator should be used for each constant/ variable/expression.
a) >>
b) <<
c) ||
d) &&
Answer:
a) >>

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 171.
The compiler ignores …………… statement.
a) Comment
b) Input
c) Output
d) Assignment
Answer:
a) Comment

Question 172.
Usually all C++ programs begin with include statements starting with a ……………… symbol.
a) $
b) #
c) {
d) %
Answer:
b) #

Question 173.
The symbol …………… is a directive for the preprocessor.
a) $
b) #
c) {
d) %
Answer:
b) #

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 174.
_____ means, statements are processed before the compilation process begins.
a) Preprocessor
b) Include
c) Header file
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Preprocessor

Question 175.
The header file ……………… should include in every C++ program to implement input/output functionalities.
a) iostream
b) stdio
c) conio
d) math
Answer:
a) iostream

Question 176.
………….. header file contains the definition of its member objects cin and cout.
a) iostream
b) stdio
c) conio
d) math
Answer:
a) iostream

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 177.
Namespace collects identifiers used for …………..
a) Class
b) Object
c) Variables
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 178.
…………….. provides a method of preventing name conflicts in large projects.
a) namespace
b) header files
c) include
d) None of these
Answer:
a) namespace

Question 179.
Every C++ program must have a …………… function.
a) user defined
b) main( )
c) Library .
d) None of these
Answer:
b) main( )

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 180.
The …………….. function is the starting point where all C++ programs begin their execution.
a) user-defined
b) main ( )
c) Library
d) None of these
Answer:
b) main ( )

Question 181.
The executable statements should be inside the ………… function.
a) user-defined
b) main ( )
c) Library
d) None of these
Answer:
b) main ( )

Question 182.
The statements between the …………… braces are executable statements.
a) Curly bracket { }
b) Paranthesis ()
c) Square bracket [ ]
d) Angle bracket < >
Answer:
a) Curly bracket { }

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 183.
For creating and executing a C++ program, one must follow ……………. important steps.
a) two
b) three
c) five
d) four
Answer:
d) four

Question 184.
For creating and executing a C++ program, one must follow ……….. step.
a) Creating source code and save with .cpp extension
b) Compilation
c) Execution
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 185.
………………. links the library files with the source code and verifies each and every line of code.
a) Interpreter
b) Compiler
c) Loader
d) Assembler
Answer:
b) Compiler

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 186.
If there are no errors in the source code, …………… translates the source code into a machine-readable object file.
a) Interpreter
b) Compiler
c) Loader
d) Assembler
Answer:
b) Compiler

Question 187.
The compiler translates the source code into machine-readable object file with an extension…………..
a) .cpp
b) .exe
c) .obj *
d) None of these
Answer:
c) .obj *

Question 188.
The object file becomes an executable file with extension ……………
a) .cpp
b) .exe
c) .obj
d) None of these
Answer:
b) .exe

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 189.
………….. files can run without the help of any compiler or IDE.
a) Source
b) Object
c) Executable
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Executable

Question 190.
…………… makes it easy to create, compile and execute a C++ program.
a) Editors
b) IDE
c) Compilers
d) None of these
Answer:
b) IDE

Question 191.
IDE stands for …………….
a) Integrated Development Environment
b) Integrated Design Environment
c) Instant Development Environment
d) Integral Development Environment
Answer:
a) Integrated Development Environment

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 192.
……………. is open-source C++ compiler.
a) Dev C++ / Geany / Sky IDE
b) Code Lite / Code::blocks / Eclipse
c) Ner Beans / Digital Mars
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 193.
Dev C++ is written in …………
a) Delphi
b) C++
c) C
d) Pascal
Answer:
a) Delphi

Question 194.
………….. error is possible in C++.
a) Syntax
b) Semantic
c) Run-time
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 195.
………….. error occurs because of some illegal operation that takes place.
a) Syntax
b) Semantic
c) Run-time
d) All the above
Answer:
c) Run-time

Question 196.
Semantic error is called as ……………error.
a) Syntax
b) Logic
c) Run-time
d) All the above
Answer:
b) Logic

Question 197.
If a program tries to open a file which does not exist, it results in a …………. error.
a) Syntax
b) Logic
c) Run-time
d) All the above
Answer:
c) Run-time

Question 198.
……………. errors occur when grammatical rules of C++are violated.
a) Syntax
b) Logic
c) Run-time
d) All the above
Answer:
a) Syntax

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Very Short Answers (2 Marks)

Question 1.
Mention any two benefits of C++.
Answer:

  1. C++ is a highly portable language and is often the language of choice for multi-device, multi-platform app development.
  2. C++ is an object-oriented programming language and includes classes, inheritance, polymorphism, data abstraction, and encapsulation.

Question 2.
What is a character?
Answer:
A character represents any alphabet, number, or any other symbol (special characters) mostly available in the keyboard.

Question 3.
What are the types of C++ operators based on the number of operands?
Answer:
The types of C++ operators based on the number of operands are:

  1. Unary Operators – Require only one operand
  2. Binary Operators – Require two operands
  3. Ternary Operators – Require three operands

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 4.
What are the recent keywords included in C++?
Answer:
The recent list of keywords includes: using, namespace, bal, static_cast, const_cast, dynamic_cast, true, false.

Question 5.
What is a stream extraction operator?
Answer:
C++ provides the operator >> to get input. It extracts the value through the keyboard and assigns it to the variable on its right; hence, it is called as “Stream extraction” or “get from” operator.

Question 6.
Why the following identifiers are invalid?
a) num-add
b) this
c) 2myfile
Answer:
a) num-add – It contains spedal character (-) which ¡s not permitted
b) this – It is a keyword in C++. Keyword can not be used as identifier
c) 2myflle – Name must begin with an alphabet or an underscore.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 7.
What are the main types of C++ datatypes?
Answer:
In C++, the data types are classified into three main categories

  1. Fundamental data types
  2. User-defined data types
  3. Derived data types.

Question 8.
What are Boolean literals?
Answer:
Boolean literals are used to represent one of the Boolean values (True or false). Internally true has value 1 and false has value 0.

Question 9.
What are string literals?
Answer:
The sequence of characters enclosed within double quotes is called String literals. By default, string literals are automatically added with a special character ‘\0’ (Null) at the end. Valid string Literals: “A” “Welcome” “1234” Invalid String Literals : ‘Welcome’,’1234′

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 10.
Differentiate Operators and Operands.
Answer:
The symbols which are used to do some mathematical or logical operations are called as Operators.
The data items or values that the operators act upon are called as Operands.

Question 11.
What are the classifications of C++ operators based on operand requirements?
Answer:
In C++, the operators are classified on the basis of the number of operands as follows:
i) Unary Operators – Require only one operand
ii) Binary Operators – Require two operands
iii) Ternary Operators – Require three operands

Question 12.
List the C++ operators.
Answer:
C++ Operators are classified as:

  • Arithmetic Operators
  • Relational Operators
  • Logical Operators
  • Bitwise Operators
  • Assignment Operators
  • Conditional Operator
  • Other Operators ,

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 13.
Write note on increment and decrement operators.
Answer:
++ (Plus, Plus) Increment operator
– (Minus, Minus) Decrement operator
An increment or decrement operator acts upon a single operand and returns a new value. Thus, these operators are unary operators. The increment operator adds 1 to its operand and the decrement operator subtracts 1 from its operand.
Example:
x++ is the same as x = x+1; It adds 1 to the present value of x.
X– is the same as x = x—1; It subtracts 1 from the present value of x.

Question 14.
Write a note on bitwise operators.
Answer:
Bitwise operators work on each bit of data and perform the bit-by-bit operation.
In C++, there are three kinds of bitwise operators, which are:

  • Logical bitwise operators
  • Bitwise shift operators
  • One’s compliment operator

Question 15.
Write about bitwise one’s compliment operator.
Answer:
The Bitwise one’s compliment operator:
The bitwise One’s compliment operator ~(Tilde), inverts all the bits in a binary pattern, that is, all l’s become 0 and all 0’s become 1. This is a unary operator.
Example:
If a = 15; Equivalent binary values of a is 0000 1111
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++ 4

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 16.
Write about assignment operator.
Answer:
Assignment Operator:
The assignment operator is used to assigning a value to a variable which is on the left-hand side of an assignment statement. = (equal to) is commonly used as the assignment operator in all computer programming languages. This operator copies the value at the right side of the operator to the left side variable. It is also a binary operator.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++ 5

Question 17.
What are the shorthand assignment operators? Give example.
Answer:

Operator

      Name of  Operator                                                         Example
+=Addition Assignmenta = 10;
c = a+= 5;
(ie, a = a+5)
c = 15
-=Subtraction Assignmenta = 10;
c = a-= 5;
(ie, a = a-5)
c = 5
* =Multiplication Assignmenta = 10;
c = a*= 5;
(ie, a = a*5)
c = 50
/=Division Assignmenta = 10;
c – a/= 5;
(ie, a = a/5)
c = 2
%=Modulus Assignmenta = 10;
c = a%= 5;
(ie, a = a%5)
c = 0

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 18.
Write note on conditional or ternary operator.
Answer:
In C++, there is only one conditional operator is used. ?: is a conditional Operator. This is a Ternary Operator. This operator is used as an alternative to if… else control statement.

Question 19.
Write note on comma (, ) operator.
Answer:
The comma (,) is an operator in C++ used to bring together several expressions. The group of expressions separated by a comma is evaluated from left to right.

Question 20.
What are the pointer operators?
Answer:
* – Pointer to a variable operator
& – Address of operator

Question 21.
What are the component selection operators?
Answer:
. – Direct component selector operator
-> – Indirect component selector operator

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 22.
What are the class member operators?
Answer:
:: – Scope access / resolution operator
.* – Dereference operator
->* – Dereference pointer to class member operator

Question 23.
What is operator association?
Answer:
The operands and the operators are grouped in a specific logical way for evaluation. This logical grouping is called as an Association.

Question 24.
What are the cascading operators?
Answer:
Get from (>>) and Put to (<<) operators are cascading operators.

Question 25.
What are the popular C++ Compilers with IDE.
Answer:

Compiler

Availability

Dev C++Open-source
GeanyOpen-source
Code:: blocksOpen source
Code LiteOpen-source
Net BeansOpen-source
Digital MarsOpen-source
Sky IDEOpen-source
EclipseOpen-source

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Short Answers (3 Marks)

Question 1.
What are the benefits of C++?
Answer:
Benefits of learning C++:

  • c++ ¡s a highly portable language and ¡s often the language of choice for multi-device, multi- platform app development.
  • C++ is an object-oriented programming language and includes classes, inheritance, polymorphism, data abstraction and encapsulation.
  • C++ has a rich function library.
  • C++ allows exception handling, inheritance and function overloading which are not possible in C.
  • C++ is a powerful, efficient and fast language.

It finds a wide range of applications — from GUI applications to 3D graphics for games to real-time mathematical simulations.

Question 2.
What are the characters used In C++?
Answer:
C++ accepts the following characters:

AlphabetsA …. Z, a…. z
Numeric0 …. 9
Special Characters+ – * / ~ ! @ # $ % A& [ ] ( ) {} = ><_\l?.,:'”;
White spaceBlank space, Horizontal tab (->), Carriage return (), Newline, Form feed
Other charactersC++ can process any of the 256 ASCII characters as data.

Question 3.
What are Automatic conversion and Type promotion?
Answer:
Implicit type conversion is a conversion performed by the compiler automatically. So, the implicit conversion is also called “Automatic conversion”. This type of conversion is applied usually whenever different data types are intermixed in an expression. If the type of the operands differs, the compiler converts one of them to match with the other, using the rule that the “smaller” type is converted to the “wider” type, which is called “Type Promotion”.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 4.
What are the rules for naming an identifier/variable?
Answer:
Rules for naming an identifier:

  • The first character of an identifier must be an alphabet or an underscore (-).
  • Only alphabets, digits, and underscore are permitted. Other special characters are not allowed as part of an identifier.
  • c++ is case sensitive as it treats upper and lower-case characters differently.
  • Reserved words or keywords cannot be used as an identifier name.

Question 5.
List the kinds of literals in C++.
Answer:
C++ has several kinds of literals. They are:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++ 6

Question 6.
What are the types of C++operators?
Answer:
C++ Operators are classified as:

  1. Arithmetic Operators
  2. Relational Operators
  3. Logical Operators
  4. Bitwise Operators
  5. Assignment Operators
  6. Conditional Operator
  7. Other Operators

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 7.
Write a note on character constants.
Answer:
A character constant is any valid single character enclosed within single quotes. A character constant in C++ must contain one character and must be enclosed within a single quote.
Valid character constants : ‘A’, ‘2\ ‘$’
Invalid character constants : “A”
The value of a single character constant has an equivalent ASCII value. For example, the value of’A’ is 65.

Question 8.
What are escape sequences? Explain.
Answer:
Escape sequences (or) Non-graphic characters:
C++ allows certain non-printable characters represented as character constants. Non-printable characters are also called non-graphical characters. Non-printable characters are those characters that cannot be typed directly from a keyboard during the execution of a program in C++.
For example: backspace, tabs etc. These non-printable characters can be represented by using escape sequences. An escape sequence is represented by a backslash followed by one or two characters.
Example: \t \On \xHn

Question 9.
Tabulate the escape sequence characters.
Answer:

Escape sequence

Non-graphical character

\aAudible or alert bell
\bBackspace
\fForm feed
\nNewline or linefeed
\rCarriage return
\tHorizontal tab
\vVertical tab
\\Backslash
\’Single quote
\”Double quote
\?Question Mark
\OnOctal number
\xHnHexadecimal number
\oNull

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 10.
Write a note on arithmetic operators.
Answer:
Arithmetic operators perform simple arithmetic operations like addition, subtraction, multiplication, division etc.

Operator

Operation

Example

+Addition10 + 5 = 15
Subtraction10 – 5 = 5
*Multiplication10 * 5 = 50
/Division10 / 5 = 2 (Quotient of the division)
%Modulus (To find the reminder of a division)10 % 3 = 1 (Remainder of the division)

Question 11.
What are the relational operators in C++? Give examples.
Answer:
Relational operators are used to determining the relationship between its operands. When the relational operators are applied on two operands, the result will be a Boolean value i.e 1 or 0 to represents True or False respectively. C++ provides six relational operators. They are:

OperatorOperationExample
>Greater thana > b
<Less thana < b
>=Greater than or equal toa >= b
<=Less than or equal toa <= b
==Equal toa == b
j=Not equala != b
  • In the above examples, the operand ‘a’ is compared with ‘b’ and depending on the relation, the result will be either 1 or 0. i.e., 1 for true, 0 for false.
  • All six relational operators are binary operators.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 12.
What are the logical operators used in C++? Explain its operation.
Answer:
A logical operator is used to evaluate logical and relational expressions. The logical operators act upon the operands that are themselves called as logical expressions. C++ provides three logical operators.
table

Operator

Operation

Description

&&ANDThe logical AND combines two different relational expressions into one. It returns 1 (True), if both expressions are true, otherwise, it returns 0 (False).
IIORThe logical OR combines two different relational expressions into one. It returns 1 (True) if either one of the expressions is true. It returns 0 (False) if both the expressions are false.
!NOTNOT works on a single expression/operand. It simply negates or inverts the truth value, i.e., if an operand/expression is 1 (True) then this operator returns 0 (False) and vice versa.

AND, OR both are binary operators where as NOT is a unary operator.
Example:
a = 5, b = 6, c = 7;

Expression

Result

(a<b) && (b<c)1 (True)
(a>b) && (b<c)0 (False)
(a<b) || (b>c)1 (True)
!(a>b)1 (True)

Question 13.
What are the logical bitwise operators? Explain its operation.
Answer:
Logical bitwise operators:

  • & Bitwise AND (Binary AND)
  • | Bitwise OR (Binary OR)
  • ∧ Bitwise Exclusive OR (Binary XOR)
  • Bitwise AND (&) will return 1 (True)if both the operands are having the value 1 (True); Otherwise, it will return 0 (False).
  • Bitwise OR (|) will return 1 (True) if any one of the operands is having a value 1 (True); It returns 0 (False) if both the operands are having the value 0 (False).
  • Bitwise XOR(A) will return 1 (True) if only one of the operand is having a value of 1 (True). If both are True or both are False, it will return 0 (False).

The truth table for bitwise operators (AND, OR, XOR)

ABA & BA | BA ∧ B
11110
10011
01011
00000

Example:
If a = 65, b=15
Equivalent binary values of 65 = 0100 0001; 15 = 0000 1111
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++ 7

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 14.
What are the bitwise shift operators? Explain its operation.
Answer:
The Bitwise shift operators:
There are two bitwise shift operators in C++, Shift left (<<) and Shift right (>>).

  1. Shift left (<<) – The value of the left operand is moved to the left by the number of bits specified by the right operand. The right operand should be an unsigned integer.
  2. Shift right (>>) – The value of the left operand is moved to the right by the number of bits specified by the right operand. The right operand should be an unsigned integer.

Example:
If a =15; the Equivalent binary value of a is 0000 1111
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++ 8

Question 15.
What is input operator in C++? Explain.
Answer:
C++ provides the operator >> to get input. It extracts the value through the keyboard and
assigns it to the variable on its right; hence, it is called as “Stream extraction” or “get from” operator.
It is a binary operator i.e., it requires two operands. The first operand is the pre-defined identifier cin that identifies keyboard as the input device. The second operand must be a variable.
Working process of cin
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++ 9
Example:
cin>>num; — Extracts num value
cin>>x>>y; — Extracts x and y values

Question 16.
What is an output operator in C++? Explain.
Answer:
C+ + provides << operator to perform output operation. The operator << is called the “Stream insertion” or “put to” operator. It is used to send the strings or values of the variables on its right to the object on its left. << is a binary operator.
The first operand is the pre-defined identifier cout that identifies monitor as the standard output object. The second operand may be a
constant, variable or an expression.
Working process of cout
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++ 10
Example:
cout<<“Welcome”; – Display Welcome on-screen cout<<“The Sum =”<

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Explain in Detail 5 Marks

Question 1.
Explain Integer Constants. (or) Fixed point constants In detail.
Answer:
Integers are whole numbers without any fractions. An integer constant must have at least one digit without a decimal point. It may be signed or unsigned. Signed integers are considered as negative, commas and blank spaces are not allowed as part of it.
In C++, there are three types of integer constants:

  • Decimal
  • Octal
  • Hexadecimal

i) Decimal
Any sequence of one or more digits (0 …. 9).

Valid

Invalid

7257,500 (Comma is not allowed)
-2766 5 (Blank space is not allowed)
4.569$ (Special Character not allowed)

If we assign 4.56 as an integer decimal constant, the compiler will accept only the integer portion of 4.56 ie. 4. It will simply ignore .56.

ii) Octal:
Any sequence of one or more octal values (0 ….7) that begins with 0 is considered as an Octal constant.

Valid

Invalid

01205,600 (Comma is not allowed)
-02704.56 (A decimal point is not allowed)**
+02310158 (8 is not a permissible digit in the octal system)

iii) Hexadecimal:
Any sequence of one or more Hexadecimal values (0 …. 9, A …. F) that starts with Ox or OX is considered as a Hexadecimal constant.

Valid

Invalid

0x1230x1,A5 (Comma is not allowed)
0X5680x.l4E (Decimal point is not allowed like this)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 2.
Explain Real Constants. (or) Floating-point constants in detail.
Answer:
Real Constants (or) Floating-point constants:
A real or floating-point constant is a numeric constant having a fractional component. These constants may be written ¡n fractional form or ¡n exponent form.
The fractional form of a real constant is a signed or unsigned sequence of digits including a decimal point between the digits.
It must have at least one digit before and after a decimal point. It may have a prefix with the + or – sign.
A real constant without any sign will be considered positive.
Exponent form of real constants consists of two parts:

  1. Mantissa
  2. Exponent

The mantissa must be either an integer or a real constant. The mantissa followed by a letter E or e and the exponent. The exponent should also be an integer.
For Example:
58000000.00 may be written as 0.58 x 108 or 0. 58E8.

Mantissa (Before E)

Exponent (After E)

0.588

Example:
5.864 E1 → 5.864 x 101 → 58.64
5864 E-2 → 5864 x 10-2 → 58.64
0.5864 E2 → 0.5864 x 102 → 58.64

Question 3.
Explain the prefix and postfix operators’ working process with suitable examples.
Answer:
The ++ or – operators can be placed either as prefix (before) or as postfix (after) to a variable. With the prefix version, C++ performs the increment / decrement before using the operand.
For example: N1=10, N2=20;
S = ++N1 + ++N2;
The following Figure explains the working process of the above statement.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++ 11
In the above example, the value of num is first incremented by 1, then the incremented value is assigned to the respective operand.
With the postfix version, C++ uses the value of the operand in evaluating the expression before incrementing /decrementing its present value.
For example: N1=10, N2=20;
S = N1++ + ++N2;
The following Figure explains the working process of the above statement.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++ 12
In the above example, the value assigned to operand N1 is taken into consideration, first and then the value will be incremented by 1.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 4.
What are punctuators/separators? List the punctuators and their operations.
Answer:
Punctuators are symbols, which are used as delimiters while constructing a C++ program. They are also called “Separators”. The following punctuators are used in C++.

Curly braces { }Opening and closing curly braces indicate the start and the end of a block of code. A block of code containing more than one executable statement. These statements together are called as “compound statement”.int main ()
{int x=10,
y=20, sum;
sum = x + y;
cout << sum;
}
Parenthesis ()Opening and closing parenthesis indicate function calls and function parameters.clrscr();
add (5, 6);
Square brackets [ ]It indicates single and multidimensional arrays.int num[5];
charname[50];
Comma (,)It is used as a separator in an expression.int x=10, y=20, sum;
Semicolon ;Every executable statement in C++ should terminate with a semicolon.int main ()

{
int x=10, y=20, sum; sum = x + y; cout << sum; }

Colon :It is used to label a statement.private:
Comments
///* *1
Any statement that begins with // are considered a comments. Comments are simply ignored by compilers, i.e., compiler does not execute any statement that begins
with a // // Single line comment
/*  ………….. /  Multiline comment
/* This is written By
myself to learn CPP */ int main ()
{
intx=10,
y=20, sum;  // to sum x  and y  sum = x + y;
cout << sum;
}

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Evaluate Yourself

Question 1.
What is meant by literals? How many types of integer literals available in C++?
Answer:
Literals are data items whose values do not change during the execution of a program. Literals are called as Constants.
In C++, there are three types of integer literals (constants). They are:

  1. Decimal
  2. Octal
  3. Hexadecimal

Question 2.
What kind of constants is following?
i) 26
ii) 015
iii) 0xF
iv) 014.9
Answer:
i) 26 : Decimal constant
ii) 015 : Octal constant
iii) 0xF : Hexadecimal constant
iv) 014.9 : Integer Constant. (A fractional number that begins with 0, C++ has consider the number as an integer not an Octal)

Question 3.
What is the character constant in C++?
Answer:
A character constant is any valid single character enclosed within single quotes. A character constant in C++ must contain one character and must be enclosed within a single quote.
Valid character constants: ‘A’, ‘2’, ‘$’
Invalid character constants: “A”

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 4.
How are non-graphic characters represented in C++?
Answer:
Non-printable characters are also called as non-graphical characters.
Non-printable characters are those characters that cannot be typed directly from a keyboard during the execution of a program in C++, for example, backspace, tabs, etc. These non-printable characters can be represented by using escape sequences.

An escape sequence is represented by a backslash followed by one or two characters.

Escape Sequence

Non-graphical character

\aThe audible or alert bell
\bBackspace
\fForm feed
\nNewline or linefeed
\rCarriage return
\tHorizontal tab
\vVertical tab
\\Backslash
VSingle quote
\”Double quote
\OnOctal number
\xHnHexadecimal number
\0Null

Even though an escape sequence contains two characters, they should be enclosed within single quotes because, C++ consider escape sequences as character constants and allocates one byte in ASCII representation.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 5.
Write the following real constants into exponent form:
i) 32.179
ii) 8.124
iii) 0.00007
Answer:
i) 32.179 → 3.2179E1 (OR) 0.32179E2 (OR) 32178E-3
ii) 8.124 → 0.8124E1 (OR) 8124E-3
iii) 0.00007 → 7E-5

Question 6.
Write the following real constants into fractional form:
i) 0.23E4
ii) 0.517E-3
iii) 0.5E-5
Answer:
i) 0.23E4 → 2300
ii) 0.517E-3 → 0.000517
iii) 0.5E-5 → 0.000005

Question 7.
What is the significance of the null (\0) character in a string?
Answer:
By default, string literals are automatically added with a special character ‘\0’ (Null) at the end. It is called as an end of string character.
The string “welcome” will actually be represented as “welcome\0” in memory and the size of this string is not 7 but 8 characters i.e., inclusive of the last character \0.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Evaluate Yourself

Question 1.
What is the use of operators?
Answer:
Operators are the symbols which are used to do some mathematical or logical operations on their operands.

Question 2.
What are binary operators? Give examples.
Answer:
Arithmetic binary operators.
Binary Operators – Require two operands.
The arithmetic operators addition(+), subtraction(-), multiplication(*), division(/) and Modulus(%) are binary operators which requires two operands.
Example:

Operator

Operation

Example

+Addition10 + 5 = 15
Subtraction10 – 5 = 5 Slfil.r
*Multiplication10 * 5 = 50
/Division10 / 5 = 2 (Quotient of the division)
%Modulus (To find the reminder of a division)10 % 3 = 1 (Remainder of the division)

Question 3.
What does the modulus operator % do?
Answer:
The modulus operator is used to find the remainder of a division.
Example:
10%3 will return 1 which is the remainder of the division.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 4.
What will be the result of 8.5 % 2?
Answer:
The following error will appear while compiling the program.
Invalid operands of types ‘double’ and ‘int’ to binary ‘operator%’.
The reason is % operator operates on integer operands only.

Question 5.
Assume that R starts with a value of 35. What will be the value of S from the following expression? S=(R–)+(++R)
Answer:
S = 70

Question 6.
What will be the value of j = – – k + 2k. if k is ‘ 20 initially?
Answer:
The value of j will be 57 and k will be 19.
C++ Code;
#include
using namespace std;
int main()
{
int k=20,j;
j=–k+2*k;
cout<< “Vlaue of j=”<<j<< “\nVlaue of
k =”<<k;
return 0;
}
Out put
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++ 13

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 7.
What will be the value of p = p * ++j where j is 22 and p = 3 initially?
Answer:
The value of p is 69 and j is 23.
C++ program:
#include
using namespace std;
int main()
{
int j=22, p=3;
P = P * ++j;
cout<< “Value of p =”<<p<< “\nValue of
j =”<<j;
return 0;
}
Out put
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++ 14

Question 8.
Give that i = 8, j = 10, k = 8, What will be result of the following expressions?
i) i < k
ii) i < j
iii) i > = k
iv) i = = j
v) j ! = k
Answer:

Expression

Result

i < k0 (False)
i < j1 (True)
i >= k1 (True)
i == j0 (False)
j != k1 (True)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 9.
What will be the order of evaluation for the following expressions?
i) i + 3 > = j – 9
ii) a +10 < p – 3 + 2 q
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++ 15

Question 10.
Write an expression involving a logical operator to test, if marks are 75 and grade is ‘A’.
Answer:
(marks == 75) && (grade == ‘A)

Hands On Practice

Type the following C++ Programs in Dev C++ IDE and execute, if the compiler shows any errors, try to rectify it and execute again and again till you get the expected result.
Question 1.
C++ Program to find the total marks of three
subjects.
#include
using namespace std;
int main()
{
int m1, m2, m3, sum;
cout << “\n Enter Mark 1:”; cin >> m1;
cout << ”\n Enter Mark 2: “; cin >> m2;
cout << “\n Enter Mark 3: “; cin >> m3;
sum = m1 + m2 + m3;
cout << “\n The sum = ” << sum;
}
Make changes in the above code to get the average of all the given marks.
Answer:
Modified Program:
#include
using namespace std;
int main()
{
int m1, m2, m3, sum;
float avg;
cout << “\n Enter Mark 1: “;
cin >> m1;
cout << “\n Enter Mark 2: “;
cin >> m2;
cout << “\n Enter Mark 3: “;
cin >> m3;
sum = m1 + m2 + m3;
avg = (float)sum / 3;
cout << “\n The sum = ” << sum;
cout << “\n The average = ” << avg;
}
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++ 16

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 2.
C++ program to find the area of a circle.
#include
using namespace std;
int main()
{
int radius;
float area;
cout << “\n Enter Radius: “;
cin<< radius;
area = 3.14 * radius * radius;
cout << “\n The area of circle =“ <<area;
}
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++ 17

Question 3.
Point out the errors in the following program:
Using namespace std;
int main( )
{
cout << “Enter a value”
cin << numl >> num2
num+num2=sum;
cout >> “\n The Sum= ” >> sum;
Answer:

Given code

Error

Using namespace std;The keyword must be in lowercase. So, Using should be written as using. Header file is missing.
int main()No Error
No Error
cout << “Enter a value “;Prompt should be “Enter two values” because cin contains two variables.
cin << numl >> num2Variables are not declared. It should be declared first, cin must followed by Extraction operator(>>).

Semicolon is missing at the end of the statement.

num+num2=sum;Improper assignment statement and undefined variable name used. It should be replaced as sum=numl + num2;
cout >> “\n The Sum= ” >> sum;cout must followed by put to the operator.
Return 0; statement is missing. Close bracket} missing.

The correct program is given below:
using namespace std;
#include
int main()
{
int num1,num2,sum;
cout << “Enter two values”; cin >> numl >> num2;
sum= num+num2;
cout << “\n The Sum= “<< sum;
return 0;
}

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 4.
Point out the type of error in the following program:
#include
using namespace std;
int main()
{
int h=10; w=12;
cout << “Area of rectangle ” << h+w; >
Answer:
Syntax error exists. Ie. int h=10;w=12; should written as int h=10,w=12;
There is also a logical error in the above program.
The formula for rectangle area is given wrong. This error will not indicate by the compiler.
MODIFIED PROGRAM:
#include
using namespace std;
int main()
{
int h=10, w=12;
cout << “Area of rectangle ” << h*w;
}
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++ 18

DATATYPES, VARIABLES AND EXPRESSIONS
Book Evaluation
Part -I

Choose The Correct Answer

Question 1.
How many categories of data types available in C++?
a) 5
b) 4
c) 3
d) 2
Answer:
c) 3

Question 2.
Which of the following data types is not a fundamental type?
a) signed
b) int
c) float
d) char
Answer:
a) signed

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 3.
What will be the result of following statement?
char ch= ‘B’;
cout << (int) ch;
a) B
b) b
c) 65
d) 66
Answer:
d) 66

Question 4.
Which of the character is used as suffix to indicate a floating point value?
a) F
b) C
c) L
d) D
Answer:
a) F

Question 5.
How many bytes of memory allocates for the following variable declaration if you are using Dev C++? short int x;
a) 2
b) 4
c) 6
d) 8
Answer:
a) 2

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 6.
What is the output of the following snippet?
char ch = ‘A’;
ch= ch + 1;
a) B
b) A1
c) F
d) 1A
Answer:
a) B

Question 7.
Which of the following Is not a data type modifier?
a) signed
b) int
c) long
d) short
Answer:
b) int

Question 8.
Which of the following operator returns the size of the data type?
a) size of( )
b) int ( )
c) long ( )
d) double ( )
Answer:
a) size of( )

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 9.
Which operator to be used to access a reference of a variable?
a) $
b) #
c) &
d) !
Answer:
c) &

Question 10.
This can be used as an alternate to end command:
a) \t
b) \b
c) \0
d) \n
Answer:
c) \0

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Part II

Very Short Answers

Question 1.
Write a short note const keyword with an example.
Answer:
const is the keyword used to declare a constant, const keyword modifies/restricts the accessibility of a variable. So, it is known as an Access modifier.
Example:
const int num =100; indicates that the variable num can not be modified. It remains constant.

Question 2.
What is the use of setw( ) format manipulator?
Answer:
setw ( ):
setw manipulator sets the width of the field assigned for the output. The field width determines the minimum number of characters to be written in the output.
Syntax:
setw(number of characters)
Example:
cout << setw(25) << “Net Pay : ” << setw(10)
<< np << endl;

Question 3.
Why is char often treated as an integer data type?
Answer:
Character data type is often said to be an integer type since all the characters are represented in memory by their associated ASCII Codes.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 4.
What is a reference variable? What is its use?
Answer:
A reference provides an alias for a previously defined variable. Declaration of a reference consists of base type and an & (ampersand) symbol; reference variable name is assigned the value of a previously declared variable.
Syntax:
<&reference_variable> =
Example:
#include
using namespace std;
int main( )
{
int num;
int &temp = num; //declaration of a reference variable temp
num = 100;
cout << “\n The value of num =” << num;
cout << “\n The value of temp =” << temp;
}
Output
The value of num = 100
The value of temp = 100

Question 5.
ConsIder the following C++ statement Are they equivalent?
char ch=67;
char ch=’C’;
Answer:
Yes. Both are equivalent. Both assignment statements will store character C’ in the variable ch.

Question 6.
what Is the difference between 561 and 56?
Answer:

  • 56 indIcate an Integer
  • 56L indicates Long Integer The suffix L indicates Long. So it stores a long integer

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 7.
Determine which of the following are valid constant? And specify their type,
i) 0.5
ii) ‘Name’
iii) ‘\t’
iv) 27,822
Answer:
i) 0.5 : Valid. Floating-point constant
ii) ‘Name’ : Invalid. String constant must be enclosed within double-quotes.
iii) ‘\t’ : Valid. Character constant.
iv) 27,822 : Invalid. Comma not allowed with integer constant.

Question 8.
Suppose x and y are two double-type variables that you want add as integers and assign to an integer variable. Construct a C++ statement for doing so.
Answer:
double x, y;
int sum;
x = 12.64;
y = 13.56;
sum = (int) x + (int) y;
The variable sum will have the value of 25 due to explicit casting.

Question 9.
What will be the result of following if num=6 initially?
Answer:
a) cout << num;
6
b) cout << (num==5);
0

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 10.
Which of the following two statements are valid? Why? Also write their result, int a;
i) a=3,014;
ii) a =(3,014);
Answer:
i) a=3,014; – Invalid. Special character comma(,) not allowed.
ii) a=(3,014); – Valid. 014 is an octal constant. It will be converted into decimal and then stored in a. So, a will hold 12 as its value.

Part – III

Short Answers

Question 1.
What are arithmetic operators in C++? Differentiate unary and binary arithmetic operators. Give example for each of them.
Answer:
Arithmetic Operators:
Arithmetic operators perform simple arithmetic operations like addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, etc.

OperatorOperationExample
+Addition10 + 5-15
 –Subtraction10-5-5
*Multiplication10 * 5 = 50
/Division10 / 5 = 2 (Quotient of the division)
%Modulus (To find the reminder of a division)10 % 3 = 1 (Remainder of the division)

The above-mentioned arithmetic operators are binary operators which require a minimum of two operands.

Unary arithmetic operators:
– (Unary) – The unary minus operator changes the sign of its argument. A positive number ‘ becomes negative and negative number becomes
positive, int a = 5;
a = -a; // a becomes -5
+ (Unary) – The unary plus operator keeps the sign of its argument,
int a = -5;
a = +a; // a still have the value same value -5
(No change)
a = 5;
a = +a; // a stil have the same value 5
(No change)
Unary Minus is different from – (Binary) ie. subtraction operator requires two operands.
Unary Plus is different from + (Binary) ie. addition operator requires two operands.
#include
mt mamo
{
mt x=10;
intÿ= -10;
inta = -10;
‘nt b = 10;
y=+y;
a= -a;
b=+b;
cout«”\nx = “«X;
cout«”\ny = “«y;
cout«”\na = “«a;
cout«”\nb = “«b;
return 0;
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++ 19

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 2.
Evaluate x+= x + ++x; Let x=5;
Answer:
x=18
Code:
using namespace std;
#include
int main ()
{

int x;
x = 5;
x+= x + ++x;
cout «x;
return O;
}
Out put
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++ 20

Question 3.
How relational operators and logical operators related to one another?
Answer:
Both relational and logical operators will give the evaluation result as Boolean constant value 1 (True) or 0(False).

Question 4.
Evaluate the following C++ expressions where x, y, z are integers and m, n are floating
point numbers. The value of x = 5, y = 4 and
m=2.5;
i) n=x+y/x;
n=5
ii)z=m*x+y;
z=16
iii) z = (x++) * m + X;
z = 18
Code:
using namespace std;
#include
int main()
{
int x,y,z1,z2;
float m,n;
x=5;
y=4;
m=2.5;
n = x + y / X;
z1=m*x+y;
z2 = (x++) * m + X;
cout<<”\nN = “<<n;
còut<<”\nzl =<<z1;
cout<<”\nz2 =<<z2;
return 0;
}
output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++ 21

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

11th Computer Science Guide Introduction to C++ Additional Questions and Answers

Choose The Correct Answer 1 Mark

Question 1.
Every programming language has _____ fundamental element.
a) Data types
b) Variables
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 2.
c++ provides a predefined set of data types for handling the data item is known as …………….. data type.
a) Fundamental
b) Built-in data types
c) User-defined
d) Either A or B
Answer:
d) Either A or B

Question 3.
A programmer can create his own data types called as ______ data types.
a) Fundamental
b) Built-in data types
c) User defined
d) Either A or B
Answer:
c) User defined

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 4.
In a programming language, fields are referred as ……………
a) Variables
b) Data
c) File
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Variables

Question 5.
In a programming language, values are referred to as ……………
a) Variables
b) Data
c) File
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Data

Question 6.
In C++, the data types are classified as ______ main categories.
a) three
b) four
c) two
d) five
Answer:
a) three

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 7.
In C++, ______ is a data type category.
a) Fundamental
b) Derived
c) User defined
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 8.
The ………….. are the named memory locations to hold values of specific data types.
a) Literals
b) Variables
c) Constants
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Variables

Question 9.
There are ………….. fundamental (atomic) data types in C++.
a) two
b) three
c) four
d) five
Answer:
d) five

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 10.
…………… is an atomic data type in C++,
a) char / int
b) float / double
c) void
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 11.
………….. are whole numbers without any fraction.
a) Integers
b) Characters
c) Strings
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Integers

Question 12.
Identify the correct statement from the ; following.
a) Integers can be positive or negative.
b) If you try to store a fractional value in an int type variable it will accept only the integer portion of the fractional value.
c) If a variable is declared as an int, C++ compiler allows storing only integer values into it.
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 13.
……….. data type accepts and returns all valid \ ASCII characters.
a) Character
b) float
c) void
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Character

Question 14.
Character data type is often said to be an …………… type.
a) float
b) string
c) void
d) int
Answer:
d) int

Question 15.
……………… means significant numbers after decimal point.
a) Precision
b) Digit
c) Floating point
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Precision

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 16.
The _____ data type is larger and slower than type float.
a) Char
b) double
c) void
d) int
Answer:
b) double

Question 17.
The literal meaning for void is …………….
a) Empty space
b) Nothing
c) Blank
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Empty space

Question 18.
In C++, the ……………. data type specifies an empty set of values.
a) Char
b) double
c) void
d) int
Answer:
c) void

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 19.
……………. is used as a return type for functions that do not return any value.
a) Char
b) double
c) void
d) int
Answer:
c) void

Question 20.
Identify the correct statement from the following.
a) One of the most important reason for declaring a variable as a particular data type is to allocate appropriate space in memory.
b) As per the stored program concept, every data should be accommodated in the main memory before they are processed)
c) C++ compiler allocates specific memory space for each and every data handled according to the compiler’s standards.
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 21.
char data type needs ……………. bytes of memory.
a) 8
b) 4
c) 2
d) 1
Answer:
d) 1

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 22.
int data type needs ………….. bytes of memory.
a) 8
b) 4
c) 2
d) 1
Answer:
c) 2

Question 23.
float data type needs …………….. bytes of memory.
a) 8
b) 4
c) 2
d) 1
Answer:
b) 4

Question 24.
double data type needs ………… bytes of memory.
a) 8
b) 4
c) 2
d) 1
Answer:
a) 8

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 25.
The range of char data type is ………………
a) -127 to 128
b) -32,768 to 32,767
c) 3.4 x 10-38 to 3.4 x 1038 -1
d) 1.7 x 10-308 to 1.7 x 10308 -1
Answer:
a) -127 to 128

Question 26.
The range of int data type is …………..
a) -127 to 128
b) -32,768 to 32,767
c) 3.4 x HT38 to 3.4 x 1038-1
d) 1.7 x 10-308 to 1.7 x 10308 -1
Answer:
b) -32,768 to 32,767

Question 27.
The range of float data type is ……………
a) -127 to 128
b) -32,768 to 32,767
c) 3.4 x 10-38 to 3.4 x 1038 -1
d) 1.7 x lO”308 to 1.7 x 10308 -1
Answer:
c) 3.4 x 10-38 to 3.4 x 1038 -1

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 28.
The range of double data type is …………….
a) -127 to 128
b) -32,768 to 32,767
c) 3.4 x 10″38 to 3.4 x 1038-1
d) 1.7 x 10-308 to 1.7 x 10308 -1
Answer:
d) 1.7 x 10-308 to 1.7 x 10308 -1

Question 29.
…………….. can be used to expand or reduce the memory allocation of any fundamental data type.
a) Modifiers
b) Access specifiers
c) Promoters
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Modifiers

Question 30.
………….. are called as Qualifiers.
a) Modifiers
b) Access specifiers
c) Promoters
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Modifiers

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 31.
There are …………….modifiers used in C++.
a) five
b) four
c) three
d) two
Answer:
b) four

Question 32.
……………… is a modifier in C++,
a) signed / unsigned
b) long
c) short
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 33.
short data type needs …………. bytes of memory.
a) 8
b) 4
c) 2
d) 1
Answer:
c) 2

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 34.
unsigned short data type needs ………….. bytes of memory. .
a) 8
b) 4
c) 2
d) 1
Answer:
c) 2

Question 35.
signed short data type needs…………… bytes of memory.
a) 8
b) 4
c) 2
d) 1
Answer:
c) 2

Question 36.
signed long data type needs ……………. bytes of memory.
a) 8
b) 4
c) 2
d) 1
Answer:
b) 4

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 37.
The range of unsigned short is …………..
a) -32,768 to 32768
b) 0 to 65535
c) -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647
d) 0 to 4,294,967,295
Answer:
b) 0 to 65535

Question 38.
The range of unsigned long is ……………..
a) -32,768 to 32768
b) 0 to 65535
c) -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647
d) 0 to 4,294,967,295
Answer:
d) 0 to 4,294,967,295

Question 39.
The range of signed long is ……………..
a) -32,768 to 32768
b) 0 to 65535
c) -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647
d) 0 to 4,294,967,295
Answer:
c) -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 40.
The range of unsigned char is …………….
a) -32,768 to 32768
b) 0 to 65535
c) 0 to 255
d) 0 to 4,294,967,295
Answer:
c) 0 to 255

Question 41.
The range of long double data type is ……………..
a) -127 to 128
b) -32,768 to 32,767
c) 3.4 x 10^932 to 1.1 x 104932 -1
d) 1.7 x 10~308 to 1.7 x 10308 -1
Answer:
c) 3.4 x 10^932 to 1.1 x 104932 -1

Question 42.
int data type needs …………. bytes of memory in Dec C++.
a) 8
b) 4
c) 2
d) 1
Answer:
b) 4

Question 43.
unsigned int data type needs ……………… bytes of memory in Dec C++.
a) 8
b) 4
c) 2
d) 1
Answer:
b) 4

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 44.
signed int data type needs …………… bytes of memory in Dec C++.
a) 8
b) 4
c) 2
d) 1
Answer:
b) 4

Question 45.
long double data type needs…………… memory in Dec C++.
a) 10
b) 8
c) 2
d) 12
Answer:
d) 12

Question 46.
long double data type needs…………… memory in Turbo C++.
a) 10
b) 8
c) 2
d) 12
Answer:
a) 10

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 47.
…………….. is an operator which gives the size of a data type.
a) sizeof()
b) byteof()
c) datatype()
d) None of these
Answer:
a) sizeof()

Question 48.
The suffix……………. is used for floating point values
a) U
b) L
C) F
d) None of these
Answer:
C) F

Question 49.
The suffix ……………… is used for long int values.
a) U
b) L
C) F
d) None of these
Answer:
b) L

Question 50.
The suffix ………….. is used for unsigned int
a) U
b) L
C) F
d) None of these
Answer:
a) U

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 51.
……………… are user-defined names assigned to specific memory locations in which the values are stored.
a) Literals
b) Variables
c) Operators
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Variables

Question 52.
There are ………….. values associated with a symbolic variable
a) two
b) three
c) four
d) five
Answer:
a) two

Question 53.
…………… is data stored in a memory location.
a) L-value
b) R-value
c) T-value
d) B-value
Answer:
b) R-value

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 54.
…………… is the memory address in which the R-value is stored.
a) L-value
b) R-value
c) T-value
d) B-value
Answer:
a) L-value

Question 55.
The memory addresses are in the form of ……………. values.
a) Binary
b) Octal
c) Decimal
d) Hexadecimal
Answer:
d) Hexadecimal

Question 56.
Every …………. should be declared before they are actually used in a program.
a) Variable
b) Operand
c) Literals
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Variable

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 57.
If we declare a variable without any initial value, the memory space allocated to that variable will be occupied with some unknown value is called as ………….. values.
a) Junk
b) Garbage
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 58.
A variable can be initialized during the execution of a program is known as ……………..
a) Dynamic initialization
b) Static initialization
c) Random initialization
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Dynamic initialization

Question 59.
………….. is the keyword used to declare a constant.
a) constant
b) const
c) cons
d) None of these
Answer:
b) const

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 60.
…………… keyword modifies / restricts the accessibility of a variable.
a) constant
b) const
c) cons
d) None of these
Answer:
b) const

Question 61.
……………….. is known as Access modifier of a variable.
a) constant
b) const
c) cons
d) None of these
Answer:
b) const

Question 62.
Declaration of a reference consists of ……………..
a) Base type
b) An 8i (ampersand) symbol
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 63.
……………. are used to format the output of any
C++ program,
a) Qualifiers
b) Modifiers ‘
c) Manipulators
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Manipulators

Question 64.
ManIpulators are functions specifically designed to use with the ______ operators.
a) Insertion («)
b) Extraction(»)
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 65.
Commonly used manipulator is …………..
a) endl and setw
b) setfill
c) setprecision and setf
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 66.
endl manipulator is a member of  ………………….. header file.
a) iomanip
b) iostream
c) manip
d) conio
Answer:
b) iostream

Question 67.
setw, setfihl, setprecision and setf manipulators are members of______ header file.
a) iomanip
b) iostream
c) manip
d) conio
Answer:
a) iomanip

Question 68.
______ is used asa line feeder in C++.
a) setw
b) setfill
c) endi
d) setf
Answer:
c) endi

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 69.
______ can be used as an alternate to ‘sn’.
a) setw
b) setfill
c) endi
d) setf
Answer:
c) endi

Question 70.
______ inserts a new line and flushes the buffer.
a) setw
b) setfill
c) endi
d) setf
Answer:
c) endi

Question 71.
______ manipulator sets the width of the field assigned for the output.
a) setw
b) setñhl
c) endi
d) setf
i.) IIUI
U) SeIT
Answer:
a) setw

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 72.
_______ manipulator is usually used after setw.
a) endl
b) setfill
c) endl
d) setf
Answer:
b) setfill

Question 73.
______ is used to display numbers with fractions In specific number of digits.
a) ‘endI
b) setfill i1
c) endl
d) setprecision
Answer:
d) setprecision

Question 74.
setf() manipulator may be used in form…………..
a) Fixed
b) Scientific
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 75.
An expression ¡s a combination of ……………………… arranged as per the rules of C++.
a) Operators
b) Constants
c) Variables
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 76.
InC++,there are ………………………….. types of expressions used.
a) four
b) five
c) seven
d) two
Answer:
c) seven

Question 77.
The process of converting one fundamental type into another is called as …………………………
a) Type Conversion
b) Compiling
c) Inverting
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Type Conversion

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 78.
c++ provides …………………… types of conversions
a) three
b) two
c) four
d) five
Answer:
b) two

Question 79.
C++ provides _____types of conversion.
a) Implicit
b) Explicit
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 80.
A(n) ………………………. type conversion is a conversion performed by the compiler automatically.
a) Implicit
b) Explicit
c) BothAandB
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Implicit

Question 81.
______conversion is also called as Automatic conversion.
a) Implicit ‘
c) BothAandB
b) Explicit
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Implicit ‘

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 82.
Data of smaller type  converted to the wider type, which is called is as ………………
a) Type Promotion
c) Type extended
b) Type upgrade
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Type Promotion

Question 83.
c++ allows explicit conversion of variables or expressions from one data type to another specific data type by the programmer Is called as ………….
a) Type Promotion
b) Type upgrade
c) Type casting
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Type casting

Very Short Answers 2 Marks

Question 1.
What are the classification of data types?
Answer:
In C++, the data types are classified as three main categories.

  1. Fundamental data types
  2. User-defined data types and
  3. Derived data types.

Question 2.
Define: Variable.
Answer:
The variables are the named memory locations to hold values of specific data types.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 3.
Give the syntax for declaring a variable with an example.
Answer:
Syntax for declaring a variable:
Example:
int num1;
int num1, num2, sum;

Question 4.
What a the fundamental/atomic data types in C++?
Answer:
Fundamental (atomic) data types are predefined data types available with C++. There are five fundamental data types in C++: char, int, float, double and void.

Question 5.
Write about int data type.
Answer:
Integers are whole numbers without any fraction. Integers can be positive or negative. Integer data type accepts and returns only integer numbers.
If a variable is declared as an int, C++ compiler allows storing only integer values into it.
If we try to store a fractional value in an int type variable it will accept only the integer portion of the fractional value.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 6.
What are the advantages of using float data type?
Answer:
There are two advantages of using float data types.

  1. They can represent values between the integers.
  2. They can represent a much greater range of values.

Question 7.
What is the disadvantage of using float data type?
Answer:
The floating point operations takes more time to execute compared to the integer type ie., floating point operations are slower than integer operations. This is a disadvantage of floating point operation.

Question 8.
What do you mean by precision?
Answer:
Precision means significant numbers after decimal point of floating point number.

Question 9.
Tabulate the memory allocation for fundamental data types?
Answer:
Memory allocation for fundamental data types

Data type

Space in memory

in terms of bytesin terms of bits
char1 byte8 bits
int2 bytes16 bits
float4 bytes32 bits
double8 bytes’64 bits

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 10.
Tabulate the range of value for fundamental data types?
Answer:

Data type

Range of value

char-127 to 128
int-32,768 to 32,767
float3.4×10--38 to 3.4×1038 -1
double1.7×10--308 to 1.7xl0308-1

Question 11.
What is modifier?
Answer:
Modifiers can be used to modify the memory allocation of any fundamental data type. They are also called as Qualifiers.

Question 12.
What are the modifiers in C++?
Answer:
There are four modifiers used in C++.
They are;

  1. signed
  2. unsigned
  3. long
  4. short

Question 13.
What are the two values associated with a variable?
Answer:
There are two values associated with a symbolic variable; they are R-value and L-va!ue.

  • R-value is data stored in a memory location.
  • L-value is the memory address in which the R-value is stored.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 14.
How memory addresses are represented?
Answer:
The memory addresses are in the form of Hexadecimal values.
Example: .
0x134e represents a memory address.

Question 15.
What are garbage or junk values?
Answer:
If we declare a variable without any initial value, the memory space allocated to that variable will be occupied with some unknown value. These unknown values are called as “Junk” or “Garbage” values.

Question 16.
What do you mean by dynamic ¡nitialization
Answer:
A variable can be initialized during the execution of a program. It is known as “Dynamic
initiaIization’
For example: .
int sum = num1+num2;
This initializes sum using the known values of num1 and num2 during the execution.

Question 17.
What is the difference between reference and pointer variable?
Answer:
A reference is an alias for another variable whereas a pointer holds the memory address of a variable.

Question 18.
What is the purpose of manipulators in C++?
Answer:
Manipulators are used to format the output of any C++ program. Manipulators are functions specifically designed to use with the insertion (<<) and extraction>>) operators.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 19.
What are the manipulators used in C++?
Answer:
Commonly used manipulators are:
endl, setw, setfill, setprecision and setf.

Question 20.
Write about the endl manipulator.
Answer:
endl (End the Line)
endl is used as a line feeder in C++. It can be used as an alternate to ‘\n’. In other words, endl inserts a new line and then makes the cursor to point to the beginning of the next line.
Example:
cout << “The value of num = ” << num <<endl;

Question 21.
What is the difference between endl and \n.
Answer:
There is a difference between endl and ‘\n’, even though they are performing similar tasks.
endl – Inserts a new line and flushes the buffer (Flush means – clean)
‘\n’ – Inserts only a new line.

Question 22.
Write about setw( ) manipulator.
Answer:
setw ( ) :
setw manipulator sets the width of the field assigned for the output. The field width determines the minimum number of characters to be written in output.
Syntax: ‘
setw(number of characters)
Example:
cout<< setw(25) << “Basic Pay :”<< setw(10)<< basic<< endl;

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 23.
What is the use of setfill( ) manipulator? setfill ():
Answer:
This manipulator is usually used after setw. If the presented value does not entirely fill the given width, then the specified character in the setfill argument is used for filling the empty fields.
Syntax:
setfill (character);
Example:
cout<<“\n H.R.A :”<<setw(10)< For example, if we assign 1200 to hra, setw accommodates 1200 in a field of width 10 from right to left and setfill fills p in the remaining 6 spaces that are in the beginning. The output will be, 0000001200.

Question 24.
What is the purpose of setprecision() manipulator?
Answer:
setprecision ( ):
This is used to display numbers with fractions in specific number of digits.
Syntax:
setprecision (number of digits);
Example:
float hra = 1200.123;
cout << setprecision (5) << hra;
In the above code, the given value 1200.123 will be displayed in 5 digits including fractions. So, the output will be 1200.1
setprecision ( ) prints the values from left to right. For the above code, first, it will take 4 digits and then prints one digit from fractional portion.

Question 25.
WhIch of the following statements are valid? Why? Also write their result
Inta; .
i) a – (014,3);
ii) a = (5,017)
iii) a = (3,018)
Answer:
i) a = (014,3); – Valid. A will hold 3. (The second value)
ii) a = (5,017) – Valid. 014 ¡s an octal constant. It will be converted into decimal and then stored in a. So, a will hold 15 as its value.
iii) a = (3,018) – Invalid. Because 8 is not an octal digit. (A number starts with 0 is considered as an octal)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 26.
Which of the following statements are valid? Why? Also write their result.
inta;
i) a = (3,0xA);
ii) a = (5,0xCAFE)
iii) a = (OXCAFE,0XF)
iv) a = (0XCAFE,0XG)
Answer:
i) a = (3,0xA):
Valid. OxA is a hexadecimal constant. It will be converted into decimal and then stored in a. So, a will hold 10 as its value.
ii) a = (5,0xCAFE):
Valid. OxCAFE is a hexadecimal constant. It will be converted into decimal and then stored in a. So, a will hold 51966 as its value.
iii) a = (OXCAFE,0XF):
Valid. 0XF is a hexadecimal constant. It will be converted into decimal and then stored in a. So, a will hold 15 as its value.
iv) a= (OXCAFE,0XGAB):
Invalid. Because G is not a hexadecimal digit in OXGAB.\

Short Answer 3 Marks

Question 1.
LIstthedattypesinC++.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++ 22

Question 2.
Write about character data type.
Answer:
Character data type accepts and returns all valid ASCII characters. Character data type is often said to be an integer type, since ail the characters are represented in memory by their associated ASCII Codes.
If a variable is declared as char, C++ allows storing either a character or an integer value.
Example:
char c=65;
char ch = ‘A’; Both statements will assign ‘A’ to c and ch.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 3.
Write note on double data type.
Answer:
double data type:
This data type is for double precision floating point numbers. The double is also used for handling floating point numbers. But, this type occupies double the space than float type. This means, more fractions can be accommodated in double than in float type.
The double is larger and slower than type float. The double is used in a similar way as that of float data type.

Question 4.
Compare memory allocation by Turbo C++ and Dev C++.
Answer:

Data typeMemory size in bytes
Turbo C++Dev C++
short22
unsigned short22
signed short22
int24
unsigned int24
signed int24
long44
unsigned long44
signed long44
char11
unsigned char11
signed char11
float44
double88
long double1012

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 5.
What is the purpose of number suffix in C++?
Answer:
There are different suffixes for integer and floating point numbers. Suffix can be used to assign the same value as a different type.
For example, if we want to store 45 in an int, long, unsigned int and unsigned long int, you can use suffix letter L or U (either case) with 45 i.e. 45L or 45U.
This type of declaration instructs the compiler to store the given values as long and unsigned.
‘F’ can be used for floating point values, example: 3.14F

Question 6.
How setprecision( ) is used to set the number of decimal places?
Answer:
setprecision can also be used to set the number of decimal places to be displayed. In order to do this task, we will have to set an ios flag within setf( ) manipulator.
This may be used in two forms:
(i) fixed and
(ii) scientific.
These two forms are used when the keywords fixed or scientific are appropriately used before the setprecision manipulator.
Example:
#include
#indude
using namespace std;
int main()
{
cout.setf(ios::fixed);
cout << setprecision(2)<<0.1;
}
In the above program, ios flag is set to fixed type; it prints the floating point number in fixed notation. So, the output will be, 0.10
cout.setf(ios: scientific); cout << setprecision(2) << 0.1;
In the above statements, ios flag is set to scientific type; it will print the floating point number in scientific notation. So, the output wiil
be, 1.00e-001

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Explain In Detail 5 Marks

Question 1.
What is an expression? Explain its types with suitable example.
Answer:
An expression is a combination of operators, constants and variables arranged as per the rules of C++.
An expression may consist of one or more operands, and zero or more operators to produce a value. In C++, there are seven types of expressions as given below.

Expression

Description

Example

1.Constant ExpressionConstant expression consist only constant valuesint num=100;
2. Integer ExpressionThe combination of integer and character values and/or variables with simple arithmetic operators to produce integer results.sum = num1 +

num2;

avg=sum/5;

3. Float ExpressionThe combination of floating point values and/or variables with simple                 arithmetic operators to produce floating point results.Area=3.14*r*r;
4. Relational ExpressionThe combination of values and/or variables with relational operators to produce bool(true means 1 or false means 0) values as results.x>y;

a+b==c+d;

5. Logical ExpressionThe combination of values and/or variables with Logical operators to produce bool values as results.(a>b)&& (c= = 10);
6. Bitwise ExpressionThe combination of values and/or variables with Bitwise operators.x>>3;

a<<2;

7. Pointer ExpressionA Pointer is a variable that holds a memory address. Pointer                declaration statements.int *ptr;

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 2.
Explain type conversion in detail.
Answer:
The process of converting one fundamental type into another is called as “Type Conversion”. C++ provides two types of conversions.

  1. Implicit type conversion
  2. Explicit type conversion

Implicit type conversion:
An Implicit type conversion is a conversion performed by the compiler automatically. So, implicit conversion is also called as “Automatic
conversion “.
This type of conversion is applied usually whenever different data types are intermixed in an expression. If the type of the operands differs, the compiler converts one of them to match with the other, using the rule that the “smaller” type is
converted to the “wider” type, which is called as “Type Promotion”
Example:
#include<iostream>
using namespace std;
int main()
{
int a=6;
float b =3.14;
cout << a+b
}
In the above program, operand ‘a’ ¡s an mt type and ‘b’ is a float type. During the execution of the program, ‘mt’ is converted into a ‘float because a float is wider than mt.
Hence, the output of the above program will be: 9.14
Explicit type conversion:
C++ allows explicit conversion of variables
or expressions from one data type to another
specific data type by the programmer. It is called
as “type casting”.
Syntax:
(type-name) expression;
Where type-name is a valid C++ data type to which the conversion is to be performed.
Example:
#include<iostream>
using namespace std;
int main ()
{
float varf=78.685;
cout << (int) varf;
}
In the above program, variable varf is declared as a float with an initial value 78.685. The value of varf is explicitly converted to an int type in cout statement. Thus, the final output will be 78.
During explicit conversion, if we assign a value to a type with a greater range, it does not cause any problem. But, assigning a value of a larger type to a smaller type may result in loosing or loss of precision values.
Example:
#include <iostream>
using namespace std;
int main()
{
double varf= 178.25255685;
cout << (float) varf < < endl;
cout << (int) varf << endl;
}
Output
178.253
178

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Evaluate Yourself

Question 1.
What do you mean by fundamental data types?
Answer:
C++ provides a predefined set of data types for handling the data items. Such data types are known as fundamental or built-in data types.

Question 2.
The data type char is used to represent characters. Then why is it often termed as an integer type?
Answer:
Character data type is often said to be an integer type, since all the characters are represented in memory by their associated ASCII Codes.

Question 3.
What is the advantage of floating point numbers over integers?
Answer:
Advantages of using float data types.

  • They can represent values between the integers.
  • They can represent a much greater range of values.

Question 4.
The data type double is another floating point type. Then why is it treated as a distinct data type?
Answer:
The double is also used for handling floating point numbers. But, this type occupies double the space than float type. This means, more fractions can be accommodated in double than in float type.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 5.
What is the use of void data type?
Answer:
The literal meaning for void is ’empty space’. In C++, the void data type specifies an empty set of values. It is used as a return type for functions that do not return any value.

Evaluate Yourself

Question 1.
What is modifiers? What is the use of modifiers?
Answer:
Modifiers are used to modify the storing capacity of a fundamental data type except void type.
For example, int data type can store only two bytes of data. In reality, some integer data may have more length and may need more space in memory. In this situation, we should modify the memory space to accommodate large integer values. .
Modifiers can be used to modify the memory allocation of any fundamental data type. They are also called as Qualifiers.

Question 2.
What is wrong with the following C++ statement?
Answer:
long float x;
The modifier long must be associated with only double.

Question 3.
What Is variable? Why a variable called symbolic variable?
Answer:
Variables are user-defined names assigned to specific memory locations in which the values are stored. Variables are also identifiers; and hence,
the rules for naming the identifiers should be followed while naming a variable.
These are called as symbolic variables because these are named locations.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 4.
What do you mean by dynamic initialization of a variable? Give an example.
Answer:
A variable can be initialized during the execution of a program. It is known as Dynamic
initialization.
For example:
int sum = num1+num2;
This initializes sum using the known values of num1 and num2 during the execution.

Question 5.
What is wrong with the following statement?
Answer:
const int x ;
In the above statement x must be initialized. It is missing. It may rewritten as
const mt x =10;

Evaluate Yourself

Question 1.
What is meant by type conversion?
Answer:
The process of converting one fundamental type into another is called as “Type Conversion”. C++ provides two types of conversions.

  1. Implicit type conversion
  2. Explicit type conversion

Question 2.
How implicit conversion different from explicit conversion?
Answer:
An Implicit type conversion is a conversion performed by the compiler automatically. Implicit conversion is also called as “Automatic conversion”.
An explicit conversion of variables or expressions from one data type to another specific data type is by the programmer. It is called as “type casting”.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 3.
What is difference between endl and \n?
Answer:
There is a difference between endl and ‘\n’ even though they are performing similar tasks.
endl – Inserts a new line and flushes the buffer (Flush means – dean)
‘\n’ – Inserts only a new line.

Question 4.
What is the use of references?
Answer:
A reference provides an alias for a previously defined variable. Declaration of a reference consists of base type and an & (ampersand) symbol; reference variable name is assigned the value of a previously declared variable.
Syntax:
<&reference_variable>=

Question 5.
What is the use of setprecision ( )?
Answer:
setprecision ( ):
This is used to display numbers with fractions in specific number of digits.
Syntax:
setprecision (number of digits);
Example:
float hra = 1200.123;
cout << setprecision (5) << hra;
The given value 1200.123 will be displayed in 5 digits including fractions. The output will be 1200.1

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Hands On Practice

Question 1.
Write C++ programs to interchange the values of two variables.
a) Using with third variable C++PROGRAM:
#include
using namespace std;
int main()
{
intx,y,t;
cout<<“\nEnter two numbers”; cin>>x>>y;
cout<<“\nValues before interchage
x=”<<x<<“\ty=”<<y;
t=x;
x=y;
y=t;
cout<<“\nValues after interchage x=”<<x<<“\ty=”<<y;
return 0;
}
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++ 23

b) Without using third variable C++ PI OGRAM:
#include
using namespace std;
int main ()
{
int x,y;
cout<<“\nEnter two numbers”; cin>>x>>y;
cout<<“\nValues before interchage
x=”<<x<<“\ty=”<<y;
//interchage process without using third
variable
x=x+y;
y=x-y;
x=x-y;
cout<<“\nValues after interchage x=”<<x<<“\ty=”<<y;
return 0;
}
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++ 24

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 2.
Write C++ programs to do the following:
a) To find the perimeter and area of a quadrant.
C++ PROGRAM:
#include
using namespace std;
int mainQ()
{
float ppm,area;
cout<<“\nEnter radius cin>>r;
area = 3.14 * r * r / 4;
pm = 3.14 * r / 2;
cout<<“\nQuadrant Area = “<<area;
cout<<“\n\nQuadrant Perimeter = “<<pm;
return 0;
}
OutPut
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++ 25

b) To find the area of triangle.
C++ PROGRAM 1:
(Area of triangle when b and h values are known)
#include
using namespace std;
int main()
{
float b,h,area;
cout<<“\nEnter b and h value of triangle cin>>b>>h;
// Area of triangle when b and h values are known
area = b * h / 2;
cout<<“‘\nBase value = “<<b<<“Height = “<<h<<“Triangle Area = “<<area;
return 0;
}
OutPut
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++ 26
C++ PROGRAM 2:
(Area of triangle when three sides are known)
#inciude
#include using namespace std;
int main()
{
float a,b,c,area,s;
cout<<“\nEnter three sides of triangle cin>>a>>b>>c;
//Area of triangle when three sides are known
s = (a+b+c)/2;
area = sqrt(s*(s-a)*(s-b)*(s-c));
cout<<“\n Sidel value = “<<a<<“Side2
value = “<<b<<” Side3 value =”<<c;
cout<<“\nTriangie Area = “<<area;
return 0;
}
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++ 27
c. To convert the temperature from Celsius to Fahrenheit.
C++ PROGRAM:
//Convertion of the temperature from Celsius to Fahrenheit
#include< iostream>
using namespace std;
int main()
{
float c,f;
cout<<”\nEnter Celsius value “; cin>>c;
f=9*c/5+32;
cout«”\nTemperature in Celsius = “<<C;
cout < <“\nTemperature in Fahrenheit =
“<<f;
return 0;
}
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++ 28

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++

Question 3.
Write a C++ to find the total and percentage of marks you secured from 10th Standard Public Exam. Display all the marks one-by- one along with total and percentage. Apply formatting functions.
C++ PROGRAM:
#include
#include
using namespace std;
int rnain()
{
int tarn,enm,mam,som,scm,total,avg; char name[30];
cout<<“\nEnter name of the student cin>>name;
cout<<“\nEnterTamil mark”; cin>>tam;
cout<<“\nEnter English mark”; cin>>enm;
cout<<“\nEnter Maths mark “; cin>>mam;
cout<<“\nEnter Science mark “; cin>>scm;
cout<<“\nEnter Social Science mark”; cin>>som; .
total = tarn + enm + mam + scm + som; avg = total / 5;
cout<<“\n\t\tlOth Standard Public Exam Mark”<<end!<<endl;
cout<<setw(30)<<“Name of the student «name<<endk<endl;
cout<<setw(30)<<setfill(“)<<“Tamil mark
< <setw(3)< <setfill(‘0’)< <tam< cout<<setw(30)<<setfillC ‘)<<“English
mark “<setw(3)<<setfill(‘0’)<<enm< cout<<setw(30)<<setfillC ‘)<<“Maths mark
< <setw(3)< <setfillCO’)< <mam< <endl< <endl;
cout<<setw(30)<<setfillC ‘)<<“Science
mark :”<<setw(3)<<setfill(‘0’)<<scm< cout< < setw(3G) < < setfi 11C ‘) < < “Soda I
Science mark :”<<setw(3)<<setfillC0’)< cout<<setw(30)<<setfillC ‘)«’Total Marks <<setw(3)<<setfillC0’)<<totak<endk<endl;
cout<<setw(30)«setfillC ‘)«”Average mark:”
<<setw(3)<<setfill(‘0’)< return 0;
}
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Introduction to C++ 29

Tamil Nadu 11th Chemistry Model Question Papers 2020-2021 English Tamil Medium

Subject Matter Experts at SamacheerKalvi.Guide have created Samacheer Kalvi Tamil Nadu State Board Syllabus New Paper Pattern 11th Chemistry Model Question Papers 2020-2021 with Answers Pdf Free Download in English Medium and Tamil Medium of TN 11th Standard Chemistry Public Exam Question Papers Answer Key, New Paper Pattern of HSC 11th Class Chemistry Previous Year Question Papers, Plus One +1 Chemistry Model Sample Papers are part of Tamil Nadu 11th Model Question Papers.

Let us look at these Government of Tamil Nadu State Board 11th Chemistry Model Question Papers Tamil Medium with Answers 2020-21 Pdf. Students can view or download the Class 11th Chemistry New Model Question Papers 2021 Tamil Nadu English Medium Pdf for their upcoming Tamil Nadu HSC Board Exams. Students can also read Tamilnadu Samcheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide.

TN State Board 11th Chemistry Model Question Papers 2020 2021 English Tamil Medium

Tamil Nadu 11th Chemistry Model Question Papers English Medium 2020-2021

Tamil Nadu 11th Chemistry Model Question Papers Tamil Medium 2020-2021

  • Tamil Nadu 11th Chemistry Model Question Paper 1 Tamil Medium
  • Tamil Nadu 11th Chemistry Model Question Paper 2 Tamil Medium
  • Tamil Nadu 11th Chemistry Model Question Paper 3 Tamil Medium
  • Tamil Nadu 11th Chemistry Model Question Paper 4 Tamil Medium
  • Tamil Nadu 11th Chemistry Model Question Paper 5 Tamil Medium

11th Chemistry Model Question Paper Design 2020-2021 Tamil Nadu

Types of QuestionsMarksNo. of Questions to be AnsweredTotal Marks
Part-I Objective Type11515
Part-II Very Short Answers
(Totally 9 questions will be given. Answer any Six. Any one question should be answered compulsorily)
2612
Part-Ill Short Answers
(Totally 9 questions will be given. Answer any Six. Any one question should be answered compulsorily)
3618
Part-IV Essay Type5525
Total70
Practical Marks + Internal Assessment (20+10)30
Total Marks100

Tamil Nadu 11th Chemistry Model Question Paper Weightage of Marks

PurposeWeightage
1. Knowledge30%
2. Understanding40%
3. Application20%
4. Skill/Creativity10%

It is necessary that students will understand the new pattern and style of Model Question Papers of 11th Standard Chemistry Tamilnadu State Board Syllabus according to the latest exam pattern. These Tamil Nadu Plus One 11th Chemistry Model Question Papers State Board Tamil Medium and English Medium are useful to understand the pattern of questions asked in the board exam. Know about the important concepts to be prepared for TN HSLC Board Exams and Score More marks.

We hope the given Samacheer Kalvi Tamil Nadu State Board Syllabus New Paper Pattern Class 11th Chemistry Model Question Papers 2020 2021 with Answers Pdf Free Download in English Medium and Tamil Medium will help you get through your subjective questions in the exam.

Let us know if you have any concerns regarding the Tamil Nadu Government 11th Chemistry State Board Model Question Papers with Answers 2020 21, TN 11th Std Chemistry Public Exam Question Papers with Answer Key, New Paper Pattern of HSC Class 11th Chemistry Previous Year Question Papers, Plus One +1 Chemistry Model Sample Papers, drop a comment below and we will get back to you as soon as possible.